Ece

MEPCO SCHLENK ENGINEERING COLLEGE, SIVAKASI (AUTONOMOUS)
AFFILIATED TO ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI 600 025

REGULATIONS: MEPCO - R2015 (FULL TIME)
(CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM)
B. E. ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Department Vision Department Mission
"To render services to meet the growing global "To enable Graduates evolve as Competent
challenges of Engineering industries and organizations Hardware and Software Engineers needed by
by educating students to become exemplary Industry with emphasis on virtues contributing to
professional Electronics and Communication Societal Welfare"
Engineers of high ethics"
UG Programme Educational Objectives (PEOs)
I. Professional Development: Integrate fundamentals and up to date approaches derived from the
engineering sciences and practice to accomplish professional development in a responsive and
innovative manner.
II. Team Work and Leadership: Handle multi-faceted and multi-disciplinary projects to engage in effective
teamwork & exercise leadership with significant legal, social, environmental and economic
considerations.
III. Lifelong Learning &Virtues: Continually receptive to new technological and cultural challenges
through life-long learning leading to advanced degrees, publications, presentations, awards and exhibit
good citizenship with elegant mannerism
UG Programme Outcomes (POs)
1. Apply knowledge of mathematics, science and Engineering fundamentals to solve Electronics and
Communication engineering problems
2. Identify, formulate and solve Electronics and Communication Engineering Problems.
3. Design electronic circuits and modules for communication system adhering standards for the benefits of
society.
4. Design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data related to Electronics and
Communication engineering domain.
5. Apply modern engineering tools and techniques to solve problems with an awareness of their limitations.
6. Function commendably as a member or leader in multi-disciplinary teams.
7. Communicate effectively by writing technical reports and presentations.
8. Address societal, legal, cultural, health and safety issues applicable to the design of electronic and
communication systems.
9. Adopt and exhibit professional knowledge with ethical responsibilities.
10. Design Electronics and Communication Engineering products to green and sustainable development.
11. Perform business practices such as risk and change management and understand their limitations.
12. Develop confidence through self-education to engage in life - long learning.
SEMESTER- I (Common to all UG Programmes)
SL. NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

THEORY
1. 15HS101 Technical English I 3 0 2 4
2. 15BS101 Mathematics I 3 2 0 4
3. 15BS102 Engineering Physics 3 0 0 3
4. 15BS103 Engineering Chemistry 3 0 0 3
5. 15GE101 Computer Programming 3 0 0 3
6. 15GE102 Engineering Graphics 2 0 4 4
PRACTICAL
7. 15BS151 Physics and Chemistry Laboratory 0 0 4 2
8. 15GE151 Computer Programming Laboratory 0 0 4 2
9. 15GE152 Engineering Practices Laboratory 0 0 4 2
TOTAL 17 2 18 27
SEMESTER II Electronics and Communication Engineering
SL. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

NO.
THEORY
1. 15HS201 Technical English II* 3 0 0 3
2. 15BS201 Mathematics II* 3 2 0 4
3. 15BS202 Environmental Science and Disaster Management* 3 0 0 3
4. 15BS204 Materials Science
3 0 0 3
(Common to EEE, ECE, CSE & IT)
5. 15GE203 Basic Civil and Mechanical Engineering
3 0 0 3
(Common to EEE/ECE)
6. 15EE202 Electric Circuits and Machines 3 2 0 4
PRACTICAL
7. 15BS251 Applied Physics and Environmental Chemistry Laboratory 0 0 4 2
(Common to EEE / ECE / CSE / MECH / IT / BT)
(Laboratory classes on alternate weeks for Physics
and Environmental Chemistry)
8. 15EE252 Electric Circuits and Machines Lab 0 0 4 2
9. 15GE251 Linux Commands and Shell Programming Lab 0 0 4 2
(Common to ECE / BT)
TOTAL 18 4 12 26
* Common to all UG Programmes
III SEMESTER
SL. COURSE
COURSE TITLE L T P C
NO. CODE
THEORY
1. 15MA303 Mathematics III - Transform, Probability and Numerical 3 2 0 4
Methods
2. 15EC301 Digital Electronics 3 0 0 3
3. 15EC302 Electronic CircuitsI 3 0 0 3
4. 15EC303 Engineering Electromagnetics 3 2 0 4
5. 15EC304 Signals and Systems 3 2 0 4
6. 15EC305 Data Structures 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
1
7. 15EC351 Digital Electronics Laboratory 0 0 4 2
8. 15EC352 Electronic Circuits Laboratory I 0 0 4 2
9. 15EC353 Data Structures Laboratory 0 0 4 2
CREDITS 18 6 12 27
IV SEMESTER
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
THEORY
1. 15MA403 Mathematics IV - Linear Algebra and Random 3 2 0 4
Processes
2. 15EC401 Electronic CircuitsII 3 0 0 3
3. 15EC402 Communication Theory 3 2 0 4
4. 15EC403 Transmission Lines and Wave Guides 3 2 0 4
5. 15EC404 Digital Signal Processing 3 0 0 3
6. 15HS401 Professional Ethics in Engineering 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7. 15EC451 Electronic Circuits Laboratory II 0 0 4 2
8. 15EC452 Digital Signal Processing Laboratory 0 0 4 2
9. 15HS451 Presentation Skills Laboratory 0 0 2 1
(Common to ECE / MECH / IT / BT)
CREDITS 18 6 10 26
V SEMESTER
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
THEORY
1. 15EC501 Core 1 : Digital Communication 3 0 0 3
2. 15EC502 Core 2 : Linear Integrated Circuits 3 0 0 3
15EC503 Core 3 : System Design using Microprocessors 3 0 0 3
3.
and Microcontrollers
4. Core Elective I 3 0 0 3
5. Allied Elective I 3 0 0 3
6. Open Elective I 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7. 15EC551 Linear Integrated Circuits Laboratory 0 0 4 2
8. 15EC552 Microprocessors & Microcontrollers System Laboratory 0 0 4 2
9. 15EC553 Communication Laboratory 0 0 4 2
CREDITS 18 0 12 24
VI SEMESTER
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
THEORY
1. 15EC601 Core 4 : Antennas and Wave Propagation 3 2 0 4
2. 15EC602 Core 5 : Computer Communication Networks 3 0 0 3
3. 15EC603 Core 6 : VLSI Design 3 0 0 3
4. Core Elective II 3 2 0 4
5. Allied Elective II 3 0 0 3
6. Open Elective II 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7. 15EC651 Computer Communication Networks Laboratory 0 0 4 2
8. 15EC652 VLSI Design Laboratory 0 0 4 2
9. 15HS651 Professional Communication Skills Laboratory 0 0 4 2
(Common to ECE / MECH / IT / BT)
2
CREDITS 18 4 12 26
VII SEMESTER
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
THEORY
1. 15EC701 Core 7 : Optical and Microwave Engineering 3 0 0 3
2. 15EC702 Core 8 : Embedded Processors and Applications 3 0 0 3
3. Core Elective III 3 0 0 3
4. Core Elective IV 3 0 0 3
5. Core Elective V 3 0 0 3
Open Elective III 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
6. 15EC751 Optical and Microwave Laboratory 0 0 4 2
7. 15EC752 Embedded Systems Laboratory 0 0 4 2
CREDITS 18 0 8 22
VIII SEMESTER
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
THEORY
1. Core Elective VI 3 0 0 3
2. Open Elective IV 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
3. 15EC851 Project Work 0 0 12 6
CREDITS 6 0 12 12
Total No. of Credits : 190 (Regular)
Total No. of Credits : 137 (LES)
Curriculum for Core Electives
Core Elective I(V Semester)
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15ECC01 Control Systems 3 0 0 3
2. 15ECC02 Computer Architecture and Organization 3 0 0 3
3. 15ECC03 Television & Video Engineering 3 0 0 3
4. 15ECC04 Measurements & Instrumentation 3 0 0 3
5. 15ECC05 Engineering Acoustics 3 0 0 3
6. 15ECC06 Object Oriented Programming in C++ 2 0 2 3
Core Elective II(VI Semester)
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15ECC07 Statistical Digital Signal Processing 3 2 0 4
2. 15ECC08 Wireless Communication 3 2 0 4
3. 15ECC09 Network Analysis and Synthesis 3 2 0 4
4. 15ECC10 Numerical Methods for Electro Magnetic fields 3 2 0 4
5. 15ECC11 Advanced Computer Programming 3 0 2 4
3
Core Elective III (VII Semester)
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15ECC12 Speech Signal Processing 3 0 0 3
2. 15ECC13 Advanced Electronic System Design 3 0 0 3
3. 15ECC14 Wireless Communication Networks 3 0 0 3
4. 15ECC15 Digital Image Processing 3 0 0 3
5. 15ECC16 Telecommunication Switching Systems 3 0 0 3
6. 15ECC17 RF Engineering 3 0 0 3
7. 15ECC18 Sensors and Actuators 3 0 0 3
Core Elective IV(VII Semester)
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15ECC19 Parallel and Distributed Processing 3 0 0 3
2. 15ECC20 High Speed Networks 3 0 0 3
3. 15ECC21 CDMA Engineering 3 0 0 3
4. 15ECC22 VLSI Signal Processing 3 0 0 3
5. 15ECC23 Bio MEMs 3 0 0 3
6. 15ECC24 Medical Electronics 3 0 0 3
Core Elective V(VII Semester)
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15ECC25 Internet and Java 2 0 2 3
2. 15ECC26 Cryptography and Network Security 3 0 0 3
3. 15ECC27 Multimedia Compression Techniques 3 0 0 3
4. 15ECC28 Multi rate and sparse Signal Processing 3 0 0 3
5. 15ECC29 Radar and Navigational Aids 3 0 0 3
6. 15ECC30 Satellite Communication Systems 3 0 0 3
Core Elective VI(VIII Semester)
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15ECC31 Avionics 3 0 0 3
2. 15ECC32 Electromagnetic Interference and Compatibility 3 0 0 3
3. 15ECC33 Mobile Adhoc Networks 3 0 0 3
4. 15ECC34 4G Wireless Systems 3 0 0 3
5. 15ECC35 Real Time Operating System 3 0 0 3
6. 15ECC36 RF MEMS 3 0 0 3
4
ALLIED ELECTIVES - CURRICULUM
Offered by Civil Department
V Semester
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15CEA01 Industrial Pollution Prevention and Control 3 0 0 3
2. 15CEA02 Introduction to Engineering Seismology 3 0 0 3
3. 15CEA03 Solar Energy Utilization 3 0 0 3
4. 15CEA04 Environmental Geotechnology 3 0 0 3
5. 15CEA05 Principles of Global Positioning System 3 0 0 3
VI Semester
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15CEA06 Non-Conventional Energy Resources 3 0 0 3
2. 15CEA07 Energy Conservation and management 3 0 0 3
3. 15CEA08 Environmental Impact Assessment 3 0 0 3
4. 15CEA09 Fundamentals of Supply Chain 3 0 0 3
5. 15CEA10 Coastal Engineering 3 0 0 3
6. 15CEA11 Manufacturing Cost Estimation 3 0 0 3
Offered by EEE Department
V Semester
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15EEA01 Industrial Instrumentation 3 0 0 3
2. 15EEA02 Illumination Engineering 3 0 0 3
3. 15EEA03 Switch Mode Power Converters 3 0 0 3
4. 15EEA04 Power Plant Instrumentation and Control 3 0 0 3
5. 15EEA05 Electrical Machines and Drives 3 0 0 3
VI Semester
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15EEA06 Real Time Embedded Systems 3 0 0 3
2. 15EEA07 Fundamentals of Electric Power Utilization 3 0 0 3
3. 15EEA08 Soft Computing Techniques and Applications 3 0 0 3
4. 15EEA09 Fundamentals of Power Quality 3 0 0 3
5. 15EEA10 Wiring, Estimation and Costing 3 0 0 3
Offered by CSE Department
V SEMESTER
SL
COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
NO.
1. 15CSA01 Internet Programming 3 0 0 3
2. 15CSA02 Fundamentals of Software Engineering 3 0 0 3
3. 15CSA03 Introduction to Database 3 0 0 3
4. 15CSA04 Introduction to Data Structures and Algorithms 3 0 0 3
5
5. 15CSA05 Fundamentals of Operating Systems 3 0 0 3
VI SEMESTER
SL COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15CSA06 Fundamentals of Cloud Computing 3 0 0 3
2. 15CSA07 Principles of Multimedia 3 0 0 3
3. 15CSA08 Introduction to Genetic Algorithms 3 0 0 3
4. 15CSA09 XML Programming 3 0 0 3
5. 15CSA10 Introduction to UML 3 0 0 3
6. 15CSA11 Introduction to Computer Organization 3 0 0 3
Offered by Mechanical Department

V SEMESTER
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
THEORY
1. 15MEA01 Automotive Maintenance and Pollution Control 3 0 0 3
2. 15MEA02 Fundamentals of Energy Resources 3 0 0 3
3. 15MEA03 Manufacturing for Industrial Electronics 3 0 0 3
4. 15MEA04 Human Factors in Engineering 3 0 0 3
5. 15MEA05 Decision Support Systems 3 0 0 3
6. 15MEA06 Engineering Economics and Cost Analysis 3 0 0 3
7. 15MEA07 Nano Technology 3 0 0 3
8. 15MEA08 Fuel Cell & Hydrogen Energy 3 0 0 3
9. 15MEA09 Bio-Mechanics and human body vibration 3 0 0 3
VI SEMESTER
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
THEORY
1. 15MEA10 Fundamentals of Thermal Science 3 0 0 3
2. 15MEA11 Fundamentals of Lithography 3 0 0 3
3. 15MEA12 Fundamentals of Fire Safety Engineering 3 0 0 3
4. 15MEA13 High Energetic Material - Propellants 3 0 0 3
5. 15MEA14 Direct Digital Manufacturing 3 0 0 3
6. 15MEA15 Instrumental Analysis of Materials 3 0 0 3
7. 15MEA16 Basics of Aircraft and Space Technology 3 0 0 3
8. 15MEA17 Introduction to MATLAB with Engineering Applications 3 0 0 3
9. 15MEA18 Micro and Nano Fabrication 3 0 0 3
10. 15MEA19 Fundamentals of Nature Inspired Algorithms 3 0 0 3
11. 15MEA20 Energy Efficient Buildings 3 0 0 3
12. 15MEA21 Water Treatment Technology 3 0 0 3
Offered by IT Department
V SEMESTER
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15ITA01 Introduction to Computer Graphics 3 0 0 3
2. 15ITA02 Rich Internet Application 3 0 0 3
3. 15ITA03 Introduction to Java 3 0 0 3
4. 15ITA04 Perl 3 0 0 3
5. 15ITA05 Fuzzy Systems 3 0 0 3
6
VI SEMESTER
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15ITA06 Graphics Programming 3 0 0 3
2. 15ITA07 PHP Programming 3 0 0 3
3. 15ITA08 Android Application Development 3 0 0 3
4. 15ITA09 Python Programming 3 0 0 3
5. 15ITA10 Decision Making Methods 3 0 0 3
Offered by Bio-Tech Department
V SEMESTER
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15BTA01 Basic Cell and Molecular Biology 3 0 0 3
2. 15BTA02 Basic Microbiology 3 0 0 3
3. 15BTA03 Basic Biochemistry 3 0 0 3
4. 15BTA04 Basic immunology 3 0 0 3
VI SEMESTER
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15BTA05 Chemicals in Environment and Public Health 3 0 0 3
2. 15BTA06 Biological Waste Management 3 0 0 3
3. 15BTA07 Nanobiotechnology 3 0 0 3
4. 15BTA08 Human Physiology 3 0 0 3
Offered by MBA Department
VI SEMESTER
SL. COURSE
NO. CODE
1. 15BAA01 Essentials of Finance 3 0 0 3
2. 15BAA02 Essentials of Marketing 3 0 0 3
3. 15BAA03 Essentials of Human Resource Management 3 0 0 3
7
15HS101 Technical English I LT P C
(Common to all UG Programmes)
3 02 4
Course Objectives are to:
enable the students of Engineering and Technology build up vocabulary

improve grammatical accuracy
develop language functions
understand the basic nuances of language
Course Outcomes:
The students of Engineering and Technology will be able to build up their vocabulary
Grammatical accuracy will be improved
Language functions will be developed
The basic nuances of language will be understood
UNIT-I 12
ListeningImportance of listening- Types of listening - Listening to audio files and understanding the concept;
Speaking -Speaking about ones place, important festivals etc. Introducing oneself, ones family / friend; Asking
for Information; Reading - Skimming and Scanning - Note-making - Reading comprehension exercises; Writing -
Free writing on any given topic (My favourite place / Hobbies / School life, etc.) - Sentence completion-
Autobiographical writing (writing about ones leisure time activities, hometown, etc.) - Creative Writing;
GrammarParts of Speech- Kinds of Sentences- Framing questions; Vocabulary -Word formation - Word
expansion
UNIT-II 12
Listening - Listening and responding to video lectures / talks; Listening exercises with sample telephone
conversations; Speaking - Describing a simple process (filling a form, etc.) - Asking & answering questions on
various everyday activities: Telephone skills Telephone etiquette. Reading Critical reading - Finding key
information in a given text and paraphrasing - Sifting facts from opinions; Value Based Text Reading and
thematic analysis. Writing: Informal letter Letter to the editor (Regarding Social Issues) - Single line Definitions
Recommendations- Paragraph Writing; (cause & effect / compare & contrast / narrative / analytical)
Grammar tense - Use of sequence words - Adverbs -; Vocabulary prefixes and Suffixes -Compound words.
UNIT-III 12
Listening - Listening to specific task - focused audio tracks - Listening to different accents - Watching videos /
documentaries and responding to questions based on them and giving personal opinion.
Speaking - Speaking in formal situations (teachers, officials, foreigners); Role-play and Simulation
Reading - Reading and interpreting data given as visual material. Writing Coherence and cohesion in writing- -
Channel conversion -Process descriptions interpretations of Pictures of flow charts, graphs, pie charts and
tables - Essay writing Different types of essays. Grammar Articles - Connective adverbs Subject-verb
agreement-; Vocabulary Same word in a different parts of speech & Word Association
UNIT-IV 12
Listening - Excerpts from films focusing on theme and follow up exercises - film scenes; Speaking - Responding
to questions - Giving impromptu talks, Making presentations on given topics- Group interaction; Reading -
Making inference from the reading passage - Predicting the content of a reading passage; Jumbled sentences;
Writing - Business Letters- Sales and Credit letters; Letter of Enquiry; Letter of Quotation, Order, Claim and
8
Adjustment Letters. Grammar Preposition future time reference; Vocabulary - Single word substitutes - Use
of abbreviations & acronyms.
UNIT-V 12
Listening - Listening to Speeches/Presentations, Listening to broadcast & telecast from Radio & TV; Sample
interview; Speaking; Different forms of interviews - Speaking at different types of interview; Reading - Email
communication - Reading the attachment files having a poem/joke/proverb - Sending their responses through
email Writing; Writing: invititation letter, accepting, declining letter and permission letter, Creative writing,
Poster making, Interpreting posters; Grammar Editing-Direct and indirect speech; Vocabulary - Lexical items
(fixed / semi fixed expressions).
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
1. Dept. of English, Anna University, Chennai. Mindscapes: English for Technologists and Engineers.
Orient Black Swan, Chennai. 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Raman, Meenakshi & Sangeetha Sharma. Technical Communication: English Skills for Engineers.
Oxford University Press, New Delhi. 2011.
2. Dhanavel, S.P. English and communication skills for students of science and Engineering.
Orient Black Swan publications, Chennai, 2011.
3. Rizvi M, Ashraf. Effective Technical Communication. Tata McGraw-Hill publishing company limited,
New Delhi, 2007.
4. Rutherford, Andrea J. Basic Communication Skills for Technology. Pearson Edition
(II Edition), New Delhi, 2001.
Extensive reading:
1. Kalam, Abdul. The Wings of Fire, Universities Press, Hyderabad. 1999.
15BS101 MATHEMATICS I LT P C
3 20 4
To know the matrix algebra techniques needed by engineers for practical applications
To make the student knowledgeable in the area of infinite series and their convergence so that he/ she
will be familiar with limitations of using infinite series approximations for solutions arising in
mathematical modeling
To familiarize the student with functions of several variables. This is needed in engineering problems
To introduce the concepts of improper integrals, Gamma, Beta functions which are needed in
engineering problems
To acquaint the student with mathematical tools needed in evaluating multiple integrals and their usage
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the students are able to

Expertise matrix algebra
Apply tests of convergence
Understand and apply functions of several variables
9
Evaluate integrals using Beta and Gamma functions
Expertise multiple integrals and their usage
UNIT 0 (Not for Examination) 5+ 0
Basic concepts on limits, continuity, derivative & integrals of a single variable
UNIT-I MATRICES 9+3
Characteristic equation - Eigen values and Eigenvectors of a real matrix Properties of eigen values and
eigenvectors Cayley-Hamilton Theorem Diagonalization of matrices Reduction of a quadratic form to
canonical form by orthogonal transformation Nature of quadratic forms
UNIT-II FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 9+3
Partial derivatives Homogeneous functions and Eulers theorem-Total derivative Differentiation of implicit
functions-Change of variables - Jacobians Partial differentiation of implicit functions Taylors series for
functions of two variables Errors and approximations - Maxima and minima of functions of two variables
Lagranges method of undetermined multipliers
UNIT-III INFINITE SERIES 9+3
Sequences Convergence of series General properties Series of positive terms Tests for convergence:
Comparison test, Integral test, Comparison of ratios and DAlemberts ratio test (Proofs excluded) Alternating
series Series of positive and negative terms Absolute and conditional convergence Power Series
Convergence of exponential, logarithmic and Binomial Series
UNIT-IV IMPROPER INTEGRALS 9+3
Improper integrals of the first and second kind and their convergence Evaluation of integrals involving one
parameter by Leibnitz rule Beta and Gamma functions Properties Evaluation of integrals using Beta and
Gamma functions Error functions
UNIT-V MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 9+3
Double integrals Change of order of integration Double integrals in polar coordinates Area enclosed by
plane curves Triple integrals Triple integrals in cylindrical and spherical coordinates Volume of Solids
L= 45 hours T = 15 hours Total = 60 hours
TEXTBOOKS:
rd
1. Grewal B.S., Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 43
Edition, 2013
2. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons (ASIA) Pvt. Ltd, Singapore,
th
9 Edition, 2013
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Narosa Publications, New Delhi,
th
4 Edition, 2014
nd
2. Greenberg M.D., Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2 Edition,
th
11 Reprint, 2013
th
3. Peter V.ONeil, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Cengage Learning India Pvt., Ltd, New Delhi, 7
Edition, 2012
rd
4. Monty J. Strauss, Gerald L. Bradley, Karl J. Smith, Calculus, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 3
Edition 2007 (For Unit 0-Section 2.1,2.3,3.1,5.2, Unit 2,3,5)
5. Ramana B.V, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
th
Company, New Delhi, 11 Reprint, 2010
10
15BS102 ENGINEERING PHYSICS LT PC
30 0 3
Course Objective
To impart sound knowledge about basic concepts of physics.
To introduce the basic physics concepts relevant to different branches of Engineering and Technology
To introduce the fundamentals of physics and its applications in engineering.
Course Outcomes:
The students are able to understand the elastic properties of the materials.
The students will acquire knowledge about solid state physics.
The students will acquire knowledge about the basic concepts of physics in the topics such as
acoustics, ultrasonics, thermal physics, and applied optics.
UNITI PROPERTIES OF MATTER 9
Elasticity - Poissons ratio and relationship between moduli (qualitative) - Stress-strain diagram and its uses-
factors affecting tensile strength - bending of beams - cantilever - bending moment - theory and experiment of
Youngs modulus determination - Uniform and non-uniform bending - I shaped girders - twisting couple - hollow
cylinder - shaft - torsion pendulum - determination of rigidity modulus- moment of inertia of a body (regular and
irregular).
UNITII ACOUSTICS AND ULTRASONICS 9
Classification of sound - loudness and intensity - Weber-Fechner Law - standard intensity and intensity level -
decibel - reverberation - reverberation time - rate of growth and decay of sound intensity - derivation of Sabines
formula - absorption coefficient and its determination factors affecting acoustics of buildings : focusing,
interference, echo, Echelon effect, resonance - noise and their remedies. Ultrasonics - production -
magnetostriction and piezoelectric methods - detection of ultrasound - acoustic grating - industrial applications -
NDT Ultrasonic method: scan modes and practice.
UNITIII THERMAL PHYSICS 9
Thermal expansion - thermal stress - expansion joints - bimetallic strips - thermal conductivity- conductions in
solids - Forbes and Lees disc methods - Rectilinear flow of heat through a rod -flow of heat through a
compound media - radial flow of heat thermal insulation of buildings Laws of blackbody radiation: Kirchhoffs
law, Stephens law, Wiens law, Raleigh-Jeans law and Plancks law (derivation). Laws of thermodynamics -
Otto and diesel engines and their efficiency - entropy - entropy of Carnots cycle - reverse Carnots cycle -
refrigerator.
UNITIV APPLIED OPTICS 9
Interference - Michelson interferometer: construction, working, determination of wave length and thickness - anti-
reflection coating - air wedge and its application - Lasers - Einsteins coefficients - CO2, Nd:YAG and
semiconductor lasers - homojunction and heterojunction -construction and working - applications - Optical fibers -
classification (index & mode based) - principle and propagation of light in optical fibers - acceptance angle and
numerical aperture - fiber optic communication system - active and passive sensors.
UNITV SOLID STATE PHYSICS 9
Growth of single crystals-Czochrolski method and Bridgeman-Stockbarger method - unit cell, crystal systems,
Bravais space lattices - crystal planes and directions, Miller indices - expressions for interplanar distance -
coordination number and packing factor for simple structures: SC, BCC, FCC and HCP - structure and
significance of NaCl, ZnS, diamond and graphite - crystal imperfections: point defects, dislocations and stacking
faults.
11
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
T1. Marikani A, Engineering Physics, PHI, New Delhi, 2013.

T2. Gaur R.K., and Gupta, S.L., Engineering Physics, Dhanpat Raj Publications, 2013
REFERENCE BOOKS:
R1. Sankar, B.N., Pillai.S.O., Engineering Physics, New Age International (P) Ltd., 2009.
R2. Palanisamy, P.K., Engineering Physics, Scitech Publications (P) Ltd, 2009.
R3. Arumugam, M., Engineering Physics, Anuradha Publications, 2000.
R4. John W. Jewett. Jr, and Raymon A. Serway, Physics for Scientists and Engineers with Modern Physics
Seventh Edition, Cengage Learnings, Delhi, India, 2013.
R5. David Halliday, Robert Resnick and Jearl Walker, Fundamentals of Physics, sixth edition, John Wiley
and Sons, New Delhi, 2010.
15BS103 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY LT PC

(Common to all UG Programmes) 30 0 3
Course Objective
The student should be familiar with
The treatment of water for potable and industrial purposes.

The principles of electrochemistry, electrochemical cells, emf and applications of emf measurements.
The principles of corrosion and corrosion control techniques.
Different materials and their engineering applications.
Different types of fuels and combustion.

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Understand the basic principles of water quality parameters, their analysis and various water treatment
processes for domestic and industrial applications.
Understand the basic principles of electrochemistry and its applications.
Know the principles, various types of corrosion and corrosion control techniques.
Have a sound knowledge on various engineering materials and their industrial applications.
Have a sound knowledge on different types of fuels.

UNITI WATER TECHNOLOGY 9
Characteristics of water alkalinity types of alkalinity and determination hardness types of hardness and
estimation by EDTA method (problems on calculation of hardness only); Boiler feed water requirements
disadvantages of using hard water in boilers priming and foaming scales and sludges caustic embrittlement
boiler corrosion external conditioning (demineralization process) internal conditioning (colloidal, phosphate,
carbonate and calgon conditionings) Domestic water treatment disinfection methods (Chlorination,
Ozonation, UV treatment) break point chlorination salinity desalination by reverse osmosis.
UNITII ELECTROCHEMISTRY 9
Electrochemical cells reversible and irreversible cells EMF measurement of emf Single electrode potential
Nernst equation (problems) reference electrodes Standard Hydrogen electrode Calomel electrode Ion
selective electrode glass electrode and measurement of pH Standard Cell electrochemical series
significance potentiometric redox titration conductometric titrations (Strong acid Vs Strong base and Weak
12
acid Vs Strong base)
UNITIII CORROSION AND ITS CONTROL 9
Chemical corrosion Pilling-Bedworth rule electrochemical corrosion differential aeration corrosion factors
influencing corrosion different types galvanic corrosion erosion corrosion pitting corrosion crevice
corrosion waterline corrosion stress corrosion corrosion control sacrificial anode and impressed current
cathodic methods corrosion inhibitors Protective coatings metallic coating pretreatment of surface
hotdipping spraying cladding cementation electroplating (Cr, Cu, Ni and Au) electrolessplating
(electroless nickel plating only).
UNITIV ENGINEERING MATERIALS 9
Refractories classification acidic, basic and neutral refractories properties (refractoriness, refractoriness
under load, dimensional stability, porosity, thermal spalling) manufacture of alumina, magnesite and zirconia
bricks.
Lubricants mechanism of lubrication, liquid lubricants properties (viscosity index, flash and fire points, cloud
and pour points, oiliness) solid lubricants graphite and molybdenum disulphide semi solid lubricants and
emulsions.
Nanomaterials introduction to nano chemistry carbon nanotubes and their applications.
UNITV FUELS AND COMBUSTION 9
Fuels Classification Calorific value (Problems using Dulongs formula) Coal proximate and ultimate
analysis Hydrogenation of coal Petroleum processing and fractions cracking catalytic cracking and
methods knocking octane number and cetane number synthetic petrol Fischer-Tropsch and Bergius
processes Gaseous fuels Natural gas, CNG and LPG Flue gas analysis Orsat apparatus Combustion
theoretical calculation of air (Problems on calculation of weight of air only).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
th
1. P.C. Jain and Monika Jain, Engineering Chemistry, Dhanpat Rai Publishing Co.(P) Ltd., 16 Edition,
New Delhi (2013).
2. S.S.Dara, A text book of engineering chemistry, S. Chand & Co. Ltd., New Delhi (2010).
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Mars G. Fontana, Corrosion Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company (P) Ltd., New Delhi
(2009).
2. B. K. Sharma, Engineering chemistry, Krishna Prakasan Media (P) Ltd., Meerut (2006).
3. B. Sivasankar, Engineering Chemistry, Tata McGraw-Hill Pub. Co. Ltd, New Delhi (2008).
15GE101 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING LTPC

(Common to all UG Programmes) 30 03
Course Objectives:
To gain knowledge on problem solving techniques

To learn how to write modular and readable C programs
To understand the usage of arrays and strings
To learn to use pointers to access and manipulate memory
13
To exploit the notion of derived data types and files
Course Outcomes:
Solve problems using sound techniques

Develop modular C programs for a given problem
Store and manipulate homogeneous data using arrays and strings
Write programs that uses memory based on the run time needs
Store and manipulate heterogeneous data using structures
Write programs that manipulate data stored on permanent storage
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF C 9
Basic Organization of a Computer - Problem Solving Techniques: Introduction to Algorithm, Pseudo code, Flow
Chart.
Structure of C program, compilation and linking processes - C Tokens: Keywords, Data Types, Constants,
Variables - Declaration - Qualifiers - typedef - Enumeration - Pre-processor directives (#include, #define)
UNIT II BASIC CONSTRUCTS IN C 9
Managing simple Input and Output operations - Operators and Expressions - Decision Making: Branching
statements, Looping statements - Function: Declaration, Definition - Recursion - Storage classes
UNIT III ARRAYS AND STRINGS IN C 8
Arrays: Initialization - One dimensional, Two dimensional, and Multi-dimensional arrays - String: String
operations, Manipulating Strings - Pre-processor directives (#if, #else, #elif, #ifdef, #ifndef)
UNIT IV POINTERS IN C 10
Pointers - Parameter passing mechanism in functions - Dynamic Memory Allocation - Pointer arithmetic -
Pointers and one dimensional array - Pointers and Multi-Dimensional Array: Array of Pointers, Pointer to Pointer,
Pointer to an array - void Pointer - Pointer to function - Command Line Arguments
UNIT V STRUCTURES, UNIONS AND FILE HANDLING IN C 9
Structure: Declaration, Definition-Array of Structures - Pointer to Structure - Structure within a Structure - Bit
fields in Structure - Union - Files: File Management functions, Working with Text Files and Binary Files
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Pradip Dey, Manas Ghosh, Fundamentals of Computing and Programming in C, First Edition, Oxford
University Press, 2009
2. Byron S Gottfried, Programming with C, Schaums Outlines, Third Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2010
reprint.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Brian.W.Kernighan and Dennis.M.Ritchie, The C Programming language, Second Edition, Pearson

Education, 2006 reprint.
2. R.G. Dromey, How to Solve it by Computer, Pearson Education, 2008
3. Al Kelley, Ira Pohl, A Book on C : Programming in C, Fourth Edition, Pearson Education, 2008 reprint
4. Deitel.P.J and Deitel.H.M, C How to Program, Sixth Edition, Prentice-Hall of India, 2009 reprint.
14
5. Ashok N. Kamthane, Computer programming, Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2012.
6. Yashavant P. Kanetkar, Let Us C, Thirteenth Edition, BPB Publications, 2012.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/cprogramming/index.htm
2. http://www.cprogramming.com/tutorial/c-tutorial.html
3. http://www.w3schools.in/c
4. http://fresh2refresh.com/c-tutorial-for-beginners
ENGINEERING GRAPHICS LT PC
15GE102
(Common to all UG Programmes) 2 0 4 4
Course Objectives:
To gain knowledge on the basics of Engineering Drawing construction procedures.
To understand the principles involved in graphic skill for communication of concepts, ideas and design
of Engineering products.
To draw the drawing of various solids.
To expose the above to existing national standards related to technical drawings.
An ability to draw the drawing for any given object to the required standard.
Course Outcomes:
Sketch multiple views of Engineering components
Create the projection of point, straight line and plane
Project the solid objects
Section the solid
Develop lateral surfaces of solids
Apply isometric and perspective projections
Concepts and Conventions (Not For Examination) 5
Importance of graphics in engineering applications Use of drafting instruments BIS
conventions and specifications Lettering and Dimensioning-Size, layout and folding of drawing sheets.
UNITI PLANE CURVES AND PICTORIAL VIEWS TO ORTHOGRAPHIC 14
VIEWS
Geometrical Constructions like bisection of a straight line, division of a straight line into n equal parts, bisection
of angles, Curves used in engineering practices: Conics Construction of ellipse, parabola and hyperbola by
eccentricity method Construction of cycloid Construction of involutes of square and circle Drawing of
tangents and normal to the above curves.
Orthographic projection Principles Principal planes- Representation of Three Dimensional objects Layout
of views Sketching of multiple views (Front, Top and Side views) from pictorial views of simple objects and
Engineering Components.
UNITII PROJECTION OF POINTS, LINES AND PLANE SURFACES 14
First Angle projectionProjection of points in four quadrants. Projection of straight lines (only First angle
projection) inclined to both the principal planes Determination of true lengths and true inclinations by rotating
line method and traces.
Projection of planes (polygonal and circular surfaces) inclined to both the principal planes by change of position
method.
UNITIII PROJECTION OF SOLIDS 14
15
Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone when the axis is inclined to one of the
principal planes by change of position method. Projection of simple solids when the axis inclined to both planes.
UNITIV SECTION OF SOLIDS AND DEVELOPMENT OF LATERAL 14

SURFACES OF SOLIDS
Sectioning of above solids in simple vertical position when the cutting plane is inclined to the one of the principal
planes and perpendicular to the other Obtaining true shape of the section.
Development of lateral surfaces of simple solids Prisms, pyramids, cylinders and cones. Development of
lateral surfaces of sectioned solids and simple applications like funnel.
UNITV ISOMETRIC AND PERSPECTIVE PROJECTIONS 14
Principles of isometric projection Isometric scale Isometric View Isometric projections of simple solids and
cut solids Prisms, pyramids, cylinders, cones Combination of two solid objects in simple vertical positions.
Perspective projection of simple solidsPrisms, pyramids and cylinders by visual ray method.
TOTAL: 75 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
th
1. N.D. Bhatt, Engineering Drawing Charotar Publishing House, 50 Edition, (2010).
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Gopalakrishna K.R., Engineering Drawing (Vol. I&II combined), Subhas Stores, Bangalore, 2007.
2. Luzzader, Warren.J. and Duff,John M., Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing with an
introduction to Interactive Computer Graphics for Design and Production, Eastern Economy Edition,
Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2005.
3. Shah M.B., and Rana B.C., Engineering Drawing, Pearson, 2nd Edition, 2009.
4. Venugopal K. and Prabhu Raja V., Engineering Graphics, New Age International (P) Limited, 2008.
5. Natrajan K.V., A text book of Engineering Graphics, Dhanalakshmi Publishers, Chennai, 2009.
6. Basant Agarwal and Agarwal C.M., Engineering Drawing, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company
Limited, New Delhi, 2008.
Publication of Bureau of Indian Standards:
1. IS 10711 2001: Technical products Documentation Size and lay out of drawing
sheets.
2. IS 9609 (Parts 0 & 1) 2001: Technical products Documentation Lettering.
3. IS 10714 (Part 20) 2001 & SP 46 2003: Lines for technical drawings.
4. IS 11669 1986 & SP 46 2003: Dimensioning of Technical Drawings.
5. IS 15021 (Parts 1 to 4) 2001: Technical drawings Projection Methods.
Special points applicable to End Semester Examinations on Engineering Graphics:
1. There will be five questions, each of either or type covering all units of the syllabus.
2. All questions will carry equal marks of 20 each making a total of 100.
3. The answer paper shall consist of drawing sheets of A3 size only. The students will be permitted
to use appropriate scale to fit solution within A3 size.
4. The examination will be conducted in appropriate sessions on the same day
16
15BS151 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY LABORATORY L T PC
0 0 4 2
(Classes on alternate weeks for Physics and Chemistry)
Course Objectives:
To have a study on determination of Rigidity modulus and Youngs modulus

To be familiar with findings thickness of a thin paper
To deal with the determination of Ultrasonic velocity
To have a study on estimation of hardness and alkalinity of water
To deal with Conductometric titration and Potentiometric titration
Course Outcomes:
Find the moment of inertia of disc and Rigidity modulus of wire

Determine thickness of a thin sheet of paper
Find the specific resistance of wire
Estimate hardness and Alkalinity of water sample
Do Conductometric titration and Potentiometric titration
Find corrosion rate
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS FOR PHYSICS LABORATORY (Any FIVE Experiments)
1. Torsional pendulum Determination of rigidity modulus of wire and moment of inertia of disc.
2. Non-uniform pending- Youngs modulus determination
3. Air-wedge- Determination of thickness of a thin sheet of paper
4. Spectrometer- Determination of wavelength of Hg spectrum using grating
5. Lees disc-Determination of thermal conductivity of bad conductor
6. Determination of ultrasonic velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid Ultrasonic interferometer.
7. Carey Foster Bridge- Determination of specific resistance of the given coil of wire.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Physics Laboratory Manual, Department of Physics, Mepco Schlenk Engineering College, Sivakasi.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS FOR CHEMISTRY LABORATORY (Any FIVE Experiments)
1. Estimation of hardness of water by EDTA method
2. Estimation of alkalinity of water sample
3. pH-metric titration (acid & base)
4. Conductometric titration (strong acid Vs strong base)
5. Conductometric titration (mixture of acids Vs Strong base)
6. Potentiometric titration between ferrous ion and potassium dichromate
7. Determination of corrosion rate by weight loss method
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. J. Mendham, R.C. Denney, J. D. Barnes, M.J.K. Thomas, Vogel's Quantitative Chemical Analysis,
Prentice Hall, India, 2000.
2. D.P. Shoemaker and C.W. Garland, Experiments in Physical Chemistry, McGraw Hill, London, 2001.
17
COMPUTER PROGRAMMING LABORATORY L T PC
15GE151
(Common to all UG Programmes) 0 0 4 2
Course Objectives:
To develop C programs using conditional and looping statements
To understand the principles of arrays and strings
To learn to access memory using pointers
To group different kinds of information related to a single entity
To understand the manipulation of data in permanent storage
Course Outcomes:
Implement programs using control statements
Write programs using arrays and strings
Access data in memory using pointers
Use structures to manipulate heterogeneous data
Manipulate data stored on permanent storage
SYLLABUS FOR THE LABORATORY:
0. Study of simple Document Processing & Presentation Preparation
Study of basic OS commands, Software Engineering Practices -2 sessions (Not for End Examination)
1. Programs using simple statements
2. Programs using decision making statements
3. Programs using looping statements
4. Programs using user defined functions and recursive functions
5. Programs using one dimensional and two dimensional arrays
6. Solving problems using string functions
7. Programs using pointers and dynamic memory allocation
8. Programs using structures and unions
9. Programs using pointers to structures and other data types
10. Programs using text files
11. Programs using binary files
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Pradip Dey, Manas Ghosh, Fundamentals of Computing and Programming in C, First Edition, Oxford
University Press, 2009
2. Brian.W.Kernighan and Dennis.M.Ritchie, The C Programming language, Second Edition, Pearson
Education, 2006 reprint.
3. Byron S Gottfried, Programming with C, Schaums Outlines, Third Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2010
reprint.
4. Deitel.P.J and Deitel.H.M, C How to Program, Sixth Edition, Prentice-Hall of India,2009
5. Yashavant P. Kanetkar, Let Us C, Thirteenth Edition, BPB Publications, 2012.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/cprogramming/index.htm
18
3. http://www.w3schools.in/c
4. http://fresh2refresh.com/c-tutorial-for-beginners
15GE152 ENGINEERING PRACTICES LABORATORY LT P C

0042
Course Objectives:
To provide exposure to the students with hands on experience on various basic engineering practices
in Civil, Mechanical, Electrical and Electronics Engineering.
To have a study and hands-on-exercise on plumbing and carpentry components.
To have a practice on gas welding, foundry operations and fitting
To have a study on measurement of electical quantities, energy and resistance to earth.
To have a practice on soldering
Course Outcomes:
Do pipe connections with different joining components.
Create joints for roofs, doors, windows and furniture
Prepare square fitting and vee fitting models
Do residential house wiring
Measure energy and resistance to earth of an electrical equipment
Apply soldering
GROUP A (CIVIL & MECHANICAL)
CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 9
Buildings:
Study of plumbing and carpentry components of residential and industrial buildings, Safety aspects.
Plumbing Works:
1. Study of pipeline joints, its location and functions: valves, taps, couplings, unions, reducers, and elbows
in household fittings.
2. Study of pipe connections requirements for pumps and turbines.
3. Preparation of plumbing line sketches for water supply and sewage works.
4. Hands-on-exercise: Basic pipe connections Mixed pipe material connection Pipe connections with
different joining components.
5. Demonstration of plumbing requirements of high-rise buildings.
Carpentry using Power Tools only:
1. Study of the joints in roofs, doors, windows and furniture.
2. Hands-on-exercise: Wood work, joints by sawing, planning and cutting.
II MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13
19
Welding:
Preparation of arc welding of butt joints, lap joints and tee joints.
Basic Machining:
1. Simple Turning, Step turning
2. Drilling Practice using drilling machine.
Sheet Metal Work:
1. Forming & Bending:
2. Model making Trays, funnels, etc.
3. Different type of joints.
Machine assembly practice:
1. Study of centrifugal pump
2. Study of air conditioner
Demonstration on:
1. Gas welding practice
2. Smithy operations, upsetting, swaging, setting down and bending. Example Exercise Production of
hexagonal headed bolt.
3. Foundry operations like mould preparation for gear and step cone pulley.
4. Fitting Exercises Preparation of square fitting and vee fitting models.
GROUP B (ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS)
III ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 10
1. Residential house wiring using switches, fuse, indicator, lamp and energy meter.
2. Fluorescent lamp wiring.
3. Stair case wiring
4. Measurement of electrical quantities voltage, current, power & power factor in RLC circuit.
5. Measurement of energy using single phase energy meter.
6. Measurement of resistance to earth of an electrical equipment.
IV ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13
1. Study of Electronic components and equipments Resistor, colour coding measurement of AC signal
parameter (peak-peak, rms period, frequency) using CRO.
2. Study of logic gates AND, OR, EXOR and NOT.
3. Generation of Clock Signal.
4. Soldering practice Components Devices and Circuits Using general purpose PCB.
5. Measurement of ripple factor of HWR and FWR.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
20
1. K.Jeyachandran, S.Natarajan & S, Balasubramanian, A Primer on Engineering Practices Laboratory,
Anuradha Publications, (2007).
2. T.Jeyapoovan, M.Saravanapandian & S.Pranitha, Engineering Practices Lab Manual, Vikas Publishing
House Pvt. Ltd, (2006)
3. H.S. Bawa, Workshop Practice, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited, (2007).
4. A.Rajendra Prasad & P.M.M.S. Sarma, Workshop Practice, Sree Sai Publication, (2002).
5. P.Kannaiah & K.L.Narayana, Manual on Workshop Practice, Scitech Publications, (1999).
SEMESTER EXAMINATION PATTERN
The Laboratory examination is to be conducted for Group A & Group B, allotting 90 minutes for each group, with
a break of 15 minutes. Both the examinations are to be taken together in sequence, either in the FN session or in
the AN session. The maximum marks for Group A and Group B lab examinations will be 50 each, totaling 100 for
the Lab course. The candidates shall answer either I or II under Group A and either III or IV under Group B,
based on lots.
List of equipment and components

(For a Batch of 30 Students)
CIVIL ENGINEERING
1. Assorted components for plumbing consisting of metallic pipes, plastic pipes, 15 Sets.
flexible pipes, couplings, unions, elbows, plugs and other fittings.
2. Carpentry vice (fitted to work bench) 15 Nos.
3. Standard woodworking tools 15 Sets.
4. Models of industrial trusses, door joints, furniture joints 5 each
5. Power Tools:
(a) Rotary Hammer 2 Nos.
(b) Demolition Hammer 2 Nos.
(c) Circular Saw 2 Nos.
(d) Planer 2 Nos.
(e) Hand Drilling Machine 2 Nos.
(f) Jigsaw 2 Nos.
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
1. Arc welding transformer with cables and holders 5 Nos.
2. Welding booth with exhaust facility 5 Nos.
3. Welding accessories like welding shield, chipping hammer, wire brush, etc. 5 Sets.
4. Oxygen and acetylene gas cylinders, blow pipe and other welding outfit. 2 Nos.
5. Centre lathe 10 Nos.
6. Drilling machine 2 Nos.
7. Hearth furnace, anvil and smithy tools 2 Sets
8. Moulding table, foundry tools 2 Sets
9. Power Tool: Angle Grinder 2 Nos.
10. . Study-purpose items: centrifugal pump, air-conditioner 1 each.
ELECTRICAL
21
1. Assorted electrical components for house wiring 10 Sets
2. Electrical measuring instruments 15 Sets.
3. Study purpose items: Iron box, fan and regulator, emergency lamp 1 each
4. Megger (250V/500V). 1 No.
5. Power Tools: (a) Range Finder 2 Nos.
(b) Digital Live-wire detector 2 Nos.
ELECTRONICS
1. Soldering guns 10 Nos.
2. Assorted electronic components for making circuits 50 Nos.
3. Small PCBs 10 Nos.
4. Multimeters 10 Nos.
5. Study purpose items: Telephone, FM radio, low-voltage power supply 2 Nos.
15HS201 Technical English II LTPC

300 3
make the students of Engineering and Technology enhance their communicative skills
strengthen LSRW skills
boost up creative and critical thinking
master the skills of writing
face the challenges of the competitive world
Course Outcomes:
The students of Engineering and Technology will be able to enhance LSRW skills
Their creative and critical thinking will be enriched
The students will be able to face the challenges of the competitive world
UNIT I 15
Listening - Listening to informal conversations and participating; Listening to different types of conversation and
answering questions. Speaking - Opening a conversation (greetings, comments on topics like weather) - Turn
taking - Closing a conversation (excuses, general wish, positive comment, and thanks); narrating personal
experience. Reading - Developing analytical skills, Deductive and inductive reasoning - intensive reading.
Writing - Biography Writing- Effective use of SMS for sending short notes and messages - Using emoticons as
symbols in messages -e-mail/blogs - Posting reviews in blogs. Grammar Regular and irregular verbs - Modal
verbs - Purpose expressions. Vocabulary Match the Synonyms- Homonyms and Homophones.
UNIT II 7
Listening - Listening to situation based dialogues - Conversations between great leaders and celebrities.
Speaking - Conversation practice in real life situations, asking for directions (using polite expressions), giving
directions (using imperative sentences), Purchasing goods from a shop, Discussing various aspects of a film
(they have already seen) or a book (they have already read); Dialogues (Fill up exercises), Recording students
dialogues. Reading - Reading a short story or an article from newspaper, Critical reading, Comprehension skills;
Extensive reading activity (reading stories / novels); Writing - Writing a review / summary of a story /article -
Product Description -Dialogue Writing- memos and circulars. Grammar - Use of clauses - Conditional clauses -
22
Phrasal verbs and their meanings, Using phrasal verbs in sentences Conjunctions. Vocabulary :
Descriptive words & phrases,
UNIT III 6
Listening - Listening to the conversation with various accents/dialects - Understanding the structure of
conversations. Speaking -Conversation skills with a sense of stress, intonation, pronunciation and meaning
Seeking information expressing feelings (affection, anger, regret, etc.). Reading - Speed reading reading
passages with time limit - Skimming; Writing - Minutes of meeting format and practice in the preparation of
minutes - Writing summary after reading articles from journals - Giving instructions Grammar - Reported speech
- Active and passive voice - American and British English.
Vocabulary - Words used as nouns and verbs without any change in the Spelling.
UNIT IV 7
Listening - Listening to a telephone conversation, Viewing model interviews (face-to-face, telephonic

and video conferencing); Speaking - Role play practice in telephone skills - listening and responding - asking
questions, -note taking passing on messages, Role play and mock interview for grasping interview skills;
Telephonic interview recording the responses. Reading - Reading the job advertisements and the profile of the
company concerned. Writing - Applying for a job cover letter - rsum preparation vision, mission and goals
of the candidate; e-rsum writing. Writing Advertisements for a Product. Grammar - Numerical expressions -
discourse markers -Adjectives and comparative Adjectives. Vocabulary -Idioms and their meanings Using
idioms in sentences - Phrases used for Advertisements
UNIT V 10
Listening - Viewing a model debate and reviewing the performance of each participant - Identifying the
characteristics of a good listener; Sample Debate Speaking - Group communication skills assertiveness in
expressing opinions mind mapping technique; Reading - making notes from books, Newspaper or any form of
written materials. Writing Itinerary - Checklist - report writing recommendations / suggestions interpretation
of data (using charts for effective presentation) - Note making skills. GrammarInfinitives and Gerunds - Cause
and effect expressions.Vocabulary Collocation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Dept. of English, Anna University, Chennai. Mindscapes: English for Technologists and Engineers.
Orient Black Swan, Chennai. 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Raman, Meenakshi & Sangeetha Sharma. Technical Communication: English Skills for Engineers.
Oxford University Press, New Delhi. 2011.
2. Dhanavel, S.P. English and communication skills for students of science and Engineering.
Orient Black Swan publications, Chennai, 2011.
3. Rizvi M, Ashraf. Effective Technical Communication. Tata McGraw-Hill publishing company limited,
New Delhi, 2007.
4. Rutherford, Andrea J. Basic Communication Skills for Technology. Pearson Edition
(II Edition), New Delhi, 2001.
Extensive reading:
1. Wells, H.G. The Time machine, Peacock, India, 2008.
23
15BS201 MATHEMATICS - II LTPC
320 4
To make the student acquire sound knowledge of techniques in solving ordinary differential equations
obtained from engineering problems
To acquaint the student with the concepts of vector calculus that is needed for problems in engineering
disciplines
To know the standard techniques of complex variable theory so as to enable the student to apply them
with confidence, in application areas such as heat conduction, elasticity, fluid dynamics and flow of the
electric current
To make the student for appreciating the purpose of using transforms to create a new domain in which it
is earlier to handle the problem that is being investigated.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the students are able to
Apply different techniques to solve ordinary differential equations

Solve engineering problems using vector calculus
Use complex variable theory for applications like heat conduction, fluid dynamics etc.
Transform given problem to a new domain for solving it efficiently
UNIT 0 (Not for Examinations) 5+0
Reviews of integration concepts
UNIT I DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9+3
Method of variation of parameters Method of undetermined coefficients Homogeneous equation of Eulers

and Legendres type System of Simultaneous first order linear equations with constant coefficients
UNIT II VECTOR CALCULUS 9+3
Gradient and Directional derivative Divergence and Curl Irrotational and solenoidal vector fields Line
integral over a plane curve Surface integral and Volume integral Greens, Gauss divergence and Stokes
theorems (excluding proofs) Verification and application in evaluating line, surface and volume integrals
UNIT III ANALYTIC FUNCTIONS 9+3
Analytic functions Necessary and Sufficient conditions for analyticity properties Harmonic conjugates
Construction of analytic functions Conformal mapping Mapping by functions w= z+c, cz, 1/z, z+1/z, and -
Bilinear transformation.
UNIT IV COMPLEX INTEGRATION 9+3
Line integral Cauchys theorem and integral formula Taylors and Laurents series Singularities Residues
Residue theorem Application of residue theorem for evaluation of real integrals Use of circular contour and
semi-circular contour with no pole on real axis
UNIT V LAPLACE TRANSFORM 9+3
Laplace transform Transforms of elementary functions Basic properties Transform of derivatives and
integrals Transform of periodic functions - Initial and Final value theorems Inverse Transforms Convolution
theorem Application to solution of linear ODE with constant coefficients
TOTAL: 65 PERIODS
24
TEXTBOOKS:
rd
1. Grewal. B.S, Higher Engineering Mathematics,, Khanna Publications, New Delhi, 43 edition (2013)
th
2. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons Pvt. Ltd, Singapore, 9
Edition, 2006, (Reprint 2013)
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Narosa Publications, New Delhi,
th
4 Edition, 2014
nd
2. Greenberg M.D., Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2 Edition,
th
11 Reprint, 2013
th
3. Peter V.ONeil, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Cengage Learning India Pvt., Ltd, New Delhi, 7
Edition, 2012
rd
4. Monty J. Strauss, Gerald L. Bradley, Karl J. Smith, Calculus, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 3
Edition 2007 (For Unit 0-Section 5.2, Unit 1,2)
5. Ramana B.V, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
th
Company, New Delhi, 11 Reprint, 2010
15BS202 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE AND DISASTER MANAGEMENT LTPC

(Common to all UG Programme)
300 3
Course Objectives:
The student is expected to understand
What constitutes the environment, what are precious resources in the environment, how to conserve
these resources, what is the role of a human being in maintaining a clean environment and useful
environment for the future generations and how to maintain ecological balance and preserve bio-
diversity.
The role of government and non-government organizations in environment management.
About Disaster and its management.
Course Outcomes:
Understand the basic concepts of environment studies and natural resources.
Get the thorough knowledge about ecosystem and biodiversity.
Have an elaborate knowledge about causes, effects and control measures of various types of pollution.
Understand the social issues and various environmental acts.
Get the knowledge about types of disaster and mitigation measures.
UNITI INTRODUCTION TO ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES AND NATURAL 9

RESOURCES
Definition, scope and importance Need for public awareness Forest resources: Use and over-exploitation,
deforestation, case studies. Timber extraction, mining, dams and their effects on forests and tribal people
Water resources: Use and over-utilization of surface and ground water, floods, drought, conflicts over water,
dams benefits and problems Mineral resources: Use and exploitation, environmental effects of extracting and
using mineral resources, case studies Food resources: World food problems, changes caused by agriculture
and overgrazing, effects of modern agriculture, fertilizer, pesticide problems, water logging, salinity, case studies
Energy resources: Growing energy needs, renewable and non renewable energy sources, use of alternate
energy sources. Case studies Role of an individual in conservation of natural resources Equitable use of
resources for sustainable lifestyles
25
UNITII ECOSYSTEMS AND BIODIVERSITY 10
Concept of an ecosystem Structure and function of an ecosystem Producers, consumers and decomposers
Energy flow in the ecosystem (single channel energy flow model) Concept of nutrient cycling (Nitrogen cycle)
Ecological succession Food chains, food webs and ecological pyramids Introduction to Biodiversity
Definition: genetic, species and ecosystem diversity Value of biodiversity: consumptive use, productive use,
social, ethical, aesthetic and option values Biodiversity at global, National and local levels India as a mega-
diversity nation Hot-spots of biodiversity Threats to biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife
conflicts Endangered and endemic species of India Conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and Ex-situ
conservation of biodiversity.
UNITIII ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION AND SOCIAL ISSUES 12
Definition Causes, effects and control measures of: (a) Air pollution (b) Water pollution (c) Marine pollution (d)
Noise pollution (e) Nuclear hazards Solid waste Management: Causes, effects and control measures of urban
and industrial wastes Role of an individual in prevention of pollution.
Unsustainable and Sustainable development Unsustainable practices Issues possible solutions
Water conservation, rain water harvesting Environmental ethics Acts for Prevention of Environmental
Pollution Wildlife Protection Act Forest Conservation Act - Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act Environment Protection Act Issues involved in enforcement of
environmental legislation Public awareness.
UNITIV DISASTER AND ITS IMPACTS 7
Definition of Disaster, Hazard, Vulnerability, Risk Types Natural disasters (earthquake, landslides, flood,
cyclones, tsunami and drought) Manmade disasters (Chemical, nuclear and biological) Disaster impacts
(environmental, physical, social, ecological and economical) Case studies.
UNITV DISASTER MANAGEMENT 7
Need and concept of Disaster management Disaster Management cycle Prevention, mitigation,
preparedness, relief, recovery Postdisaster environmental response (water, sanitation, food safety, waste
management, disease control) Role and responsibilities of government, community, local institutions and
NGOs.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Gilbert M. Masters and Wendell P. Ela, Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science,
Pearson Education Pvt., Ltd., Third Edition, 2014.
2. Miller T.G. Jr, Environmental Science, Wadsworth Publishing Co.
3. Townsend C., Harper J., and Michael Begon, Essentials of Ecology, Blackwell Science, Third Edition.
4. Trivedi R.K. and P.K. Goel, Introduction to Air Pollution, Techno-Science Publications.
5. Anubha Kaushik and Kaushik C.P., Environmental Science and Engineering, New Age International
(P) Ltd, Fourth Edition, ISBN: 978-81-224-3647-1, 2014.
6. Mukesh Dhunna., 2009, Disaster Management, Vayu Education of India, New Delhi.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Bharucha Erach, The Biodiversity of India, Mapin Publishing Pvt. Ltd., Ahmedabad India, 2004.
2. Trivedi R.K., Handbook of Environmental Laws, Rules, Guidelines, Compliances and Standards, Vol. I
and II, Enviro Media.
3. Cunningham, W.P. Cooper, T.H. Gorhani, Environmental Encyclopaedia, Jaico Publ. House, Mumbai,
2001.
4. Wager K.D., Environmental Management, W.B. Saunders Co., Philadelphia, USA, 1998.
5. Benny Joseph, Environmental Science and Engineering, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd,
New Delhi, ISBN: 0070601690, 2006.
6. Singh B.K., 2008, Handbook of Disaster Management: techniques & Guidelines, Rajat Publication.
7. Ghosh G.K., 2006, Disaster Management, APH Publishing Corporation.
26
15BS204 MATERIALS SCIENCE LTPC
(Common to EEE, ECE, CSE & IT)
300 3
Course Objectives:
To introduce the essential principles of physics for information science and related Engineering
applications
To transform the basic principles and concepts to understand the utility of Engineering materials
operating electrical core devices in terms of their structure and properties
To identify the fleet of scientific channels exploring the generation of high-tech electrical engineering
materials
Course Outcomes:
The students are able to understand the electrical properties of the materials
The students will acquire knowledge about semiconducting materials
The students will acquire knowledge about the application of the magnetic materials, optical devices
and nano devices
UNIT I ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9
Classical free electron theory for electrical and thermal conductivityWiedemann Franz lawDrawbacks of
classical free electron theoryQuantum free electron theory (qualitative)Schrodinger wave equationstime
independent and time dependent wave equationsParticle in a one dimensional BoxFermi functionDensity of
energy statesCarrier concentration in metalsExpression for Fermi energy.
UNIT II SEMICONDUCTORS AND TRANSPORT PHYSICS 9
Direct and indirect bandgap semiconductorsIntrinsic SemiconductorsCarrier concentrationDetermination of

bandgap energyExtrinsic semiconductor Carrier concentration in n type and p type semiconductorsVariation
of Fermi energy level with temperature and impurity concentrationHall effectDetermination of Hall coefficient
carrier transport in semiconductors: Drift, Mobility and diffusion.
UNIT III MAGNETIC PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9
Classification of magnetic materialsQuantum numbersOrigin of magnetic momentsClassical theory of

diamagnetism (Langevin theory) Quantum theory of paramagnetismFerromagnetism (Weiss theory) Energy
associated with domain theory Hysteresis antiferromagnetic materialsFerritesapplications Soft and hard
magnetic materials. Magnetic recording and readout in tapes, floppy and hard disk drives.
UNIT IV OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9
Classification of optical materials Absorption in metals, insulators & semiconductorsLEDsOrganic LEDs

Polymer light emitting materialsPlasma light emitting devicesLCDsLaser diodesOptical data storage
techniques (including DVD, Blu- ray disc, holographic data storage).
UNIT V NANO DEVICES 9
Quantum confinement quantum structures metal to insulator transition Confining of excitonsBandgap of

nanomaterialsTunnelling Resonant tunneling diode (RTD)Single electron phenomenonSingle electron
transistorQuantum cellular automata (QCA). Carbon nanotubesMolecular electronics Spintronics.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
27
TEXTBOOKS:
1. William D. Callister, Jr. Material Science and Engineering, Seventh Edition, John Wiley & Sons Inc. New
Delhi, 2010
2. Kasap, S.O., Principle of Electronic Materials and devices, Tata Mc-Graw Hill, 2007
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Pierret, R.F. Semiconductor device fundamentals, Pearsons, 1996.

2. Garcia N and Damask A, Physics for Computer science students, SpringerVerlag, 1998.
3. Todd D. Steiner, Semiconductor Nanostructure for Optoelectronic Applications, ArTech House
Publishers, Boston, London, 2004.
4. Physics of Semiconducting Devices, S.M. Sze, Kwok K. Ng, Third Edition, Wiley, India, 2007.
15GE203 BASIC CIVIL AND MECHANICAL ENGINEERING LTPC

(Common to EEE/ECE)
300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Tointroducetheessentialprinciplesofconstruction materials
To makestudents understand theaboveprinciples applied to Building sciences.
Tointroducetheessentialprinciplesof energysciences
Tomakestudentsunderstandfunctioningoffundamentalprime movers&machines
COURSE OUTCOMES:
The studentsareable tounderstand the civil engineering materials
The studentsshallacquireknowledgeaboutbuilding components and types of bridges and dams.
Thestudentswillacquireknowledgeontraditional&newenergy
sourcesandunderstandthefunctioningofbasicenergy conversion devices.
Thestudentsareabletounderstandtheconstructionand
functioningofcriticalapplianceslikeICengines,refrigeratorand air-conditioner.
Thestudentsshallacquireknowledgeonbasicpowerplant engineering
PARTACIVIL ENGINEERING
UNIT I CIVIL ENGINEERING MATERIALS 15
Stones and Bricks types, properties and uses - Materials for making concrete: cement - chemical compounds
of portland cement , types and storage Fine aggregate - functions of sand, gradation , effect of impurities
Coarse aggregate functions, water, quality of mixing water, Plain Cement Concrete (PCC) - functions of
various ingredients ,preparing placing , curing and properties of green concrete and hardened concrete
Reinforced cement concrete (RCC) uses and requirement of good RCC Steel- properties and uses.
UNIT II BUILDINGCOMPONENTSANDSTRUCTURES 15
28
Foundations: Types, bearing capacity, requirement of good foundations, causes of failure of foundations.
Superstructure: Brick masonry, stone masonry, beams, columns, lintels, roofing and flooring, plastering. Bridges:
Classification and components Dams Classification and purposes governing selection of site.
TOTAL : 30PERIODS
PART BMECHANICAL ENGINEERING

(QUALITATIVE TREATMENTONLY)
UNITIII ENERGY SOURCES,BOILERS AND TURBINES 10
ConventionalandNew&Renewablesourcesofenergy,Indianand
globalenergyscenario,PrincipleandoperationofBoilers-firetubeand
watertube(oneexampleforeachtype),Hydraulic,SteamandGas turbines
UNITIV ICENGINES,REFRIGERATORANDAIR CONDITIONER 10
FourstrokeandtwostrokeICenginecycles,functioningofpetroland DieselEngines
Comparisons,simplevapourcompressionrefrigerator and windowairconditioner
UNITV POWERPLANTS 10
Principleofoperation,constructionandworkingof:Hydel,Steam,
Diesel,GasandNuclearpowerplantsalongwithaccessories Selection,comparison,meritsand demerits
TOTAL: 60PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Shanmugam G and Palanichamy M S, Basic Civil andMechanicalEngineering,
TataMcGrawHillPublishingCo.NewDelhi, 1996.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ramamrutham.S, Basic Civil Engineering, DhanpatRai Publishing Co.(P)Ltd., 1999.
2. SeetharamanS. Basic Civil Engineering, AnuradhaAgencies, 2005.
3. Venugopal K and Prahu Raja V, BasicMechanical
Engineering,Anuradha Publishers,Kumbakonam,2000.
4. Shantha Kumar S R J., Basic Mechanical Engineering, Hi- techPublications,Mayiladuthurai,2000.
15EE202 Electric Circuits and Machines LT PC
3204
Course Objectives:
To impart the concept of basic circuit laws, voltage and current division techniques, mesh current and
nodal voltage methods.
To make the students understand the concept of basic network theorems and transient response of
series RL, RC and RLC circuits for DC and sinusoidal inputs.
To make the students be familiar with the constructional details, principle of operation, speed control of
DC machines and constructional details, principle of operation, performance of transformers.
To make the students understand the constructional details and principle of operation of alternators and
induction motors.
Course Outcomes:
29
At the end of the course, students will be able to
Apply the concepts of basic circuit laws, voltage and current division techniques, source transformation,
star delta transformation, mesh current, nodal voltage methods for solving circuit problems.
Apply the concept of basic network theorems for solving DC circuits.
Obtain the transient response of series RL, RC and RLC circuits for DC and AC inputs.
Explicate the construction and working of DC machines, characteristics and speed control of DC motors.
Describe the constructional details, working principle of a single phase transformer.
Explain the constructional details and principle of operation of alternators, single phase and three phase
Induction motors.
UNITI BASIC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS 14
Circuit analysis-Ohms Law Kirchhoffs laws DC Circuits Resistors in series and parallel circuits star, delta
transformation voltage and current division, source transformation, Mesh current and node voltage method of
analysis for D.C. Circuits.
UNITII NETWORK THEOREMS 14
Superposition Theorem, Reciprocity Theorem, Thevenins Theorem, Nortons Theorem and Maximum power
transfer Theorem for D.C. Circuits.
UNITIII TRANSIENT RESPONSE 14
Transient response of series RL, RC and RLC Circuits using Laplace transform for DC input and A.C. with
sinusoidal input.
UNITIV D.C. MACHINES AND TRANSFORMERS (qualitative treatment only) 9
DC generator Construction Principle of operation emf equation Self and separately excited generators
Characteristics of series, shunt and compound generators.
DC motorPrinciple of operation Back emf and torque equation Swinburnes test Speed control of D.C.
shunt motors.
Single phase transformer Constructional details Principle of operation emf equation Transformation ratio
Transformer on no load Regulation through Load test open circuit and short circuit tests.
UNITV INDUCTION MOTORS & ALTERNATORS (qualitative treatment only) 9
Alternators Construction Types Induced emf Voltage regulation emf and mmf methods.
Three-phase induction motors Construction Types Principle of operation slip-torque characteristics.
Single-phase induction motors ConstructionTypes Principle of operation.
TOTAL: 60 Periods
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Sudhakar A and Shyam Mohan SP, Circuits and Networks Analysis and Synthesis,Tata McGraw Hill,
2007.
2. Arumugam.N, and Premkumar, Electric Circuit Theory,Khanna Publishers, 2002.
3. Theraja.B.L,A Text Book of Electrical Technology, S.Chand Publications Ltd., NewDelhi, 2007.
4. P.S. Bimbhra, Electrical Machinery, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2009.
30
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Paranjothi SR, Electric Circuits Analysis, New Age International Ltd., New Delhi, 1996.
2. Chakrabati A, Circuit Theory (Analysis and synthesis), Dhanpath Rai & Sons, New Delhi, 1999.
3. Charles K. Alexander, Mathew N.O. Sadiku, Fundamentals of Electric Circuits, Second Edition,
McGraw Hill, 2003.
4. P.C.Sen.,Principles of Electrical Machines and Power Electronics, John Wiley&Sons,1997.
5. K. Murugesh Kumar, Electric Machines, Vikas publishing house Pvt Ltd, 2002.
Web References:
1. www.nptel.ac.in>courses>node7.
2. www.allaboutcircuits.com>vol_1.
3. www.electrical4u.com.
4. https://books.google.com/books?isbn=8131718743,0470521570,0072977183.
15BS251 APPLIED PHYSICS AND ENVIRONMENTAL CHEMISTRY LABORATORY L T P C

(Common to EEE/ECE/CSE/MECH/IT/BT)
0 0 4 2
(Laboratory classes on alternate weeks for Physics and Environmental
Chemistry)
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To determine particle size and wavelength
To find the viscosity of liquid
To find band gap of a semiconductor
To determine dissolved oxygen and chloride content in water
To estimate chromium, iron, sodium and chlorine using various methods
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Use Post Office Box to determine band gap of a semiconductor

Use spectrometer to determine the dispersive power of the prism
Use Winklers method to determine dissolved oxygen in water
Use Argentometric method to estimate chloride content in water
Use flame photometry to estimate sodium in water
PHYSICS LABORATORY
List of Experiments (Any FIVE Experiments)
1. Laser- (i) Particle size and wavelength determination

(ii) Numerical aperture and acceptance angle measurement of an optical fiber
2. Post Office Box-Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
3. Indexing of Powder Diffraction Pattern
31
4. Characteristics of a photodiode
5. Uniform pending- Youngs modulus determination
6. Spectrometer-Dispersive power of the prism
7. Viscosity of liquids- Determination of co-efficient of viscosity of a liquid by Poiseuilles method.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Physics Laboratory Manual, Department of Physics, MepcoSchlenk Engineering College, Sivakasi.
ENVIRONMENTAL CHEMISTRY LABORATORY
List of Experiments (Any FIVE Experiments)
1. Determination of DO in water by Winklers method
2. Estimation of Chloride in water sample by Argentometric method
3. Determination of COD value of industrial effluents
4. Estimation of chromium in tannery wastes
5. Estimation of available chlorine in bleaching powder
6. Estimation of iron by spectrophotometry
7. Estimation of sodium by flame photometry
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. A. L. Vogel, A Text Book of Quantitative Inorganic Analysis, ELBS London, 1995.

2. D. P. Shoemaker and C. W. Garland, Experiments in Physical Chemistry, McGraw Hill, London, 2001.
3. N. Manivasakam, Industrial Effluents Origin, Characteristics, Effects Analysis & Treatment, Sakthi
Publications, Coimbatore, 1987.
15EE252 Electric Circuits and Machines Lab LT PC

0 0 42
Course Objectives:
To expose the students in applying the basic laws and network theorems for solving the circuit and give
them experimental skill.
To expose the students in obtaining the transient response of RC circuit with DC input and give them
experimental skill.
To expose the students in obtaining the frequency response of RLC circuit and give them experimental
skill.
To expose the students to the operation of DC Machines, transformer and give them experimental skill.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course students will be able to
Apply the basic laws, network theorems for solving circuits more effectively and verify them
experimentally.
32
Obtain the transient response of RC circuit with DC input.
Obtain the frequency response of RLC circuit.
Obtain the speed control of DC shunt motor.
Obtain the efficiency of a DC machine by conducting Swinburnes test.
Obtain the No load and load characteristics of self excited DC shunt generators.
Obtain the performance of single phase transformer by conducting OC, SC and load tests.
List of Experiments
1. Verification of Kirchhoffs voltage and current laws.
2. Verification of Thevenins, Nortons and maximum power transfertheorems.
3. Verification of Superposition and Reciprocity theorems.
4. Determination of time constant of series R-C circuit.
5. Determination of frequency response of RLC series circuit.
6. Study of CRO and measurement of sinusoidal voltage, frequency and power factor
7. Swinburnes Test.
8. Speed Control of D.C. Shunt Motor.
9. Open Circuit and load characteristics of self excited D.C. shunt generator.
10. Load Test on single phase transformer.
11. OC and SC tests on single phase transformer.
TOTAL: 45 Periods
15GE251 LINUX COMMANDS AND SHELL PROGRAMMING LAB L T P C

(Common to ECE / BT)
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To motivate the students to develop programs with dynamic memory allocation in C

To motivate the students to explore the various techniques to handle files using C programs
To provide a formal foundation to the Linux commands
To realize some basic Linux commands using C
To learn to use the primitive administrative commands (Eg. add, delete user)
To train the students to write Linux shell programs with shell programming constructs
To enable the students to work on power commands in Linux
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Write programs with dynamic memory allocation using pointers in C

Handle files and manipulate them using C
Work in the Linux environment by appropriately using the commands
Implement some of Linux Commands using C
Use the Linux administrative commands
Write shell programs in Linux using the shell programming constructs
Use the power commands for a given applications
SYLLABUS FOR THE LAB (For embedded Theory)
33
1. C PROGRAMMING ON LINUX
Command Line Arguments - Pointer Programming - Dynamic Memory Allocation -

Generic Programming using Pointers - File Handling
2. LINUX COMMANDS
Basic Shell Commands Pipes & Filters User Administration Commands File
System Commands Regular Expressions System Performance Commands
3. SHELL PROGRAMMING
Simple Shell program - Conditional Statements - Looping Statements Command

Line Arguments Shell programs with C Executable
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Pradip Dey,Manas Ghosh, Fundamentals of Computing and Programming in C, Oxford University

Press, 2009
nd
2. Mark G. Sobell, A Practical Guide to Linux Commands, Editors, and Shell Programming, 2 Edition,
Pearson Education
REFERENCE BOOKS:
nd
1. B.W.Kernighan, D.M.Ritchie, The C Programming Language, 2 Edition, Eastern Economy Edition.
th
2. Yashavant P. Kanetkar, Understanding Pointers in C, 4 Edition, BPB Publication
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.w3schools.in/c-programming-language
2. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/unix/index.htm
List of Sample Exercises
1. Consider a department consists of two sections of students. It is required to generate a

common rank list of all the students based on their CGPA. Develop a C Program for the above
scenario.
2. Generate mark report for n students who passed all subjects with name, rollno, mark1, mark2,
mark3, total, average. The mark details of m students who passed after revaluation can be
added later.
3. A Clerk wants to generate reports of mails received based on following criteria.

1. Sender
2. Category (O Official, P - Personal, C - Confidential)
3. Size
You are required to write a program with generic function to sort the mails based on the above
said criteria.
4. Write a C program to create a file named Data.txt, which contains two numbers followed by an
operator in each and every line. Read each line of the file, while reading it; with respect to the
operator perform the operation against the numbers and store the results in another file named
Result.txt
5. a. Create a directory CSE, change your working directory to CSE and display where you are
34
working now? Create files named date, user. Store the calendar and current date information
in the file named date and store the login details of all users in the file user. Also, store the
details of all active users in the same file (user). Finally merge the two files into a single file
called merge and delete both the files
b. Create a file consisting of countries and corresponding continents. Display the countries
which are in the continent Africa. Sort the generated list and convert them into lowercase
6. Create a directory Marks, change your working directory to Marks.
Create 3 empty files MarkList, NameList and StudRep. Add necessary information
(MarkList Mark only, NameList Name only, StudRep representative Name only)
to the corresponding file (minimum 15 details)
Merge the contents of files NameList & MarkList and store it in a file MarkDetail1 &
MarkDetail2 in the following format.
MarkDetail1 MarkDetail2
Arun 100 Arun Bala ..
Bala 98 100 98 ..
.
Copy the first 8 lines from MarkDetail1 to the new file Mark1. Copy the last 4 lines
from the file Mark1 to new file Mark2. And finally store the contents of MarkDetail1
from the line 4 to the file Mark3.Display the contents of Mark3 along with line
number.
Display which file system is mounted on your system
7. a. Create a user group called csestudent and rename it as engineers. Add 10 users to the
group and rename the usernames for atleast 5 students. Delete an user from the group and
finally delete the group
b. Perform the following system administration tasks
Print network connections, routing tables, interface statistics, masquerade connections,

and multicast memberships
System Load statistics
Report a snapshot of the current processes.
Report virtual memory statistics
Display call graph profile data
Display system tasks
8. Create a file which consists of menu of cuisines for a restaurant. Perform the following
operations in the file.
Change the price of the items which are 4$ to 6$
Delete the list of items whose prices are less than 3$
Replace the whitespaces between the items into -

th th
Print the list of items from 4 to 10 position
List out all the cuisines of type Italian
9. Write a shell script which will accepts login name from the user as command line argument and
display the message whether the user having that login name is currently logged in or not. Also
enable the user to view the long list of files that end with ca along with the count.
35
10. Write a shell script to store the city names of different states in different files. The file names
must be in the short form of the corresponding state names (Eg: TamilNadu-TN). Accept the
state name and city name from command line. Store the city name in corresponding file. If the
file doesnt exist, create the file. If the city name already exists, display the message City
already added.
11. Generate payroll for the company with the specifications as follows.
If the employees basic salary is less than Rs.15000, then HRA=10% of basic salary and
DA=90% of basic. If the employees salary is either equal to or above Rs.15000, then
HRA=Rs.500 and DA=98% of basic salary. Automatically generate gross salary and net salary.
Store the details in a file. The total number of employees should be obtained from command line
12. Implement the operations of cat, cp and wc commands in Linux using C programs
15MA303: MATHEMATICS III - TRANSFORM, PROBABILITY AND L T P C

NUMERICAL METHODS 3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To know a sound knowledge on Partial Differential Equations.

To acquaint the student with the concepts of Fourier series that is needed for problems in engineering
disciplines.
To familiarize the student with Fourier transform this is used to solve problems in engineering and
technology.
To make the students familiar in differentiation and integration when the functions are in the analytical
form which is too complicated or huge amounts of data are given.
To make the student knowledgeable in the area of probabilistic models.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students are able to

Solve various Partial Differential Equations.
Express any periodic functions as a series of well known periodic functions sine and cosine.
Use Fourier transform in engineering applications.
Obtain the differentiation and integration from the given data.
Familiar with the concepts of probability and distributions.
UNIT I PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12
Formation of PDE Solutions of first order PDE Lagranges linear PDE Standard types and equations
reducible to standard types Singular solution Classification of second order PDE Solution of second and
higher order linear homogeneous PDE with constant coefficients Linear non-homogeneous partial differential
equations with constant coefficients.
UNIT II FOURIER SERIES 12
Dirichlets conditions General Fourier series Odd and even functions Half range Sine and Cosine series
Parsevals identity Harmonic Analysis Complex form of Fourier series.
UNIT III FOURIER TRANSFORM` 12
Fourier integral theorem Fourier transform pair Sine and Cosine transforms Properties Transform of
elementary functions Convolution theorem Parsevals identity.
36
UNIT IV NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIATION AND INTEGRATION 12
Lagranges interpolation Newtons forward, backward difference interpolation Approximation of derivatives

using Newtons forward, backward difference interpolation Numerical integration using Trapezoidal, Simpsons
1/3 and Simpsons 3/8 rules.
UNIT V PROBABILITY, RANDOM VARIABLES AND DISTRIBUTIONS 12
Axiomatic definition of probability Conditional Probability Bayes Theorem - Discrete and Continuous random
variables Cumulative distribution function properties Moments Moments about mean Moment
generating function Uniform and Exponential distributions.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
rd
1. Grewal B.S., Higher Engineering Mathematics, 43 Edition, Khanna Publishers, 2013.
th
2. Grewal, B.S. and Grewal,J.S., Numerical methods in Engineering and Science,9 Edition, Khanna
Publishers, New Delhi, 2012.
3. Gupta, S.C., and Kapoor, V.K., Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics, Sultan Chand and Sons,
2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
th
1. Bali N., Goyal M. and Watkins C., Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 7 Edition, Lakshmi
Publications Pvt., Ltd., 2009.
2. Peter V.ONeil, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Cengage Learning India Pvt., Ltd, 2007.
rd
3. P. Kandasamy, K. Thilagavathy and K. Gunavathy, Numerical Methods,3 Edition, S.Chand Co. Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2007.
4. Glyn James, Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics, Pearson Education, 2007.
5. Hwei Hsu, Schaums Outline of Theory and Problems of Probability, Random Variables and Random
Processes, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.
6. Oliver C. Ibe, Fundamentals of Applied Probability and Random Processes, Elsevier India Pvt Ltd,
2012.
L T P C
15EC301: DIGITAL ELECTRONICS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To simplify Boolean expressions using basic postulates of Boolean algebra.

To synthesize the basic combinational and synchronous& asynchronous sequential circuits.
To synthesize combinational and sequential logic using programmable logic devices.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course students will be able to
Design and Analyze both combinational and sequential networks.
Analyze the characteristics and structure of different memory systems and programmable logic
devices.
Synthesize and Analyze digital circuits by using hardware description languages.
UNIT I MINIMIZATION TECHNIQUES AND LOGIC GATES 9
Minimization Techniques: Boolean postulates and laws DeMorgans Theorem Principle of Duality
Boolean expression Standard Form, Canonical Form, Minimization of Boolean expressions using Boolean
laws and theorem Sum of Products (SOP) Product of Sums (POS) Dont care conditions Minimization
37
of Boolean expressions up to 5 variables using Karnaugh map and QuineMcCluskey method.
Logic Gates: Implementations of Logic Functions using multilevel universal gates TTL and CMOS Logic
and their characteristics Tristate gates Static charges and handling precautions of semiconductor ICs
UNIT II COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS 9
Design procedure Half adder / subtractor Full Adder / subtractor Parallel binary adder/Subtractor Carry
Look Ahead adder BCD adder Binary Multiplier Binary Divider Multiplexer/ Demultiplexer Decoder
Encoder Parity checker Parity generators Code converters Magnitude Comparator.
UNIT III SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS 9
Latches, Flip flops SR, D, JK, T and Master Slave Characteristic table and equation Application table
Edge and level Triggering Realization of one flip flop using other flip flops Serial Adder/Subtractor
Asynchronous Ripple counter Synchronous counters Up/Down counters Programmable counters
Design of Synchronous counters Modulo n counter Shift registers Universal shift registers Ring
counter Shift counter.
UNIT IV MEMORY DEVICES AND PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC DEVICES 9
Classification of memories ROM, PROM, EPROM, EEPROM, EAPROM RAM Memory cycle Timing
wave forms Memory decoding Memory Expansion Static RAM Cell Bipolar RAM cell MOSFET RAM
cell Dynamic RAM cell Programmable Logic Devices Programmable Logic Array (PLA) Programmable
Array Logic (PAL) Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGA) Implementation of combinational logic circuits
using ROM, PLA, PAL.
UNIT V SYNCHRONOUS AND ASYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS 9
Synchronous Sequential Circuits: General Model Classification Design Use of Algorithmic State
Machine Analysis of Synchronous Sequential Circuits Sequence Generator and detectors.
Asynchronous Sequential Circuits: Design of fundamental mode and pulse mode circuits Incompletely
specified State Machines races and hazards Design of Hazard Free Switching circuits Design of
Combinational and Sequential circuits using VERILOG.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
th
1. M.Morris Mano and Michael D. Ciletti, Digital Design: With an Introduction to the Verilog HDL, 5
Edition, Pearson Education Pvt. Ltd., 2012.
th
2. S.Salivahanan and S.Arivazhagan, Digital Circuits and Design, 4 Edition, Vikas Publishing House
Pvt. Ltd, 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
th
1. John F.Wakerly, Digital Design: Principles and Practices, 4 Edition, Pearson/PHI, 2005.
2. John.M Yarbrough, Digital Logic Applications and Design, Thomson Learning, 1996.
th
3. Charles H.Roth Jr &Larry L Kinney, Fundamentals of Logic Design, 7 Edition, Cenage Learning,
2013.
th
4. Donald P.Leach and Albert Paul Malvino, Digital Principles and Applications, 7 Edition, TMH,
2011.
nd
5. William H. Gothmann, Digital Electronics: An Introduction to Theory and Practice, 2 Edition, PHI,
2009.
th
6. Thomas L. Floyd, Digital Fundamentals, 11 Edition, Pearson Education Inc, 2015
7. Donald D.Givone,Digital Principles and Design, TMH, 2003.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.allaboutcircuits.com/vol_4/
2. http://web.iitd.ac.in/~shouri/eel201/lectures.php
38
L T P C
15EC302: ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS - I
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the operation of Diodes and the methods of Transistor biasing.

To study the midband analysis of amplifier circuits using small signal equivalent model.
To study the applications of diodes and transistors.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the subject, students shall be able to

Analyze the characteristics of diodes and different method of transistorbiasing.
Design amplifier circuits for the variety of engineering applications.
Design the power supplies.
UNIT I PN JUNCTION DIODE AND SPECIAL SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES 9
Theory of PN junction diode Energy band structure of open circuited PN junction Quantitative theory of PN
diode currents Diode current equation Diode resistance Transition and diffusion capacitance Effect of
temperature Breakdown in PN junction diodes Diode switching characteristics Zener Diode and
Characteristics Tunnel diode , PIN diode, Varactor diode, SCR,UJT, Photo diode and photo transistor.
UNIT II TRANSISTORS 9
Principle of operation of PNP and NPN transistors Transistor configurations and their characteristics
Breakdown in transistors JFET characteristics drain current equation MOSFET types and their
Characteristics Channel length modulation.
UNIT III TRANSISTOR BIASING AND STABILITY 9
BJT biasing DC, AC Load line and quiescent point Factors affecting quiescent point Stability factor
Different types of biasing circuits and its comparison Bias compensation Diode and Thermistor compensations
Biasing the JFET.
UNIT IV LOW FREQUENCY ANALYSIS OF SMALL SIGNAL AMPLIFIERS 9
CE amplifiers with and without bypass capacitor, CB and CC amplifiers Hybrid model of a transistor Method of
drawing small signal equivalent circuit Midband analysis of various types of single stage amplifiers voltage
gain, current gain, input impedance and output impedance CS, CG and CD (FET) amplifiers and small signal
analysis.
UNIT V RECTIFIERS AND POWER SUPPLIES 9
Classification of power supplies, Rectifiers Halfwave, fullwave and bridge rectifiers with resistive load
Analysis for Vdc and ripple voltage with C, L, LC and CLC filters Voltage regulators shunt and series regulator
regulator with current limiting Switched mode power supply (SMPS).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
rd
1. J. Millman, Halkias, SatyebrantaJit, Electronic Devices &Circuits, 3 Edition Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.
rd
2. S. Salivahanan, N. Suresh kumar and A. Vallavaraj, Electronic Devices and Circuits, 3 Edition, Tata
McGraw Hill, 2012.
th
3. Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky, Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory, 11 Edition, Pearson
Education, 2015
REFERENCE BOOKS:
39
1. G.K.Mithal, Electronic devices and circuits, Khanna Publishers, 2010.
th
2. David A. Bell, Electronic Devices and Circuits, 6 Edition, Oxford University Press, 2009.
th
3. Thomas L. Floyd, Electronic Devices: Conventional Current Version, 9 Edition, Pearson Education,
2011.
4. I.J. Nagrath, Electronic Devices and Circuits, Prentice Hall of India, 2007.
5. Anwar A. Khan and Kanchan K. Dey, A First Course on Electronics, Prentice Hall of India, 2006.
6. B.P. Singh and Rekha Singh, Electronic Devices and Integrated Circuits, Pearson Education, 2006.
7. Muhammad Rashid, Microelectronics Circuits, Thomson Learning, 2007.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.diodes.com/
2. www.edutalks.org
3. www.ee.iitm.ac.in/~ani/2012/ec5135/lectures.html
4. www.ece.umassd.edu/Faculty/dSchmidlin/ECE312/notes/notes.html
5. web.iitd.ac.in/~shouri/eel204/lectures.php
6. www.stanford.edu/class/ee122/.../EE113_Course_Notes_Rev0.pdf
L T P C
15EC303: ENGINEERING ELECTROMAGNETICS
3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To analyze fields and potentials due to static charges and static magnetic fields.
To visualize how materials affect electric and magnetic fields.
To relate Electric and Magnetic fields under time varying situations.
To understand propagation of uniform plane waves in various media.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Determine the static electric and magnetic fields and related parameters.
Determine the electromagnetic field strength given any charge configuration / distribution and describe the
nature of the fields.
Characterize ohmic losses of conductors and Energy density in dielectrics and ferromagnetic materials.
Apply Maxwells equation to derive wave equation and define propagation of electromagnetic waves in
different media.
UNIT I STATIC ELECTRIC FIELDS 11
Introduction to Coordinate System Rectangular Cylindrical and Spherical Coordinate System Introduction to
line, Surface and Volume Integrals Coulombs Law in Vector Form Definition of Electric Field Intensity Principle
of Superposition Electric Field due to point charges Electric field due to continuous charge distribution Electric
Field due to charges distributed uniformly on an infinite and finite line Electric Field on the axis of a uniformly
charged circular disc Electric Field due to an infinite uniformly charged sheet Definition of Divergence and
Divergence theorem Electric Flux Density Gauss Law Proof of Gauss Law Applications Definition of
Gradient Electric Scalar Potential Relationship between potential and electric field Potential due to infinite
uniformly charged line Potential due to electrical dipole Electrostatic energy and energy density.
UNIT II STATIC MAGNETIC FIELDS 9
The BiotSavart Law in vector form Magnetic Field intensity due to a finite and infinite wire carrying a current I
Definition of Curl and Stokes theorem Magnetic field intensity on the axis of a circular and rectangular loop carrying
a current I Amperes circuital law and simple applications Magnetic flux density The Lorentz force equation for a
moving charge and applications Force on a wire carrying a current I placed in a magnetic field Torque on a loop
carrying a current I Magnetic moment Magnetic Vector Potential.
40
UNIT III STATIC ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS IN MATERIALS 9
Electric current Current density Point form of ohms law Continuity equation for current Electric Polarization
permittivity Nature of dielectric materials dielectric strength Poissons and Laplaces equation Capacitance
Capacitance of various geometries (Parallel plate, Cylindrical and Spherical) using Laplaces equation Boundary
conditions for electric fields Inductance Inductance of loops and solenoids Mutual inductance simple examples
Energy density in magnetic fields Magnetization and permeability Magnetic boundary conditions.
UNIT IV TIME VARYING ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 8
Time varying fields emf and mmf Faradays law Lenzs law Maxwells Second Equation in integral form from
Faradays Law Equation expressed in point form Displacement current Amperes circuital law in integral form
Modified form of Amperes circuital law as Maxwells first equation in integral form Equation expressed in point form
Maxwells four equations in integral form and differential form Poynting Vector and the flow of power Power
flow in a coaxial cable Instantaneous, Average and Complex Poynting Vector.
UNIT V ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 8
Derivation of Wave Equation Uniform Plane Waves Maxwells equation in Phasor form Wave equation in
Phasor form Plane waves in free space and in a homogeneous material.
Wave equation for a conducting medium Plane waves in lossy dielectrics Propagation in good conductors Skin
effect.
TUTORIAL :15 HOURS TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
th
1. W H.Hayt Jr & J A Buck, Engineering Electromagnetics, 8 Edition, TATA McGrawHill, 2010.
th
2. Matthew N.O.Sadiku, Elements of Engineering Electromagnetics, 6 Edition, Oxford University Press,
2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
nd
1. E.C.Jordan& K.G. Balmain, Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems, 2 edition, Pearson
Education, 2015.
nd
2. David K.Cheng, Field and Wave Electromagnetics, 2 Edition, Pearson Education, 2013.
rd
3. S. Ramo, J.R Whinnery and T.Van Duzer, Fields and Waves in Communications Electronics, 3 Edition,
John Wiley & Sons, 2008.
th
4. NarayanaRao, N, Elements of Engineering Electromagnetics, 6 edition, Pearson Education, 2004.
5. Samuel Y. Liao, Engineering Applications of Electromagnetic Theory, West Publishing Co., 1988.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.learnerstv.com/FreeengineeringVideolecturesltv389Page1.htm
2. http://nptel.ac.in/video.php?subjectId=108106073
L T P C
15EC304: SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS
3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To analyse the characteristics of continuous, discrete signals and systems.

To characterize different transforms and their application in system analysis.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Employ mathematical descriptions and representations of continuous and discrete signals to build LTI
Systems.
Apply transforms techniques for the analysis of Linear Time Invariant Systems by examining their input and
41
output signals
UNIT I CLASSIFICATION OF SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS 9
Continuous time signals (CT signals) discrete time signals (DT signals) Step, Ramp, Pulse, Impulse, Exponential
Transformation of the independent variable Classification of CT and DT signals CT systems and DT systems
Basic system properties Linear Time invariant (LTI) Systems and properties.
UNIT II FOURIER SERIES REPRESENTATION AND CT FOURIER TRANSFORM 9
Fourier Series representation of CT periodic signals Convergence of Fourier Series Properties Differential
equation Convolution integral Properties Impulse response of Interconnected systems Fourier Transform
Representation of an aperiodic signal Convergence of Fourier Transforms Properties Analysis of LTI Systems
using Fourier Transform Impulse response Frequency response.
UNIT III LAPLACE TRANSFORM 9
Laplace Transform Region of Convergence for Laplace Transform Inverse Laplace Transform Unilateral
Laplace Transform Properties Analysis of LTI Systems using Laplace Transform Impulse response State
variable equations and matrix representation of systems.
UNIT IV SAMPLING AND DISCRETETIME FOURIER TRANSFORM 9
Sampling theorem Impulse train sampling Sampling with a zero order hold Reconstruction of signal from its
samples Aliasing Discrete time processing of CT signals Difference equation Convolution sum Properties
Impulse response of Interconnected systems DTFT and properties.
UNIT V Z TRANSFORM, DFT & FFT 9
ZTransform Region of Convergence for ZTransform Inverse ZTransform Unilateral ZTransform

Properties Analysis of LTI Systems using ZTransform Impulse response State variable equations and matrix
representation of systems DFT Properties FFT algorithm.
TUTORIAL: 15 PERIODS TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Allan V.Oppenheim, S.Wilsky and S.H.Nawab, Signals and Systems, Pearson Education, 2007.
2. Edward W Kamen& Bonnies Heck, Fundamentals of Signals and Systems, Pearson Education, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. H P Hsu and RakeshRanjan, Signals and Systems, Schaums Outlines, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007
rd
2. S.Salivahanan, Digital Signal Processing, 3 Edition, McGraw Hill International/TMH, 2015.
3. Simon Haykins and Barry Van Veen, Signals and Systems John Wiley &sons, Inc, 2004.
rd
4. Robert A. Gabel and Richard A.Roberts, Signals & Linear Systems, 3 Edition, John Wiley, 1987.
th
5. Rodger E. Ziemer, William H. Tranter and D. Ronald Fannin, Signals & systems, 4 Edition, Pearson
Education, 2002.
th
6. P.Rameshbabu, R.Anandanatarajan, Signals and Systems, 4 Edition, Scitech Publication, 2013
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://users.ece.gatech.edu/~bonnie/book/worked_problems.html
2. http://www.ece.jhu.edu/~cooper/courses/214/signalsandsystemsnotes.pdf
42
L T P C
15EC305: DATA STRUCTURES
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To study the design and applications of linear ADTs such as List, Stack and Queue.
To implement tree, graph structures Non Linear algorithms.
To implement various sorting algorithms.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After the completion of this course, students will be able to

Analyze the running time of various algorithms.
Develop the various linear data structures as such as List, Stack and Queue ADTs.
Develop the various nonlinear data structures as such as Trees, Graphs.
Implement sorting algorithms for different applications.
UNIT I ABSTRACT DATA TYPES AND DATA STRUCTURES 9
Problem Solving using Computers Abstraction Abstract data types; Data Representation Elementary data
types; Basic concepts of data Structures; Mathematical preliminaries BigOh notation efficiency of algorithms
notion of time and space complexity performance measures for data structures ADT array Computations on
arrays.
UNIT II LINEAR STRUCTURES 9
List ADT arraybased implementation linked list implementation doublylinked lists Stack ADT Queue
ADT Applications of stacks and queues.
UNIT III TREE STRUCTURES 9
Tree ADT Binary Tree ADT Binary search tree ADT Expression trees AVL Trees Splay Trees B Tree.
UNIT IV HASHING AND SET 9
Hashing Separate chaining open addressing rehashing extendible hashing Disjoint Set ADT dynamic
equivalence problem smart union algorithms path compression applications of Set
UNIT V GRAPHS AND SORTING ALGORITHMS 9
Definitions Topological sort Graph traversal shortestpath algorithms minimum spanning tree Prim's and
Kruskal's algorithms Insertion Sort, Merge Sort and Quick Sort.
TOTAL: 45 HOURS
TEXT BOOKS:
nd
1. M. A. Weiss, "Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C", 2 Edition, Pearson Education, 2005.
nd
2. R. F. Gilberg, B. A. Forouzan, "Data Structures", 2 Edition, Thomson India Edition, 2005.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. A. V. Aho, J. E. Hopcroft, and J. D. Ullman, "Data Structures and Algorithms", Pearson Education 2003.
2. JeanPaul Tremblay and Paul G. Sorenson, An Introduction to Data Structures with Applications,
nd
2 Edition, Tata McGrawHill, 2001.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.myopencourses.com/subject/datastructuresandalgorithms
2. http://www.geeksforgeeks.org/datastructures/
43
L T P C
15EC351: DIGITAL ELECTRONICS LABORATORY
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To design and analyze combinational circuit building blocks: multiplexers, demultiplexers, binary decoders
and encoders, decoders for hexadecimal to sevensegment LED displays, code converters.
To design Counters and shift registers using flip flops.
To develop HDL programs for digital circuits.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Design combinational and sequential circuits for different applications.
Simulate HDL based Digital Design using Verilog Hardware Description Language.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Implementation of Adder and Subtractor using basic, universal logic gates and MSI Devices.
2. Design and implementation of code converters using logic gates.
3. Design and implementation of 2 bit Magnitude Comparator using logic gates and 8 Bit Magnitude
Comparator using IC 7485.
4. Design and implementation of 16 bit odd/even parity checker generator using IC74180.
5. Design and implementation of Multiplexer and Demultiplexer using logic gates and study of IC74150 and
IC 74154.
6. Design and implementation of encoder and decoder using logic gates and study of IC7445 and IC74147.
7. Construction and verification of 4 bit ripple counter, ModN Ripple counters, Shift Counter and Ring
Counter.
8. Design and implementation of 3bit synchronous up/down counter, counter to count any desired
sequence.
9. Implementation of SISO, SIPO, PISO and PIPO shift registers using Flip flops.
10. Simulation of experiments 1, 6, 8 and 9 using Verilog Hardware Description Language.
11. Mini Project.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
L T P C
15EC352: ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS LABORATORY I
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To obtain the characteristics of different semiconductor devices like Diode, BJT, JFET, UJT and SCR.
To design Amplifier circuits using different biasing techniques and to measure gain, Input and output
resistances.
To design a Power supply circuit with a simple capacitors filter and verify the value of ripple factor.
To design transistor series and shunt regulator and determine the Line and Load regulation.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students shall be able to

Analyze the characteristics of different semiconductor devices.
Design amplifier circuits for the variety of engineering applications.
Design the power supplies and regulators for different applications.
44
1. VI Characteristics of PN Junction Diode and Zener Diode.

i) Determine the Volt Ampere Characteristics of a PN junction diode and Zener diode under forward
and reverse bias conditions.
ii) Determine the Cut in Voltage, Forward and Reverse resistance of a PN Junction diode and Zener
diode.
2. Input and Output Characteristics of BJT in Common Emitter Configuration.
i) Obtain the Input and Output Characteristics of BJT in Common Emitter Configuration.
ii) Determination of hybrid parameters from the Input and Output Characteristics.
3. Input and Output Characteristics of BJT in Common Base and Common Collector Configuration.
i) Obtain the Input and Output Characteristics of BJT in Common Base and Common Collector
Configuration.
ii) Determination of hybrid parameters from the Input and Output Characteristics.
4. Drain and Transfer Characteristics of JFET.
i) Plot of Drain and Transfer Characteristics of JFET.
ii) Determine the Drain resistance, Amplification factor and mutual conductance from the
Characteristics of JFET.
5. Characteristics of UJT and SCR.
i) Obtain the Characteristics of UJT and SCR.
ii) Find the Intrinsic standoff ratio from the characteristics of UJT.
iii) Determination of Forward break over voltage from the characteristics of SCR
6. Fixed Bias amplifier circuit using BJT
i) Obtain the waveforms at input and output without bias.
ii) Determination of bias resistance to locate Qpoint at center of load line.
iii) Measurement of gain.
iv) Plot the frequency response & determination of Gain Bandwidth Product.
7. Design and construct BJT Common Emitter Amplifier using voltage divider bias (selfbias) with and without
bypassed emitter resistor.
i) Measurement of gain, bandwidth, input and output impedances.
ii) Plot the frequency response & determination of Gain Bandwidth Product.
8. Design and construct BJT Common Collector Amplifier using voltage divider bias (selfbias).
i) Measurement of gain, bandwidth, input and output impedances.
ii) Plot the frequency response & determination of Gain Bandwidth Product.
9. Power Supply circuit Half wave rectifier and Full wave rectifier with filters.
i) Measurement of DC voltage and ripple factor
10. Design of Series and Shunt Regulators
i) Determination of Line Regulation and Load Regulation.
ii) Plot the Load regulation characteristics
11. Mini Project.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
L T P C
15EC353: DATA STRUCTURES LABORATORY
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To develop programming skills in design and implementation of linear data structures.

To work with trees, graphs and solve applications using them.
To implement various sorting algorithms.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Develop the various linear data structures such as List, Stack and Queue ADTs.
Improve programming skills in design and implementation of nonlinear data structures.
Solve graph based applications.
45
Implement sorting algorithms for different applications.
1. Lists and itsapplications

2. Stack and its applications
3. Queues
4. Binary Search tree
5. Set
6. AVL tree
7. Binary Heap
8. Graph traversal and Spanning tree
9. Hashing
10. Sorting Algorithms
11. Mini Project.
TEXT BOOK:
nd
1. M. A. Weiss, "Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C", 2 Edition , Pearson Education, 2005.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. A. V. Aho, J. E. Hopcroft, and J. D. Ullman, "Data Structures and Algorithms",Pearson Education, 2003.
nd
2. R. F. Gilberg, B. A. Forouzan, "Data Structures", 2 Edition, Thomson India Edition, 2005.
nd
3. JeanPaul Tremblay and Paul G. Sorenson, An Introduction to Data Structures with Applications, 2
Edition, Tata McGrawHill, 2001.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.myopencourses.com/subject/datastructuresandalgorithms
2. http://www.geeksforgeeks.org/datastructures/
3. http://courses.cs.vt.edu/~csonline/DataStructures
4. http://cslibrary.stanford.edu/103/LinkedListBasics.pdf
15MA403: MATHEMATICS IV - LINEAR ALGEBRA AND RANDOM L T P C

PROCESSES
3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge in vector space which will be useful to study about Signals and Systems
To impart the properties of orthogonal vector spaces and orthogonal matrices.
To be exposed to statistical methods designed to contribute to the process of making scientific
judgments in the face of uncertainty and variation
To familiarize the student with the concept of Linear system with random inputs
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Well versed in Vector space concepts and its applications
Apply the concepts of two dimensional to any ndimensional
Analyze the relation between the random input and output signals
Use the suitable transfer function for reducing noise occurred in the media
UNIT I VECTOR SPACES 12
Vector spaces Subspaces Linear equations Linear independence and Linear dependence Basis and
46
Dimension Four fundamental spaces Linear Transformation Matrix representation of Linear transformation.
UNIT II ORTHOGONALITY 12
Perpendicular vectors and orthogonal subspaces Inner product space Projection onto lines Projections
Least square approximations Orthogonal bases Orthogonal matrices and Gram Schmidt orthogonalization
process.
UNIT III TWO DIMENSIONAL RANDOM VARIABLES 12
Joint distributions Marginal and conditional distributions Covariance Correlation and Regression
Transformation of random variables Central limit theorem (for iid random variables, proof excluded)
UNIT IV CLASSIFICATION OF RANDOM PROCESSES 12
First order, second order strictly stationary, widesense stationary and ergodic processes Auto correlation
Cross correlation Properties Power spectral density Cross spectral density Properties Wiener
Khintchine relation.
UNIT V LINEAR SYSTEMS WITH RANDOM INPUTS 12
Linear time invariant system System transfer function Linear systems with random inputs Auto correlation
and cross correlation functions of input and output White noise.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
th
1. Strang G, Linear Algebra and its applications, 4 Edition, Cengage learning India pvt, 2012.
th
2. Peebles Jr. P.Z., Probability Random Variables and Random Signal Principles, 4 Edition, Tata
McGrawHill Publishers, 2002.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Data, K.B, Matrix and Linear Algebra, Prentice Hall of India, 2007.
2. H. Stark and J.W. Woods, Probability and Random Processes with Applications to Signal Processing,
rd
3 Edition, Pearson Education Asia, 2002.
3. Hwei Hsu, Schaums Outline of Theory and Problems of Probability, Random Variables and Random
Processes, Tata McGrawHill, 2004.
nd
4. LeonGarcia.A, Probability and Random Processes for Electrical Engineering, 2 Edition, Pearson
Education Asia, 2007.
nd
5. Yates and D.J. Goodman, Probability and Stochastic Processes, 2 edition, John Wiley and Sons,
2005.
L T P C
15EC401: ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS II
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concept of feedback in designing amplifiers and oscillators

To analyze Amplifier circuits at high frequencies.
To design wave shaping circuits for different applications
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Identify the types of feedback employed in amplifiers and analyze their performance.
Design oscillators, wave shaping circuits, multivibrators and power amplifiers for a variety of Engineering
applications.
UNIT I FEEDBACK AMPLIFIERS 9
47
Classification of amplifiers The Feedback concept Transfer gain with feedback General characteristics of
Negative feedback amplifiers Input resistance Output Resistance Method of Analysis of a Feedback
amplifier voltage series feedback, current series feedback, current shunt feedback and voltage shunt feedback.
UNIT II OSCILLATORS 9
Oscillators Barkhausen Criterion Mechanism for start of oscillation and stabilization of amplitude
Classification of oscillators Analysis of RC oscillators phase shift Wien bridge General form of LC
Oscillator circuit Analysis of LC oscillators Hartley, Colpitts, Clapp, Electrical Equivalent circuit of Crystals
Miller and Pierce Crystal oscillators.
UNIT III POWER AMPLIFIERS AND TUNED AMPLIFIERS 9
Class A large signal amplifiers transformer coupled class A audio power amplifier efficiency of Class A
amplifiers Class B amplifier distortion in amplifiers push pull amplifier complementary symmetry push
pull amplifier Hybrid equivalent circuit of BJTs High frequency equivalent circuit of FETs .
Tuned amplifiers Analysis of capacitor coupled Single tuned amplifier Stagger tuned amplifiers Class C
Tuned Amplifier.
UNIT IV WAVE SHAPING AND MULTIVIBRATOR CIRCUITS 9
RC Integrator and Differentiator circuits clippers and Clampers Multivibrators Bistablemultivibrator Fixed
bias Binary Self Bias Binary Triggering methods for Bistablemultivibrator Schmitt trigger
Monostablemultivibrator Astablemultivibrator.
UNIT V BLOCKING OSCILLATORS AND TIMEBASE GENERATORS 9
Pulse transformers, Blocking Oscillator Triggered blocking oscillator Monostable blocking oscillator with base
timing Monostable blocking oscillator with emitter timing Astable Blocking Oscillators Diode controlled RC
controlled Time base circuits Voltage Time base circuit Current Time base circuit
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Millman J, Taub H and MothikiS.PrakashRao, Pulse Digital and Switching Waveforms, TMH, 2008
2. Millman and Halkias. C., Integrated Electronics, TMH, 2009
rd
3. S. Salivahanan, N. Suresh Kumar, Electronic Devices and Circuits, 3 Edition, TMH, 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
th
1. Robert L. Boylestadf.and Louis Nasheresky, Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory, 9 Edition,
Pearson, Education / PHI, 2008.
2. David A. Bell, Solid State Pulse Circuits, Prentice Hall of India, 2005.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.edutalks.org
2. http://electriciantraining.tpub.com/14181/css/14181_133.htm
3. www.cambridge.org/au/download_file/217981
L T P C
15EC402: COMMUNICATION THEORY
3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concept of various Amplitude and Angle modulation systems.

To analyze the performance of Continuous Wave modulation systems.
To learn information theory and source coding theorem.
48
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Compare and contrast the strength and weakness of various modulation systems.
Analyze the behavior of analog systems in the presence of noise.
Apply various source coding techniques on the message signals.
UNIT I AMPLITUDE MODULATION SYSTEMS 10
Review of Spectral Characteristics of Periodic and Nonperiodic signals Need for modulation, Generation and
Demodulation of AM, DSBSC, SSB and VSB Signals Spectrum, Power relations, Comparison of various Amplitude
Modulation Systems Frequency Translation FDM.
UNIT II ANGLE MODULATION SYSTEMS 8
Phase and Frequency Modulation PMFM Conversion, FMPM Conversion, Single tone, Narrow Band and
Wideband FM Transmission Bandwidth Generation and Demodulation of FM Signal.
UNIT III NOISE THEORY 8
Random Variables and Random Process Gaussian Process Types of Noise Shot noise, Thermal noise and
White noise Narrow band noise Rayleigh, Rician Noise temperature Noise Figure.
UNIT IV PERFORMANCE OF CW MODULATION SYSTEMS 10
Superheterodyne Radio receiver and its characteristics SNR Noise in DSBSC and SSB systems using coherent
detection Noise in AM system using envelope detection, Noise in FM system FM threshold effect Pre emphasis
and De-emphasis in FM Comparison of performances.
UNIT V INFORMATION THEORY & SOURCE CODING TECHNIQUES 9
Discrete Messages and Information Content Entropy Information rate Mutual information channel capacity
theorem Source coding Shannon Fano coding Huffman coding Lempel Ziv (LZ) coding Bandwidth S/N
tradeoff.
TUTORIAL : 15 PERIODS TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
th
1. Simon Haykin, Communication Systems, 5 Edition, John Wiley & sons, NY, 2009.
th
2. Dennis Roddy& John Coolen,Electronic Communication, 4 Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 1995.
rd
3. Herbert Taub& Donald L Schilling, Principles of Communication Systems, 3 Edition, Tata McGraw Hill,
2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
th
1. Bruce Carlson, Communication Systems, 5 Edition, McGraw Hill, 2009.
rd
2. B.P.Lathi, Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems, 3 Edition, Oxford Press, 2007.
nd
3. R.P Singh and S.D.Sapre, Communication Systems Analog and Digital, 2 Edition, Tata McGraw Hill,
2007.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://granularsynthesis.com/pdf/gabor.pdf
2. http://elearning.vtu.ac.in/P4/EC63/S13.pdf
3. http://math.meijo-u.ac.jp/labs/rs001/homepgApril3.pdf
49
L T P C
15EC403: TRANSMISSION LINES AND WAVEGUIDES
3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To calculate the parameters of the transmission lines

To analyze the voltage and current in dissipationless lines
To analyze the wave characterization in conductors and dielectrics
To analyze the characterization of TE and TM waves
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Perform Distributed circuit analysis using lumped circuit analysis concepts.
Apply the knowledge gained to design various Microwave components.
Design matching circuit using smith chart for RF and Microwave circuits.
UNIT I TRANSMISSION LINE THEORY 9
Different types of transmission lines Definition of Characteristic impedance The transmission line as a
cascade of TSections Definition of Propagation Constant General Solution of the transmission line Two
standard forms for voltage and current of a line terminated by an impedance physical significance of the
equation and the infinite line input impedance meaning of reflection coefficient wavelength and velocity of
propagation Waveform distortion distortion less transmission line Telephone cable Inductance loading of
telephone cables reflection on a line not terminated by Zo Transfer impedance reflection factor and reflection
loss Open and short circuited lines, Insertion loss.
UNIT II THE LINE AT RADIO FREQUENCY 9
Parameters of open wire line and Coaxial cable at RF Line constants for dissipation voltages and currents on
the dissipation less line standing waves nodes standing wave ratio input impedance of open and short
circuited lines power and impedance measurement on lines /2 line Impedance matching /4 line single
and double stub matching Smith chart and its applications.
UNIT III GUIDED WAVES BETWEEN PARALLEL PLANES 9
Polarization Reflection of Plane Wave from a conductor normal incidence Reflection of Plane Waves by a
perfect dielectric normal and oblique incidence Dependence on Polarization Brewster angle.
Waves between parallel planes of perfect conductors Transverse electric and transverse magnetic waves
characteristics of TE and TM Waves Transverse Electromagnetic waves phase and group velocities of
propagation component uniform plane waves between parallel planes Attenuation of TE and TM waves in
parallel plane guides Wave impedances.
UNIT IV RECTANGULAR WAVEGUIDES 9
Transverse Magnetic Waves in Rectangular Wave guides Transverse Electric Waves in Rectangular
Waveguides characteristic of TE and TM Waves Cutoff wavelength and phase velocity Impossibility of TEM
waves Dominant mode in rectangular waveguide Attenuation of TE and TM modes in rectangular waveguides
Wave impedances Excitation of modes.
UNIT V CIRCULAR WAVE GUIDES AND RESONATORS 9
Field equations TM and TE waves in circular guides wave impedances Dominant mode in circular
waveguide excitation of modes TEM wave in coaxial lines Microwave cavities Rectangular cavity
resonators circular cavity resonator Q factor of a cavity resonator for TE101 mode.
TUTORIAL: 15 PERIODS TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
nd
1. John D.Ryder, "Networks, lines and fields", 2 Edition Prentice Hall of India, 2006.
50
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ramo, Whineery and Van Duzer, Fields and Waves in Communication Electronics John Wiley,
2003
2. David K.Cheng, Field and Waves in Electromagnetism, Pearson Education, 1989.
3. G S N Raju, Electromagnetic Field Theory and Transmission Lines, Pearson Education, 2006.
nd
4. E.C.Jordan&K.G.Balmain, Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems, 2 Edition, PrenticeHall
2011.
5. Joseph Edminister, Schaums Series, Electromagnetics, TMH, 2007.
6. Johnson,Walter C Transmission Lines and Networks , McGraw-Hill Book Co, 1963.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.ece.msstate.edu/~donohoe/ece4333notes3.pdf
2. web.mit.edu/6.013_book/www/chapter13/13.4.htm
3. personal.ee.surrey.ac.uk/Personal/D.Jefferies/wguide.html
4. home.sandiego.edu/~ekim/e194rfs01/tlsmthek.pdf
L T P C
15EC404: DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To introduce various design techniques for digital filters

To be aware of the finite word length effects in signal processing and multirate signal processing
concepts
To gain insight of the architectural features of digital signal processors TMS 320C50
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Design different types of filters
Analyze the finite word length effects in signal processing andmultirate signal processing concepts
Write programmes in TMS 320C50processor
UNIT I INFINITE IMPULSE RESPONSE DIGITAL FILTERS 9
Design of analogue Butterworth and Chebyshev Filters Frequency transformation in analogue domain Design
of IIR digital filters using impulse invariance technique and bilinear transform pre warping Realization using
direct, cascade and parallel forms.
UNIT II FINITE IMPULSE RESPONSE DIGITAL FILTERS 9
Symmetric and Anti symmetric FIR filters Linear phase FIR filters Design using Rectangular, Hamming,
Hanning, Triangular and Blackmann Windows Frequency sampling method Realization of FIR filters
Transversal, Linear phase and Polyphase structures.
UNIT III FINITE WORD LENGTH EFFECTS 9
Fixed point and floating point number representations Comparison Truncation and Rounding errors
Quantization noise derivation for quantization noise power coefficient quantization error Product
quantization error Overflow error Round off noise power limit cycle oscillations due to product round off and
overflow errors signal scaling
UNIT IV MULTIRATE SIGNAL PROCESSING 9
Decimation by a factor D Interpolation by a factor I Filter Design and implementation for sampling rate
conversion: Direct form FIR filter structures Polyphase filter structure.
51
UNIT V DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSORS 9
DSP architecture Harvard architecture Dedicated MAC unit Multiple ALUs, Advanced addressing modes,
Pipelining Overview of instruction set of TMS320C50.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
rd
1. Alan V Oppenheim, Ronald W Schafer, Discrete Time Signal Processing, 3 Edition, Pearson
Education 2010
2. B.Venkataramani& M. Bhaskar, Digital Signal Processor Architecture, Programming and Application,
TMH, 2002.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. John G Proakis, Dimtris G Manolakis, Digital Signal Processing PrinciplesAlgorithms

th
andApplication,4 Edition, PHI, 2007,
2. S.K.Mitra, Digital Signal ProcessingA Computer based approach, Tata McGrawHill, 2011.
nd
3. S.Salivahanan and Gnanapriya, Digital Signal Processing, 2 Edition, TMH , 2011
4. Rabiner, Lawrence R & Gold, Bernard, Theory and Application of Digital Signal Processing PHI
Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2012.
5. Antoniou, Andreas, Digital Signal Processing TMH Pub. Co. Ltd, New Delhi, 2008.
6. Avtarsingh, S.Srinivasan, DSP Implementation using DSP microprocessor with Examples from
TMS32C54XX, Thamson / Brooks cole Publishers, 2003.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.dspguru.com/dsp/faqs/fir/basics
2. http://www.ingelec.uns.edu.ar/pds2803/Materiales/LibrosPDF/Porat/booktext12.pdf
L T P C
15HS401: PROFESSIONAL ETHICS IN ENGINEERING
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To stimulate critical and responsible reflection on moral issues surrounding engineering practice.
To provide the conceptual tools necessary for pursuing those issues
To make the students aware of the different ethical issues, codes of conduct for engineers in the society
and moralities in an organization.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Obtain awareness on Engineering Ethics, Human Values & instill moral values, social values and loyalty.
Appreciate the rights of others
Practice the codes of conduct for engineers in the society.
Realize their responsibilities, professional rights and moralities for the enhancement of an organization
UNIT I HUMAN VALUES AND ENGINEERING ETHICS 9
Morals, Values and Ethics Work Ethic Team work Service Learning Respect for Others Living Peacefully
Honesty Courage Valuing Time Cooperation Commitment SelfConfidence Customs and religion
Senses of Engineering Ethics Variety of moral issues Types of inquiry, Moral dilemmas and Moral Autonomy
Kohlbergs Theory Gilligans Theory Theories about right action Use of Ethical Theories, Case studies and
moral stories.
52
UNIT II ENGINEERING AS SOCIAL EXPERIMENTATION 9
Engineering as experimentation Engineers as responsible experimenters Codes of ethics Sample code of

conduct A balanced outlook on Law The Challenger case study.
UNIT III RESPONSIBILITIES AND RIGHTS 9
Collegiality and loyalty Respect for Authority Collective Bargaining Confidentiality Conflicts of Interest
(Whistle Blowing) Occupational Crime.
Professional Rights Employee Rights Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Case studies.
UNIT IV SAFETY AND RISK 9
Safety and risk Assessment of safety and risk Risk Benefit Analysis Reducing risk The Three Mile Island
and Chernobyl disaster Bhopal gas tragedy The Japan nuclear tragedy case studies.
UNIT V GLOBAL ISSUES 9
Multinational corporations Environmental Ethics Computer Ethics Weapons Development Engineers as

Managers and Consulting Engineers Engineers as Expert Witnesses and Advisors Moral Leadership Case
studies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
th
1. Mike Martin and Roland Schinzinger, Ethics in Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 4 Edition,
2004.
rd
2. Mike Martin and Roland Schinzinger, Introduction to Engineering Ethics, 3 Edition, McGraw Hill
Education, India, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
nd
1. Jayshree Suresh, B.S.Raghavan,Human values and professional ethics, 2 Edition, S.Chand&
company Ltd, 2007.
2. D.R.Kiran, Professional ethics and Human values, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007.
th
3. Charles D. Fleddermann, "Engineering Ethics",4 Edition Pearson Education/ Prentice Hall,2011.
4. Charles E Harris, Michael S. Pritchard and Michael J Rabins, Engineering Ethics Concepts and
th
Cases,5 Edition, Wadsworth Thompson Learning, 2014 .
th
5. John R Boatright, Ethics and the Conduct of Business, 7 Edition, Pearson Education, 2012.
6. Edmund G See Bauer and Robert L Barry, Fundamentals of Ethics for Scientists and Engineers, Oxford
University Press, 2000.
7. Prof. (Col) P S Bajaj and Dr. Raj Agrawal, Business Ethics An Indian Perspective, Wiley, 2004.
rd
8. David Ermann and Michele S Shauf, Computers, Ethics and Society, 3 Edition, Oxford University
Press, 2003.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.onlineethics.org
2. www.nspe.org
3. www.globalethics.org
4. www.ethics.org
L T P C
15EC451: ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS LABORATORY II
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To design feedback Amplifier circuits and to measure gain, Input and output resistances and compare
53
their performance with and without feedback.
To design Oscillators, power amplifiers and wave shaping circuits and verify its outputs.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Design and analyze feedback Amplifiers.
Design oscillators, wave shaping circuits, multivibrators and power amplifiers for the variety of
engineering applications.
Simulate and analyze the circuits using PSPICE.
1. Voltage series Feedback amplifier

i. Plot the Frequency response and determine the Gain Bandwidth product.
ii. Measure the Input and output impedances
iii. Compare the performance with and without feedback.
2. Current Shunt Feedback amplifier
i. Plot the Frequency response and determine the Gain Bandwidth product.
ii. Measure the Input and output impedances
iii. Compare the performance with and without feedback.
3. RC phase shift oscillators and Wein Bridge Oscillator.
4. Hartley Oscillator and Colpitts oscillator.
5. Class A,Class B Power Amplifier.
6. Class C Tuned Amplifier.
7. RC Integrators, RC Differentiators, Clippers & Clampers.
8. Astablemultivibrator.
9. Bistablemultivibrator and Monostablemultivibrator
10. Mini Project
SIMULATION USING PSPICE:
1. Astable, Monostable and Bistablemultivibrator

2. Phase shift oscillator, Wein Bridge Oscillator
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
L T P C
15EC452: DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LABORATORY
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To implement the IIR and FIR filter using MATLAB.

To introduce multirate signal processing concepts
To implement the signal processing techniques using the instructions of TMS320C5X.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Apply the different tool boxes in MATLAB into Matlab programming for Signal processing applications
and multirate signal processing
Implement signal processing algorithm in DSP processors
54
USING MATLAB
1. Generation of Signals
2. Linear and circular convolution of two sequences
3. Calculation of FFT of a signal
4. Sampling and effect of aliasing
5. Design of FIR filters
6. Design of IIR filters
7. Analysis of Quantization effects in a first order system
8. Multirate signal processing
USING TMS320C5X
1. Study of various addressing modes of DSP using simple programming examples
2. Sampling of input signal and display
3. Implementation of FIR filter
4. Calculation of FFT
5. Mini projects in TMS320C5X
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
15HS451: PRESENTATION SKILLS LABORATORY L T P C

(Common to ECE / MECH / IT/BT) 0 0 2 1
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To hone the students proficiency in speaking skills

To enhance their pronouncing skills
To help the students acquire presentation skills
To enable the students communicate effectively
COURSE OUTCOMES:
recognize phonemes
improve pronunciation
acquire all strategies of presentation skills
develop interpersonal skills
UNIT I PHONETIC PRACTICE 4
English phonemes: Vowels, Diphthongs, Consonants Word Stress, sounds recognizing practice
UNIT II LISTENING COMPREHENSION 3
Documentaries Educational video clips Oration of Great leaders, Radio & TV news Listening to
conversations Telephone etiquette, Reviewing news from Media.
UNIT III LANGUAGE FUNCTIONS 3
Giving reasons talking about future plans Reporting Comparing & Contrasting Making suggestions
UNIT IV PRESENTATION STRATEGIES 5
Presentation Strategies Defining Purpose; Audience & Locale Organizing Contents Preparing Outline
Audio-visual Aids Nuances of Delivery Body Language Proximics Setting Nuances of Voice Dynamics
Time- Dimension.
UNIT V PRESENTATION AND APPRAISAL SESSIONS 10
Importance of Journal articles elements of technical articles (abstract, introduction, methodology, results,
55
discussion, conclusion, appendices, Bibliography and references) Preparation of scholarly papers based on
the internet Resources Oral Presentations & Reviews.
TOTAL: 25 PERIODS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Mandel, Steve, Effective Presentation Skills, Viva Books Pvt. Ltd., 2004.
2. Gopalaswamy, Ramesh & Ramesh Mahadevan, ACE of Soft Skills, Pearson, 2010.
3. Gimson, AC, An Introduction to the Pronunciation of English, ELBS, 1989.
4. Oconnor, JD, Better English Pronunciation, Cambridge University Press, 1967.
L T P C
15EC501: DIGITAL COMMUNICATION
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To get acquainted with the process of sampling, quantization and coding.

To understand baseband and bandpass signal transmission and reception techniques.
To learn various spread spectrum techniques.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Compare and contrast different waveform coding Techniques
Apply Digital communication technologies in a variety of Engineering applications
Implement Error control coding and Digital modulation techniques in MATLAB
UNIT I SAMPLING AND WAVEFORM CODING 9
Sampling Impulse sampling, Natural Sampling Sampler Implementation Quantization: Uniform and Non
uniform Encoding Techniques for Analog Sources Temporal waveform encoding PCM, DPCM, DM, ADM,
ADPCM Subband coding.
UNIT II BANDLIMITED SIGNALLING 9
Power Spectra of PAM signals Intersymbol Interference ideal Nyquist channel correlative coding
Duobinary and modified Duobinarycoding eye patterns and equalization techniques.
UNIT III DIGITAL MODULATION TECHNIQUES 10
Pass band Transmission model Gram Schmidt orthogonalization procedure Correlation Receiver Matched
Filter Coherent binary PSK Coherent binary FSK, Coherent QPSK Non coherent orthogonal modulation,
Non coherent Binary FSK, Differential PSK Comparison of binary and Quaternary modulation schemes.
UNIT IV CHANNEL CODING 9
Error control coding Linear block codes Cyclic codes Convolutional codes Maximum Likelihood Decoding
of convolutional codes Viterbi Algorithm
UNIT V SPREAD SPECTRUM SYSTEMS 8
Psuedo Noise sequences generation and correlation properties direct sequence spread spectrum systems
processing gain Antijam Characteristics Frequency Hop systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Simon Haykin, Digital Communications, Wiley Student Edition, 2016.
56
2. John.G. Proakis, MasoudSalehi, Fundamentals of Communication Systems, Pearson Education, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Michael. B. Purrsley, Introduction to Digital Communication, Pearson Education, 2006.

nd
2. Bernard Sklar, Pabitra Kumar Ray, Digital Communication: Fundamentals and Applications, 2
Edition, Pearson Education, 2009.
rd
3. Herbert Taub& Donald L Schilling, Principles of Communication Systems, 3 Edition, Tata McGraw Hill,
2008.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.cs.duke.edu/courses/spring10/cps296.3/ecc4.ppt
2. www.urel.feec.vutbr.cz/web_documents/studium/doc/.../3SpreadS.pdf
3. wits.ice.nsysu.edu.tw/course/pdfdownload/9311/DC3SourceCoding.pdf
L T P C
15EC502: LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To determine the ac and dc characteristics of opamp

To employ opamp for a variety of engineering applications
To analyse different types of analog to digital and digital to analog conversion.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Analyze the loop configuration of opamp.
Use analog multiplier and PLL for detection of modulated signals.
Evaluate the performance of different data converters.
Apply the circuits of wave form generators and special functions in IC.
UNIT I IC FABRICATION AND CIRCUIT CONFIGURATION FOR LINEAR IC 10
Advantages of ICs over discrete components Manufacturing process of monolithic ICs Construction of
monolithic bipolar transistor Monolithic diodes Integrated Resistors Monolithic Capacitors Inductors.
Differential gain CMRR, General operational amplifier stages internal circuit diagrams of IC 741 DC and AC
performance characteristics slew rate Open and closed loop configurations Introduction to Dual OPAMP
TL082 as a general purpose JFET input operational amplifier.
UNIT II APPLICATIONS OF OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS 9
Sign Changer Scale Changer Voltage Follower Adder Subtractor Instrumentation amplifier Integrator
Differentiator Lowpass, Highpass and Bandpass Butterworth filters Phase Shift Circuits Comparators
Schmitt trigger Multivibrators Sinewave generators Precision rectifier V to I and I to V converters.
UNIT III ANALOG MULTIPLIER AND PLL 8
Analog Multiplier using Emitter Coupled Transistor Pair Gilbert Multiplier cell Variable transconductance
technique analog multiplier and phase detection, wide band width precision analog multiplier MPY 634 and its
applications Operation of the basic PLL Closed loop analysis Voltage controlled oscillator Monolithic PLL
IC 565 application of PLL for AM detection FM detection FSK modulation and demodulation Frequency
synthesizing.
UNIT IV ANALOG TO DIGITAL AND DIGITAL TO ANALOG CONVERTERS 8
Analog and Digital Data Conversions specifications D/A converter weighted resistor type, R2R Ladder type
Voltage Mode and Current Mode R2R Ladder types parallel input multiplying type DAC7821 high
speed sampleandhold circuits A/D Converters Flash type Successive Approximation type Single Slope
57
type Dual Slope type.
UNIT V SPECIAL FUNCTION ICs 10
Timer IC 555 ICL8038 function generator IC Voltage regulators LM317 Three terminal fixed and adjustable
voltage regulators IC 723 general purpose regulator Switching Regulators, Monolithic switching regulator
DC-DC converters, Low Drop Out (LDO) Regulators Switched capacitor filter IC MF10 Frequency to Voltage
and Voltage to Frequency converters Audio Power amplifier Video Amplifier.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. D.RoyChoudhry, Shail Jain, Linear Integrated Circuits, New Age International Pvt. Ltd., 2000.
rd
2. Sergio Franco, Design with operational amplifiers and analog integrated circuits, 3 Edition, Tata
McGrawHill, 2007.
th
3. RamakantA.Gayakwad, OPAMP and Linear ICs, 4 Edition, Prentice Hall / Pearson Education, 2001.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
nd
1. B.S.Sonde, System design using Integrated Circuits , 2 Edition, New Age Pub, 2001
2. Gray and Meyer, Analysis and Design of Analog Integrated Circuits, Wiley International, 2005.
3. J.Michael Jacob, Applications and Design with Analog Integrated Circuits, Prentice Hall of India, 1996.
4. William D.Stanley, Operational Amplifiers with Linear Integrated Circuits, Pearson Education, 2004.
5. K Lal Kishore, Operational Amplifier and Linear Integrated Circuits, Pearson Education, 2006.
nd
6. S.Salivahanan& V.S. KanchanaBhaskaran, Linear Integrated Circuits, 2 Edition, TMH, 2015.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.gobookee.org/linearintegratedcircuitsnotes
2. http://freevideolectures.com/Course/2915/Linear-Integrated-Circuits
L T P C
15EC503: SYSTEM DESIGN USING MICROPROCESSORS AND
MICROCONTROLLERS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To apply knowledge of the architecture for programming 8086 microprocessor and 8051 microcontroller.
To develop skills in interfacing of peripheral devices with 8086 microprocessor and 8051
microcontroller.
To develop programming skills using 8086 microprocessor and 8051 microcontroller.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Write assembly language program for 8086 microprocessor and 8051 microcontroller.
Interface peripheral devices with 8086 microprocessor and 8051 microcontroller
Design 8086 microprocessor based systems and 8051 microcontroller based systems.
UNIT I ARCHITECTURE OF 8086 & ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE PROGRAMMING 9
Microprocessor Families 8086 Architecture Instruction set Addressing Modes Bus Cycles Assembly
Language Programming of 8086 Assembler Directives Interrupts and its applications.
UNIT II PERIPHERAL INTERFACING 9
58
External Memory Interface Programmable Peripheral Interface (8255) Serial Communication Interface (8251)
Keyboard and Display Interface (8279) Programmable Timer Controller (8253/8254) Programmable
interrupt controller (8259).
UNIT III 8051 MICROCONTROLLER 9
8051 Microcontroller Instruction Set Assembly Language Programming I/ O Interfacing 8051 Timers
USART Interrupts 8051 Programming in C
UNIT IV MSP430 MICROCONTROLLER 10
Architecture Introduction - Embedded C Programming in MSP430 - GPIO Pins & Configuration - Timers,
Capture & PWM DAC ADC Ports - I2C
UNIT V SYSTEM DESIGN 8
ADC & DAC Interfacing Sensor Interfacing RTC Interfacing (DS1307) using I2C Standard Relay, Motor
Control DC & Stepper Motor System Design: Traffic Light Controller & Digital Weighing Machine
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
rd
1. Douglas V Hall, Microprocessors And Interfacing, 3 Edition, McGraw Hill Education, 2012
nd
2. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems using Assembly and C, 2
Edition, Pearson India, 2007
nd
3. John H. Davies, "MSP430 Microcontroller Basics", 2 Edition, Newnes,2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. A.K. Ray and K.M. Burchandi, Intel Microprocessors Architecture Programming and Interfacing,
McGraw Hill, 2000
2. Sunil Mathur, "Microprocessor 8086: Architecture, Programming and Interfacing", PHI Learning Pvt.
Ltd., 2011.
rd
3. Kenneth Ayala, "The 8051 Microcontroller, 3 Edition, Delmar Cengage Learning, 2004
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.phy.davidson.edu/FacHome/dmb/py310/8085.pdf
2. http://www.nptel.ac.in/courses/108107029/1
3. http://www.zseries.in/classroom/courses/
4. http://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/DS1307.pdf
5. http://www.hutech.edu.vn/khoacntt/attachments/article/2809/MSP430%20Microcontroller%20Basics.pdf
L T P C
15EC551: LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS LABORATORY
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To examine the ac and dc characteristics of Opamp 741.

To practice and familiarize the different applications of IC 741/TL082.
To verify the Filtering characteristics of opamp.
To simulate the opamp applications using PSpice.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Analyze the characteristics of opamp
Create different applications using linear integrated circuits.
59
Evaluate the performance of the filters designed using opamp.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:All Experiments based on 741/ TL082 / ASLK PRO Kits
1. Implementation of Inverting, Non inverting, differential amplifiers and voltage follower.

2. Implementation of Integrator and Differentiator.
3. Implementation of Schmitt trigger and Instrumentation amplifier.
4. Design of Active low pass, high pass, band pass and notch filters.
5. Implementation of Phase shift and Wien bridge oscillators.
6. Astable and monostablemultivibrators using NE555 Timer.
7. Study of PLL 565 characteristics and its use as Frequency Multiplier.
8. Study of DC power supply using LM317, LM723 and Low Drop out (LDO) Regulator using TPS72.
9. Design of DC to DC converter that can give regulated output voltage for a given input voltage range
using TPS40020 IC.
10. Designing with 12 bit parallel input multiplying DAC 7821
11. Simulation of Experiments 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 using Spice tools.
12. Mini Project
WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://www.ee.iitb.ac.in/~sequel/
2. http://iitb.vlab.co.in/?sub=43&brch=225
3. http://basicelectronics.iitkgp.ernet.in/
4. TL 082 Data sheet https://www.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/tl082.pdf
5. Application Note: https://www.ti.com/lit/an/sloa020a/sloa020.pdf
6. MPY 634 Data sheet https://www.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/mpy634.pdf
7. Application Note: https://www.ti.com/lit/an/sbfa006/sbfa006.pdf
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
L T P C
15EC552: MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS SYSTEM
LABORATORY
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To get familiarized with 8086 Assembly level programming.

To get familiarized with 8051 Assembly level programming and C Programming.
To get familiarized with MSP430 Programming.
To interface various peripheral devices with microprocessor & microcontroller.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Debug the assembly language programs of microprocessors and microcontroller.
Design microprocessor based systems.
Design microcontroller based systems.
MICROPROCESSOR BASED EXPERIMENTS

1. Arithmetic, Logical Operations in 8086.
2. String operations in 8086.
60
3. Digital clock and Stop Watch.
4. Interfacing using 8255 (ADC, Stepper Motor).
5. Interfacing keyboard and display using 8279.
MICROCONTROLLER BASED EXPERIMENTS
1. Programming using Arithmetic, Logical and Bit Manipulation instructions of 8051 microcontroller (ALP).
2. Programming and Verifying Timer, Interrupts in 8051 using ALP.
3. UART operations in 8051 using C.
4. MSP430 GPIO Programming
5. MSP430 DAC & PWM Programming
6. MSP430 Low Power Mode Programming
7. Mini Project.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
L T P C
15EC553: COMMUNICATION LABORATORY
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To design various analog and digital communication systems

To Implement Error control coding and Digital modulation techniques in MATLAB
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Analyze Analog and Digital communication systems
Analyze the different Error control coding techniques used in Digital communication systems
1. Amplitude modulation and Demodulation.

i. Full AM using IC AD633 and demodulation using Envelope detector
ii. DSB modulation using Ring modulator
2. Frequency Modulation and Demodulation.
iii. Frequency Modulation using VCO IC and IC 8038
iv. Frequency Demodulation using PLL
3. PreEmphasis / Deemphasis Circuits.
4. Pulse Amplitude Modulation and demodulation.
5. Pulse Width Modulation and Pulse Position Modulation using LM555.
6. Pulse code modulation.
7. Delta Modulation.
8. Time Division Multiplexing.
9. Line Coding.
10. Error Control Coding using MATLAB.
11. Digital Modulation & Demodulation ASK, PSK, QPSK, FSK (Hardware & MATLAB).
12. Mini Project.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
61
L T P C
15EC601: ANTENNAS AND WAVE PROPAGATION
3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To analyze the antenna characteristics and working principles of various types of antenna.
To be aware of various techniques involved in various antenna parameter measurements.
To appreciate the radio wave propagation in the atmosphere.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Analyze and Measure the radiation parameters.
Design array antenna systems from specifications.
Analyze the atmospheric effects on radio wave propagation.
UNIT I ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION AND ANTENNA FUNDAMENTALS 9
Vector potential Solution of wave equation retarded vector and scalar potential Hertzian dipole Antenna
characteristics Radiation pattern, Beam solid angle, Directivity, Gain, Input impedance, Polarization, Beam
width, Bandwidth, Reciprocity, Equivalence of Radiation patterns, Effective aperture, Effective length, Antenna
temperature.
UNIT II WIRE ANTENNAS AND ANTENNA ARRAYS 9
Short dipole Radiation resistance and Directivity Half wave Dipole Monopole Small loop antennas
Antenna Arrays Linear Array and Pattern Multiplication, Twoelement Array, Uniform Array Array with non
uniform Excitation Binomial Array and DT Array.
UNIT III APERTURE ANTENNAS 9
Magnetic Current and its fields Uniqueness theorem Field equivalence principle Duality principle Method
of Images Pattern properties Slot antenna Horn Antenna Pyramidal Horn Antenna Reflector Antenna
Flat reflector Corner Reflector Common curved reflector shapes Lens Antenna.
UNIT IV SPECIAL ANTENNAS AND ANTENNA MEASUREMENTS 9
Long wire V and Rhombic Antenna YagiUda Antenna Turnstile Antenna Helical Antenna Axial mode
helix, Normal mode helix, Biconical Antenna, Log periodic Dipole Array Spiral Antenna Microstrip Patch
Antennas Antenna Measurements Radiation Pattern measurement, Gain and Directivity Measurements,
Impedance measurement and Anechoic Chamber measurement.
UNIT V RADIO WAVE PROPAGATION 9
Calculation of Great Circle Distance between any two points on earth Freespace Propagation Ground Wave
Propagation, Ground Reflection, Surface waves, space waves Diffraction Wave propagation in complex
Environments Tropospheric Propagation Tropospheric Scatter Ionospheric propagation Structure of
ionosphere, Sky waves, skip distance, Virtual height, Critical frequency, MUF, Electrical properties of ionosphere
Effects of earths magnetic fields.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
th
1. John D.Kraus, Ronald J Marhefka and Ahmad S Khan, Antennas and wave propagation, 4 Edition,
McGrawHill Book Company, 2010.
nd
2. Constantine A. Balanis, Antenna Theory Analysis and Design, 2 Edition, John Wiley, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. A.R.Harish, M.Sachidanada, Antennas and Wave propagation, Oxford University Press, 2007.
2. G.S.N.Raju, Antenna Wave Propagation, Pearson Education, 2004.
3. R.E.Collins, Antenna and Radiowave propagation, McGrawHill, 1987
62
4. E.C.Jordan and Balmain, Electromagnetic waves and Radiating Systems, Pearson Education / PHI,
2006.
5. W.L Stutzman and G.A. Thiele, Antenna analysis and design, John Wiley, 2000.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.authorstream.com/Presentation/Ani_Kate508171wavepropagation/
2. http://classes.soe.ucsc.edu/cmpe123a/Fall07/doc/AntBrief123A12607.ppt
3. http://muse.widener.edu/~rpj0001/courses/ENGR647/ClassNotes/LECT04.ppt
4. http://www.authorstream.com/Presentation/aSGuest1253911319926unitantennaengineering/
L T P C
15EC602: COMPUTER COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To discuss the fundamental concepts of computer networking.

To explain the responsibilities of various layers of OSI reference model to improve the computer network
performance.
To describe some real network applications.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Apply and develop modularity of the layering concept in OSI and TCP / IP models and encapsulation
Analyze the protocol performance used for different purposes like error control, flow control, logical
addressing.
Analyze the causes and effects of congestion and suggest control measures
Apply Cryptographic services and mechanisms for network security
UNIT I PHYSICAL LAYER 9
Data Communications Networks Networks models OSI model Layers in OSI model TCP / IP protocol suite
Addressing Switching: Circuit switched networks Datagram Networks Virtual circuit networks Cable
networks for Data transmission: DSL Cable TV for Data transfer.
UNIT II DATA LINK LAYER 10
Data link control: Framing Flow and error control Protocols for Noiseless and Noisy Channels HDLC, Multiple
access: Random access Controlled access Wired LANS : Ethernet IEEE standards standard Ethernet Fast
Ethernet Gigabit Ethernet Wireless LANS Connecting LANS: Connecting devices Backbone networks
Virtual LANS Virtual circuit networks: Architecture and Layers of Frame Relay.
UNIT III NETWORK LAYER 9
Logical addressing: IPv4, IPv6 addresses Internet Protocol: Internetworking IPv4, IPv6 Address mapping
ARP, RARP, DHCP, ICMP, IGMP, Delivery Forwarding Routing Unicast, Multicast routing protocols Inside a
Router: Input Ports, Switching Fabric, Output Ports.
UNIT IV TRANSPORT LAYER 8
Duties of the Transport layer ProcesstoProcess delivery User Datagram Protocol (UDP) Transmission
Control Protocol (TCP) Congestion Control Quality of services (QoS) Techniques to improve QoS Shaping,
Scheduling.
UNIT V APPLICATION LAYER 9
Domain Name System (DNS) Email FTP WWW HTTP Multimedia Network Security: Cryptography
Symmetric key and Public Key algorithms Digital signature Management of Public keys Kerberos
Authentication Protocol.
63
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
th
1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, Data communication and Networking, 5 Edition, Tata McGrawHill, 2013.
th
2. Andrew S. Tannenbaum, Computer Networks, 5 Edition, Pearson Education, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Wayne Tomasi, Introduction to Data Communications and Networking, Pearson Education, 2004.
th
2. James .F. Kurose&Keith W.Rouss, Computer Networking: A Topdown Approach, 6 Edition, Pearson
Education, 2013.
th
3. Greg Tomshon, Guide to Networking Essentials, 7 Edition, Thomson India Learning, 2015.
th
4. William Stallings, Data and Computer Communication, 10 Edition, Pearson Education, 2015.
WEB REFERENCE:
1. http://www.mhhe.com/engcs/compsci/forouzan/
2. www.net.cs.umass.edu/kurose-ross-ppt-6e
L T P C
15EC603: VLSI DESIGN
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To discuss the delay models and interconnects used in CMOS circuits.

To learn the characteristics of CMOS power and clock systems.
To learn the concepts of CMOS data path design.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Analyze the characteristics of CMOS transistor.
Design combinational and sequential circuits using CMOS transistors.
Analyze the methods to test the CMOS circuits.
Synthesize the combinational and sequential circuits using Verilog HDL.
UNIT I CMOS TECHNOLOGY 9
VLSI design flow MOS transistor, Ideal IV characteristics, CV characteristics, Non ideal IV effects, DC
transfer characteristics CMOS technologies, Layout design Rules Stick Diagram CMOS process
enhancements Design rule checking and circuit extraction
UNIT II CIRCUIT CHARACTERIZATION AND SIMULATION 9
Delay estimation Logical effort and Transistor sizing Power dissipation Interconnect Design margin
Reliability Scaling SPICE tutorial Device models Device characterization Circuit characterization
UNIT III COMBINATIONAL AND SEQUENTIAL CIRCUIT DESIGN 9
Circuit families Low power logic design comparison of circuit families Sequencing static circuits circuit
design of latches and flip flops synchronizers
UNIT IV CMOS TESTING 9
Need for testing Testers, Text fixtures and test programs Logic verification Silicon debug principles
Manufacturing test Design for testability Boundary scan test.
UNIT V SYSTEM DESIGN USING VERILOG HDL 9
64
Basic concepts identifiers gate primitives gate delays operators timing controls procedural
assignments conditional statements Design of combinational and sequential circuits using four types of
modeling Test benches, FPGA.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
th
1. Weste and Harris: CMOS VLSI DESIGN 4 Edition, Pearson Education, 2011
2. Uyemura J.P: Introduction to VLSI circuits and systems, Wiley 2002.
3. Samir Palnitkar Verilog HDL a guide to digital design and Synthesis, Sun Micro systems inc, 2003
REFERENCE BOOKS:
rd
1. D.A Pucknell&K.Eshraghian, Basic VLSI Design, 3 Edition, PHI, 2003
2. Wayne Wolf, Modern VLSI design, Pearson Education, 2003
3. M.J.S.Smith, Application specific integrated circuits, Pearson Education, 1997
4. Ciletti, Advanced Digital Design with the Verilog HDL, Prentice Hall of India, 2003
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.ustudy.in
2. www.rulabinsky.com
L T P C
15EC651: COMPUTER COMMUNICATION NETWORKS LABORATORY
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To simulate different protocols belonging to different layers using LAN Trainers.

To conduct experiments on different topologies, ARQ schemes, medium access mechanisms and
encryption techniques.
To configure gateways to connect different sub networks / networks.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Demonstrate and visualize the protocols of physical, datalink, network and transport layer using LAN
Trainer.
Analyze the effect of parameters like inter packet delay, window size, packet size, time out, token
holding time in MAC and LLC protocols using LAN Trainer.
Build a network application using socket programming concepts, practice subnetting, simulate routing
protocols and apply encryption and decryption.
1. Serial and Parallel Communication between PCs.

2. Comparison of Bus and Star Topologies using CSMA/CD Protocol.
3. Performance Analysis of MAC ALOHA / CSMA / CSMA/CD Protocols.
4. Wireless LAN protocols To create scenario and study the performance of network with CSMA / CA
protocol and compare with CSMA/CD protocols.
5. Implementation and study of stop and wait protocol / GobackN and selective repeat protocols.
6. Implementation of Distance Vector routing algorithm.
7. Implementation of Link State routing algorithm.
8. Implementation of Data encryption and decryption.
9. Transfer of files from PC to PC using Windows / UNIX socket processing.
65
10. Sub netting and Configuring a Gateway
11. Mini Project
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
L T P C
15EC652: VLSI DESIGN LABORATORY
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To simulate and synthesize the combinational and sequential circuits in Behavioral, Structural and Data flow
Modeling.
To design and Simulate the DC and Transient Characteristics of Digital and Analog Circuits in transistor
level.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Implement the combinational and sequential circuits in FPGA.
Analyze the performance parameters of the digital circuit design.
Analyze the characteristics of Current source, Current Mirrors and Differential Amplifier.
Create and analyze the characteristics of Layout in Digital Circuits
1. Design and Implementation of 8 bit adders and 4 bit multipliers.

2. Design and Implementation address decoders, multiplexers, and comparators.
3. Design and Implementation of Counters and Shift registers.
4. Design and Implementation PRBS generators and accumulators.
5. Design and Implementation of an 8 bit Simple processor.
6. Design and Implementation of IIR and FIR filters.
7. Schematic Entry and simulation of CMOS inverter, NAND, NOR and XOR gates and determine the Power.
8. Schematic Entry and simulation of MOS differential amplifier, Determination of gain, bandwidth, output
impedance and CMRR.
9. Schematic Entry and simulation of Current source and Current Mirror.
10. Layout of a simple CMOS inverter, parasitic extraction and simulation using lambda () based design rules.
11. Mini Project
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
15HS651: PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION SKILLS LABORATORY L T P C

(Common to ECE / MECH / IT/BT) 0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To enable the students of Engineering and Technology to attain effective professional communication
66
skills
To train the aspirants to get through interviews successfully
To make them successful corporates
To upgrade the language proficiency level of engineering students
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Attain effective communication skills

Enhance business communication
Acquire language proficiency
Face interviews
UNIT I VOCABULARY BUILDING 9
Synonyms & antonyms, grammar error spotting exercise listening exercise reading comprehension
exercises sequencing the jumbled sentences cloze test
UNIT II BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE 9
Report Writing: types of Reports- Project report report format, Preparation of a report based on the newspaper
article. Writing memos, notice, agenda and circular.
UNIT III GROUP DISCUSSION 9
Group Discussion-an introduction, Sample videos on GD and appraisal, Participation in Group Discussion-
Persuasive skills, Negotiating ability, team skills and leadership Quality.
UNIT IV INTERVIEW SKILLS AND SOFT SKILLS 9
Resume designing, Online Resume, Successful interview skills, mock interviews, and Motivation self-image
goal setting managing changes corporate etiquette, body language, and power dressing- time management
stress management, Career and life planning.
UNIT V THEATRE ART AND AN INTRODUCTION TO INTERNATIONAL 9

EXAMINATIONS
Master of Ceremony, Welcome Address, Role play activities, dramatics, An Introduction to International English
Language Testing System (IELTS) Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL), Cambridge Advanced
English(CAE) Graduate Record Examination (GRE) Civil Service (Language related)
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Berry, Thomas Elliott, Most Common Mistakes in English Usage, TMH Publication Company Limited,
2012.
nd
2. Thorpe,E and Heaton,S, Objective English 2 Edition, Pearson Education, 2007.
rd
3. Bhatnagar, R.P, English for Competitive Examination , 3 Edition, Macmillan, 2012.
4. Bhatnagar, R.P. NitinBhatnagar and Mamta, Communicative English for Engineers & Professionals,
Pearson Education, 2010.
5. Rizvi, Asharaf M, Effective Technical Communication, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited,
2007
L T P C
15EC701: OPTICAL AND MICROWAVE ENGINEERING
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To acquire knowledge on passive microwave components and their S - Parameters.
67
To determine optical fiber transmission link, fiber modes Configurations and structures.
To know the working of Microwave semiconductor devices.
To calculate different kinds of losses, signal distortion in optical wave guides
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Evaluate different kind of losses and other signal degradation factors.
Analyze the various optical source materials and LED structures
Design active and passive microwave components.
UNIT I OPTICS AND OPTICAL FIBERS 9
Ray theory transmission Total internal reflection Acceptance angle Numerical aperture Skew rays
Electromagnetic mode theory of optical propagation Step Index and Graded Index, Single Mode and Multi Mode
fibers Attenuation in a fiber Fiber bend Loss.
UNIT II OPTICAL SOURCES AND DETECTORS 9
Optical sources: Light Emitting Diodes LED structures surface and edge emitters, mono and hetero structures
internal quantum efficiency injection laser diode structures comparison of LED and ILD
Optical Detectors: PIN Photo detectors, Avalanche photo diodes, construction, characteristics and properties
Comparison of performance Photo detector noise Noise sources, Signal to Noise ratio Detector response time.
UNIT III MICROWAVE PASSIVE COMPONENTS 9
Microwave frequency range significance of microwave frequency range important properties & applications of
microwaves Microwave junctions Tee junctions Magic Tee Rat race Corners bends and twists
Directional couplers two hole directional couplers Ferrites Termination Gyrator Isolator Circulator
Attenuator Phase changer S Matrix for microwave components Cylindrical cavity resonators Filter design by
insertion loss method Butterworth and Chebyshev Filters.
UNIT IV MICROWAVE SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES 9
Microwave semiconductor devices operation, characteristics and application of BJTs and FETs Principles of
tunnel diodes Varactor and Step recovery diodes Transferred Electron Devices Gunn diode Avalanche
Transit time devices Reed diode, IMPATT and TRAPATT devices.
Parametric devices Principles of operation applications of parametric Amplifier Microwave monolithic
integrated circuit (MMIC) Materials and fabrication Techniques Design of active and passive microwave
components.
UNIT V MICROWAVE TUBES AND MEASUREMENTS 9
Microwave tubes High frequency limitations Principle of operation of Multi cavity Klystron, Reflex Klystron,
Traveling Wave Tube and Magnetron.
Microwave measurements power, wavelength, impedance, SWR, attenuation, Q and Phase shift measurements.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
th
1. Gerd Keiser, Optical Fiber Communication, McGraw Hill, 4 Edition, 2008.
rd
2. John M. Senior, Optical Fiber Communication, 3 Edition, Pearson Education, 2009.
3. Samuel Y Liao, Microwave Devices & Circuits, Prentice Hall of India, 2006.
4. Annapurna Das and Sisir K Das, Microwave Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill Inc., 2004.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
rd
1. J.Gower, Optical Communication System, 3 Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2001
th
2. D.M.Pozar, Microwave Engineering, 4 Edition, John Wiley & sons, Inc., 2011.
WEB REFERENCES:
68
1. www.thefoa.org/tech/ref/basic/nets.html
2. www.sandiego.edu/~ekim/e194rfs01/rfamp.pdf
3. home.sandiego.edu/~ekim/photodiode/pdtech.html
L T P C
15EC702: EMBEDDED PROCESSORS AND APPLICATIONS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand embedded systems and its importance.

To gain knowledge in Embedded Processors architecture and Programming.
To develop Wireless and RTOS applications using ARM.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Analyze the functions of the components in Embedded Systems.
Apply TIVA based processors in Embedded System Design.
Develop Wireless and RTOS based Embedded Systems.
UNITI COMPONENTS OF EMBEDDED SYSTEMS 9
Embedded system Characteristics Embedded System Design Process Formalisms for system Design UML
Model Train Controller Hardware components Component Interfacing Embedded Software Components
Development and Debugging.
UNITII ARM PROCESSOR 9
ARM Architecture (Cortex M4) Design Philosophy ARM processor families ARM Instruction Set Thumb
Instruction Set ARM Programming Exception and Interrupt handling.
UNITIII TIVA LAUNCHPAD BASED EMBEDDED SYSTEMS 9
TIVA Launchpad Architecture Design and Development Process, GPIO interfacing, Serial Interface, I/O
Synchronization, ADC and Data acquisition, Interrupts
UNITIV WIRELESS AND INTERNET OF THINGS 9 SS
Internet of Things Wireless communication modules for Embedded Systems RF, Bluetooth, Zigbee, Wifi CC3x
SimpleLink Architecture Remote embedded systems control
UNITV EMBEDDED OPERATING SYSTEM 9
Embedded OS Tasks and Processes Context Switching Scheduling policies Inter Process Communication
Evaluating operating system performance Power optimization strategies for processes FOSS Tools for embedded
system development.
TOTAL: 45PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
nd
1. Wayne Wolf, Computers as Components - Principles of Embedded Computer System Design, 2 Edition,
Morgan Kaufmann Publisher, 2008.
2. Andrew Sloss, Dominic Symes, and Chris Wright, "ARM System Developer's Guide Designing and
Optimizing System", Elsevier India Private Limited, 2009.
3. AgusKurniawan, TI ARM Cortex-M LaunchPad Programming by Example, PE Press Computers, 2014
REFERENCE BOOKS:
69
1. James A. Langbridge, Professional Embedded ARM Development, Wrox, 2013.
2. Frank Vahid and Tony Givargis, Embedded System Design: A Unified Hardware/Software Introduction,
Wiley, 2006.
3. K.V.K.K.Prasad, Embedded Real-Time Systems: Concepts, Design & Programming, Dreamtech press,
2005.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://esd.cs.ucr.edu/
2. http://infocenter.arm.com
3. http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/39582C.pdf
4. https://www.micrium.com
5. http://www.ti.com.cn/cn/lit/ug/swru375b/swru375b.pdf
L T P C
15EC751: OPTICAL AND MICROWAVE LABORATORY
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To develop skill for using various microwave passive components and active devices.
To apply semiconductor theory to understand characteristics of photo diode and LED.
To compare analog and digital optical link along with losses associated on them.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Design RF circuit using passive microwave components for given specifications.
Design and test optical link with minimum loss.
Perform microwave measurements
MICROWAVE EXPERIMENTS:
1. Mode characteristics of Reflex Klystron.
2. Characteristics of Gunn Diode.
3. VSWR, Frequency and Wave Length Measurement of microwave signal within waveguide.
4. Measurement of Directivity and Coupling Coefficient of directional Coupler.
5. S parameter measurement of Isolator and Circulator.
6. S matrix Characterization of EPlane T, HPlane T and Magic T.
7. Antenna Gain Measurement
OPTICAL EXPERIMENTS:
1. DC characteristics of LED and PIN Photo Diode.
2. Measurement of Connector and Bending Losses.
3. Study of Fiber Optic Analog and Digital Link.
4. Numerical Aperture Determination for Fibers
5. Attenuation Measurement in Fibers
6. Mini Project
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
70
L T P C
15EC752: EMBEDDED SYSTEMS LABORATORY
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To develop skills to work with various modules in Embedded processors

To implement wireless Embedded Systems
To implement multitasking in RTOS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students will be able to

Interface Embedded Processors with I/O devices
Design an embedded system using TIVA Launchpad
Design ARM based wireless Embedded systems RTOS Applications
Interfacing LEDs and Switches with ARM Processor.

Interface 7Segment display & LCD Interface with ARM Processor.
Interface sensors with TIVA Launchpad using inbuilt ADC.
Establish communication using UART in TIVA Launchpad.
Programming timers in TIVA Launchpad
PWM Programming in TIVA Launchpad
Interrupt handling using TIVA Launchpad.
Internet of Things based device monitoring using CC3x
Internet of Things based device control using CC3x
Multi-tasking in ARM using RTOS
Mini Project.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://infocenter.arm.com
2. http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/39582C.pdf
3. https://www.micrium.com
4. http://goo.gl/UWpSho
5. http://www.ti.com/product/CC3100
6. http://www.ti.com.cn/cn/lit/ug/swru375b/swru375b.pdf
L T P C
15ECC01: CONTROL SYSTEMS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To learn transfer function modeling of electrical and mechanical systems.
71
To perform time domain, frequency domain and stability analysis.
To design the compensators.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Develop mathematical models of electrical and mechanical systems
Estimate the time domain and frequency domain specifications
Analyze the performance and stability of system through time domain and frequency domain approach.
Design the lag and lead compensators for desired system performance
PRE REQUISITES:
Linear systems, Laplace transform, basic circuit theory
UNIT I SYSTEM MODELLING AND REPRESENTATION 9
System concepts Classifications of control system Transfer function Modeling of Electrical systems,
Mechanical systems (Translational & Rotational systems) AC and DC Servomotors Electrical Analogy of
Mechanical Systems Block diagram reduction techniques Signal flow graphs Mason gain formula.
UNIT II TIME RESPONSE ANALYSIS 9
Standard test signals Time response of Firstorder system for different input Signals Time response of
Secondorder systems for step input signal Time domain specifications Steady state error constants:
Position, Velocity and Acceleration error constants Generalized error series Transfer function model and
characteristics of P, PI, PD and PID controllers.
UNIT III STABILITY ANALYSIS 9
Characteristics equation Concepts of Stability Location of roots in Splane for stability RouthHurwitz
Stability criterion Necessary and sufficient conditions for stability Root locus concept Rules for construction
of root loci Root locus plot for stability analysis.
UNIT IV FREQUENCY RESPONSE ANALYSIS 10
Frequency domain specifications Peak resonance, Resonant frequency, Bandwidth and Cutoff rate
Correlation between time and frequency responses for second order systems Gain margin and phase margin
Bode plot method Polar plot method Stability analysis using Gain and Phase margin Nyquist plot method.
UNIT V COMPENSATOR DESIGN & STATE VARIABLE MODEL 8
Compensators: Performance criteria Lag and Lead compensators networks Design of Lag and Lead
compensators using Bode plot Concepts of state, state variable, state model State models for simple
electrical and mechanical systems Phase variable model form transfer function.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
th
1. Nagrath.J and Gopal.M, Control System Engineering, 5 Edition, New Age International Publishers,
2007.
th
2. Ogata K, Modern Control Engineering, 5 Edition, Prentice Hall, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
th
1. Gopal.M, Digital Control and State Variable Methods, 4 Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.
th
2. Palani.S,Control System Engineering, 4 Edition , McGrawHill Education Pvt Ltd , 2012.
th
3. Richard C. Dorf& Robert H. Bishop, Modern Control Systems, 12 Edition, Pearson Education, 2011.
nd
4. Schaums Outline Series, Feedback and Control Systems, 2 Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2011.
5. DhaneshN.Manik, Control Systems, Cengage Learning, 2012.
th
6. Benjamin C Kuo, Automatic Control Systems, 9 Edition, John wiley& sons, inc., 2009.
WEB REFERENCES:
72
1. nptel.ac.in/courses/108103008/25
2. engineering.stanford.edu/sites/default/files/downloads/tsorlusvc.pdf
3. home.hit.no/~hansha/documents/control/theory/stability_analysis.pdf
L T P C
15ECC02: COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE AND ORGANIZATION
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the organization and operation of a digital computer.

To design algorithms for the Arithmetic Functions with Fixed and Floating Point Numbers
To create Control Units for the system in soft and hard programming.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Design algorithms required for efficient data path and control design.
Create an efficient memory and I/O organization.
Control the system using hard and soft wires.
PRE REQUISITES:
Boolean Algebra, Digital Electronics, Microprocessors, Semiconductor Memory
UNIT I COMPUTING ELEMENTS & DATA REPRESENTATION 9
Nature of Computing Elements of Computers, Limitations of Computers, System Design Gate Level, Register
Level and Processor Level Components & Design CPU Organization, Data Representation, Fixed Point Numbers,
Floating Point Numbers, Instruction Formats, Instruction Types, Addressing Modes.
UNIT II DATA PATH DESIGN 9
Fixed Point Arithmetic Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication and Division Combinational and Sequential ALUs
Robertson algorithm, Booths algorithm, Nonrestoring division algorithm Floating Point Arithmetic, Pipeline
Processing, Pipeline Design, Modified Booths Algorithm
UNIT III CONTROL DESIGN 9
Hardwired Control Classical Method, Onehot method Encoding Methods Microprogrammed Control
Multiplier Control Unit CPU Control Unit Pipeline Control Instruction Pipelines Pipeline Performance
Superscalar Processing and Nano Programming.
UNIT IV MEMORY & I/O ORGANIZATION 9
Multilevel memories Cache & Virtual Memory Memory Allocation Direct Associative Mapping Set Associative
mapping.
2
Communication Interface: Onboard Communication Interfaces I C, SPI, UART 1wire interface, Parallel Interface
External Communication Interfaces RS232C & RS485, USB, Firewire, Infrared, Bluetooth, WiFi, Zigbee
UNIT V SYSTEM SOFTWARE 9
System Components OS Services System Calls System Programs System Structure Virtual Machines
Process Concept Process Scheduling Operations on Processes Cooperating Processes Interprocess
Communication; CPU Scheduling Concepts Scheduling Criteria Algorithms Multi Processor Scheduling
Process Synchronization Critical Section Problem Synchronization Hardware Semaphores Classic Problems
of Synchronization.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
73
rd
1. John P.Hayes, Computer Architecture and Organisation, 3 Edition, Tata McGrawHill, 1998.
th
2. V.CarlHamacher, Zvonko Vranesic and Safwat G. Zaky, Computer Organisation, 5 Edition, McGrawHill
Inc, 1996.
3. Shibu K V, Introduction to Embedded Systems, McGraw Hill Education Private Limited, 2009.
th
4. Abraham Silberschatz, Peter Baer Galvin, Greg Gagne, Operating System Concepts, 6 Edition, Wiley
India, 2003
REFERENCE BOOKS:
rd
1. Morris Mano, Computer System Architecture, 3 Edition, Pearson Education, 2007.
2. BehroozParhami, Computer Architecture: From Microprocessors to Supercomputers, Oxford University
Press, 2005.
rd
3. P.PalChaudhuri, Computer Organization and Design, 3 Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2008.
4. G.Kane&J.Heinrich, MIPS RISC Architecture,2nd edition, Prentice Hall, 1991.
rd
5. Achyut S Godbole& Atul Kahate, Operating Systems, 3 edition, Tata McGrawHill Edition, 2010
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.ece.uic.edu/~dutt/courses/ece366/lectnotes.html
2. http://cs.nyu.edu/courses/fall99/V22.0436001/classnotes.html
3. http://www.eecs.harvard.edu/~dbrooks/cs146spring2004/
L T P C
15ECC03: TELEVISION AND VIDEO ENGINEERING
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the construction details of TV Receiver Picture Tubes and Television Camera Tubes
To familiarize principles of operation of Monochrome Television Transmitter and Receiver systems.
To describe various conventional and advanced color Television system operation.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Analyze the transmission of video signals
Work with the various television standards
Analyze the functioning of circuits related to broadcasting applications
PRE REQUISITES:
Audio and video Engineering fundamentals, Electromagnetic spectrum, Analog and digital modulation, Electronic
circuits
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF TELEVISION 9
Aspect ratio Image continuity Number of scanning lines Interlaced scanning Picture resolution Camera
tubes Image Orthicon Vidicon Plumbicon Silicon Diode Array Solidstate Image scanners
Monochrome picture tubes Composite video signal Video signal dimension Horizontal sync. Composition
Vertical sync.Composition Details of vertical pulse train Scanning sequence details Picture signal
transmission Positive and negative modulation VSB transmission Sound signal transmission Standard
channel bandwidth.
UNIT II MONOCHROME TELEVISION TRANSMITTER AND RECEIVER 9
TV transmitter TV signal Propagation Interference TV Transmission Antennas Monochrome TV receiver

RF tuner UHF, VHF tuner Digital tuning techniques AFT IF subsystems AGC Noise cancellation Video
and Sound intercarrier detection Vision IF subsystem DC reinsertion Video amplifier circuits Sync
operation Typical sync processing circuits Deflection current waveforms, Deflection oscillators Frame
74
deflection circuits Requirements Line deflection circuits EHT generation Receiver antennas.
UNIT III PRINCIPLES OF COLOUR TELEVISION 9
Compatibility Colour perception Three colour theory Luminance, Hue and saturation Colour television
cameras Values of luminance and colour difference signals Colour television display tubes Delta gun
Precision inline and Trinitron colour picture tubes Purity and convergence Purity and static and Dynamic
convergence adjustments Pincushion Correction techniques Automatic degaussing circuit Gray scale
tracking Colour signal transmission Bandwidth Modulation of colour difference signals Weighting factors
Formation of chrominance signal.
UNIT IV COLOUR TELEVISION SYSTEMS 9
NTSC colour TV systems SECAM system PAL colour TV systems Cancellation of phase errors PALD
Colour system PAL coder PAL Decoder receiver Chromo signal amplifier Separation of U and V signals
Colour burst separation Burst phase Discriminator ACC amplifier Reference Oscillator Ident and colour
killer circuits U and V demodulators Colour signal matrixing Sound in TV.
UNIT V ADVANCED TELEVISION SYSTEMS 9
Domestic Broadcast System Cable TV Cable Signal Sources Cable Signal Processing, Distribution &
Scrambling DVB Video Recording : Video Disc recording and playback Digital television :Transmission and
reception Projection television Flat panel display TV Digital TV LCD and Plasma screen TV LEDTV
3DTV EDTV ,IPTV Ultra HDTV Smart TV.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
rd
1. R.R.Gulati, Monochrome Television Practice, Principles, Technology and servicing, 3 Edition, New
Age International (P) Publishers, 2006.
nd
2. R.R.Gulati, Monochrome & Color Television, 2 Edition, New Age International Publisher, 2007.
3. Herve Benoit, Digital Television: Satellite, Cable, Terrestrial, IPTV, Mobile TV in the DVB Framework,
rd
3 Edition, Focal Press, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
nd
1. A.M Dhake, Television and Video Engineering, 2 Edition, TMH, 2003.
2. R.P.Bali, Color Television, Theory and Practice, Tata McGrawHill, 1994.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://electronics.howstuffworks.com/homeaudiovideochannel.htm
2. http://nifrasmail.weebly.com/uploads/2/1/6/7/2167487/analog_television.ppt
3. http://seminarprojects.net/q/principlesoftelevisionengineeringppt
L T P C
15ECC04: MEASUREMENTS & INSTRUMENTATION
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To build an understanding of the fundamental concepts of electronic measurements.

To elucidate signal generators and signal analyzers in measurements.
To explore the significance of digital instruments in measurements.
To identify the need of data acquisition systems and measurement techniques in optical domains.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Apply measurements concepts to instruments design
Analyze the analog and digital instruments to select appropriate instrument for the measurement
75
requirements.
Select the required signal generators and Analyzers for the design of the Measurement Process and
maintenance of equipment.
Construct an automated data acquisition system for computer controlled measurement in modern wire
and wireless domain.
PRE REQUISITES:
Basic electric circuit theory, Electronic circuits,Linear integrated circuits,Optical theory
UNIT I BASIC MEASUREMENT CONCEPTS 9
Measurement Systems Static and Dynamic characteristics Units and Standards of Measurements Error,
Accuracy and Precision Statistical Analysis Moving Coil, Moving Iron Meters Multimeters Bridge
Measurements Maxwell, Hay, Schering, Anderson and Wien bridge
UNIT II BASIC ELECTRONIC MEASUREMENTS 9
Electronic Multimeters Cathode Ray Oscilloscopes Block Schematic Applications Special Oscilloscopes,
Delayed Time Base Oscilloscopes, Analog and Digital Storage Oscilloscope, Sampling Oscilloscope Q meters
Vector meters RF voltage and power measurements True RMS meters.
UNIT III SIGNAL GENERATORS AND ANALYZERS 9
Function Generators RF signal generators Sweep generators Frequency Synthesizer Wave Analyzer
Harmonic Distortion Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer, Digital Spectrum Analyzer, Vector Network Analyzer Digital
RLC meters.
UNIT IV DIGITAL INSTRUMENTS 9
Comparison of Analog and Digital Techniques Digital Voltmeter Frequency Counters Measurement of
frequency and time interval Extension of frequency range Automation in Digital Instruments Automatic
Polarity Indication, Ranging and Zeroing, Fully Automatic Digital Instruments, Computer Controlled Test Systems,
Virtual Instruments.
UNIT V DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEMS AND FIBER OPTIC MEASUREMENTS 9
Elements of a Digital Data Acquisition System Interfacing of Transducers Multiplexing Data Loggers
Computer Controlled Instrumentation IEEE 488 bus Fiber Optic Measurements for Power and System Loss
Optical Time Domains Reflectometer.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Albert D.Helfrick and William D.Cooper, Modern Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement
nd
Techniques, 2 Edition, Pearson / Prentice Hall of India, 2009.
2. A.K. Sawhney and PuneetSawhney, A Course In Electrical And Electronic Measurements And
th
Instrumentation, 19 Edition, DhanpatRai Publications, 2012.
rd
3. H. S. Kalsi, Electronic instruments,3 Edition Tata McGrawHill Education, 2010
REFERENCE BOOKS:
nd
1. Joseph J.Carr, Elements of Electronics Instrumentation and Measurement, 2 Edition Pearson
Education, 2003.
nd
2. David A. Bell, Electronic Instrumentation and measurements, 2 Edition Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd,
2003.
rd
3. B.C. Nakra and K.K. Choudhry, Instrumentation, Measurement and Analysis, TMH, 3 Edition, 2010.
4. James W. Dally, William F. Riley, Kenneth G. McConnell, Instrumentation for Engineering
nd
Measurements, 2 Edition, John Wiley, 2003.
WEB REFERENCE:
1. http://www.edutalks.org
2. www.eolss.net/sample-chapters/c05/E6-39A-04-06.pdf
76
3. pioneer.netserv.chula.ac.th/~tarporn/2141375/HandOut/MMethod.pdf
L T P C
15ECC05: ENGINEERING ACOUSTICS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To get acquainted with the physics of acoustic wave propagation, human hearing system and acoustic
waves characteristics
To familiarize architectural acoustics, noise control, environmental standards
To be aware of the transducers used for acoustic signals
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Analyze the linear acoustic wave equation and evaluate the parameters related to acoustic wave propagation
Design architectures with specified acoustic levels.
Analyze the operation of loudspeakers and microphones.
PRE REQUISITES:
Physics of audio signals, transducer fundamentals, filter theory
UNIT I ACOUSTIC WAVES 9
Linear wave equation Sound in fluids Harmonic plane waves Energy density Acoustic intensity Specific
acoustic impedance Spherical waves Describer scales Reflection and Transmission Transmission from one
fluid to another normal and oblique incidence Method of images.
UNIT II RADIATION AND RECEPTION OF ACOUSTIC WAVES 9
Radiation from pulsating sphere Acoustic reciprocity Continuous line source Radiation impedance
Fundamental properties of transducers Absorption and attenuation of sound Absorption from viscosity complex
sound speed and absorption Classical absorption coefficient.
UNIT III HEARING MECHANISMS, PIPES, RESONATORS AND FILTERS 9
Properties of hearing Loudness level and loudness pitch and frequency Voice Noise, Signal detection, Hearing
and speech spectrum level and band level Combining band levels and tones Detecting signals in noise Detection
threshold.
Resonance in pipes Standing wave pattern Absorption of sound in pipes Long wavelength limit Helmholtz
resonator Acoustic impedance Reflection and transmission of waves in pipe Acoustic filters Low pass, high
pass and band pass filters.
UNIT IV ARCHITECTURAL ACOUSTICS 9
Sound in enclosure A simple model for the growth of sound in a room Reverberation time Sabine, sound
absorption materials Measurement of the acoustic output of sound sources in live rooms Acoustics factor in
architectural design.
Environmental Acoustics:
Weighted sound levels speech interference Highway noise Noise induced hearing loss Noise and architectural
design specification and measurement of some isolation design of portions Acoustic chambers
UNIT V TRANSDUCTION OF ACOUSTIC SIGNALS 9
Transducer as an electrical network Canonical equation for the electrostatic and moving coil transducers
Transmitters Moving coil loud speaker Loudspeaker cabinets Horn loud speaker, Receivers Condenser
Microphone Moving coil electrodynamics, Piezoelectric Calibration of receivers.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
77
TEXT BOOK:
th
1. Lawrence E.Kinsler, Austin, R.Frey, Alan B.Coppens, James V.Sanders, Fundamentals of Acoustics, 4
Edition, John Wiley, 2000.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Beranek&Mellow, Acoustics: Sound Fields and Transducers, Academic Press, 2012.

2. Frank J. Fahy, Foundations of Engineering Acoustics, Elsevier Academic press, 2005.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.acousticsengineering.com
2. http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Engineering_Acoustics
L T P C
15ECC06: OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING IN C++
2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand Object Oriented Programming Concepts and Programming in C++.

To apply the programming skills in C++ in creating software products.
To make use of Standard template libraries to implement data structures using C++
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Apply the concept of inheritance and polymorphism
Implement File handling operations in C++
Implement Templates and Exception Handling in C++
Create applications using Standard Template Libraries
PRE REQUISITES:
Computer fundamentals, memory, interfacing fundamentals
UNIT I OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING 9
Object Oriented Programming Concepts C++ Programming Constructs Structures and Classes Class Scope and
Accessing Class Members Member Functions and Classes Constructors Destructors Friend Function Static
Class Members Dynamic Memory Allocation Overloading: Function overloading and Operator Overloading.
UNIT II INHERITANCE AND POLYMORPHISM 9
Concept of inheritance. Derived class and based class Public, Protected and Private Inheritance Constructors and
Destructors in derived Classes Overriding Virtual functions Abstract Base Classes and Concrete Classes Virtual
Destructors this Pointer.
UNIT III STRINGS AND FILE HANDLING IN C++ 9
C++ String Library Streams classes, Stream Errors Disk File I/O with streams File Pointers error handling in file
I/O with member function overloading the extraction and insertion operators memory as a stream object command
line arguments, and printer output.
UNIT IV TEMPLATES AND EXCEPTIONS 9
Casting Class pointers and Member Functions Implicit Object Conversion Dynamic Binding Function templates,
Class templates Exception Handling.
UNIT V THE STANDARD TEMPLATE LIBRARY 9
78
Introduction Algorithms, Container Classes Sequence containers, iterators, specialized iterators, associative
containers, strong userdefined object, function objects Proxy Classes.
TOTAL: 45 HOURS
TEXT BOOKS:
th
1. Deitel and Deitel, C++, How to Program, 9 Edition, Pearson Education, 2013.
2. Steven Holzner, C++ Black Book: A Comprehensive Guide to C++ Mastery, Coriolis Group Books, 2000.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Bhushan Trivedi, Programming with ANSI C++, A StepByStep approach, Oxford University Press, 2010.
th
2. Robert Lafore, Object Oriented Programming In C++, 4 Edition, Techmedia Publication, 2002.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.studytonight.com/cpp/cpp-and-oops-concepts.php
2. http://www.cplusplus.com/
3. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/cplusplus/
4. http://www.codersource.net/codersource_cppprogramming.html
L T P C
15ECC07: STATISTICAL DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To expose different parametric methods for power spectrum estimation.

To equip with adaptive filtering techniques using LMS algorithm.
To be aware of multirate signal processing fundamentals.
To analyse speech signals.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Model systems to estimate power spectrum.
Implement linear predictor.
Design adaptive filters and to study the applications of adaptive filtering.
Process the speech signals.
Employ wavelet transforms for different applications.
PRE REQUISITES:
Probability, Discrete time signals and systems, Signal processing, DFT,FFT, Z transform, digital filters and
sampling rate conversion
UNIT I PARAMETRIC METHODS FOR POWER SPECTRUM ESTIMATION 9
Discrete random process Autocorrelation and Autocovariance properties Relationship between the auto
correlation and the model parameters White noise, Power Spectral Density ARMA, AR and MA Model
parameters Spectrum estimation.
UNIT II LINEAR ESTIMATION AND PREDICTION 9
Forward and Backward linear prediction Filtering FIR Wiener filter Filtering and linear prediction, Non
causal and causal IIR Wiener filters Burg method.
UNIT III ADAPTIVE SIGNAL PROCESSING 9
FIR adaptive filters Steepest descent adaptive filter LMS algorithm Convergence of LMS algorithms
79
Application: Noise cancellation Channel equalization Adaptive recursive filters Recursive least squares.
UNIT IV SPEECH SIGNAL PROCESSING 9
Digital models for speech signal Mechanism of speech production Model for vocal tract, radiation and
excitation Complete model Pitch period estimation using autocorrelation function Linear predictive Coding
Autocorrelation method Durbin recursive solution.
UNIT V ADVANCED TRANSFORM TECHNIQUES 9
Short Time Fourier Transform The Gabor Transform Discrete Wavelet Transform Perfect Reconstruction
Filter Banks and wavelets Recursive multiresolution decomposition Haar Wavelet 1 D and 2 D
decomposition
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
1. Monson H.Hayes, Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modeling, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd, 2008.
2. Raghuveer. M. Rao, AjitS.Bopardikar, Wavelet Transforms, Introduction to Theory and applications,
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. L.R.Rabiner and R.W.Schafer, Digital Processing of Speech Signals, Pearson Education, 2009.
2. Roberto Crist, Modern Digital Signal Processing, Thomson Brooks/Cole, 2004.
rd
3. K.P. Soman, N. G. Resmi and K.I. Ramachandran, Insight into Wavelets: From Theory to Practice, 3
Edition, PHI Learning, 2010.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://ee.lamar.edu/gleb/adsp/Lecture%2009%20%20Parametric%20SE.pdf
2. http://www.dspalgorithms.com/aspt/asptnode29.html
L T P C
15ECC08: WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To become skilled at fundamentals of mobile and wireless communication technologies and its
applications
To create the student to work on the transceivers for wireless channels.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Characterize interference between mobiles and base stations
Apply the knowledge in understanding the allocation of the limited wireless spectrum by government
regulatory agencies.
Predict the received signal through the multipath channel
Analyze and evaluate receiver and transmitter diversity techniques
PRE REQUISITES:
Matrices, Trigonometry, Random process, Analog and digital modulation techniques and digital signal processing
concepts
UNIT I SERVICES AND TECHNICAL CHALLENGES 9
Types of Services Requirements for the services Multipath propagation Spectrum allocation for various
types of services and Spectrum Limitations Noise and Interference limited systems Principles of Cellular
networks Multiple Access Schemes.
80
UNIT II TRAFFIC ENGINEERING AND WIRELESS CHANNELS 10
Trunked system Erlang B system capacity calculation Propagation Mechanisms (Qualitative treatment)
Propagation effects with mobile radio Fading Channel Classification Narrowband and Wideband models
Link calculations.
UNIT III WIRELESS TRANSCEIVERS 9
Structure of a wireless communication link Modulation and demodulation Quadrature Phase Shift Keying,
/4Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying OffsetQuadrature Phase Shift Keying Binary Frequency
Shift Keying, Minimum Shift Keying, Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying Power spectrum and Error performance in
fading channels.
UNIT IV SIGNAL PROCESSING IN WIRELESS SYSTEMS 8
Principle of Diversity Macrodiversity Microdiversity Signal Combining Techniques Transmit diversity

Equalisers Linear and Decision Feedback equalisers Wireless Channel coding and Speech coding
techniques
UNIT V ADVANCED TRANSCEIVER SCHEMES 9
Spread Spectrum Systems Principle, Power control, Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing Cyclic Prefix
Transceiver implementation Second Generation (GSM, IS95) Third Generation Wireless Networks and
Standards (CDMA 2000).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Rappaport. T.S., Wireless communications, Pearson Education, 2010

2. Andreas.F. Molisch, Wireless Communications, John Wiley, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
rd
1. Gordon L. Stuber, Principles of Mobile Communication, 3 Edition, Springer International Ltd., 2011.
2. Andrea Goldsmith, Wireless Communications, Cambridge University Press, 2005.
3. Simon Haykin& Michael Moher, Modern Wireless Communications, Pearson Education, 2004.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.cwins.wpi.edu/publications/pown/chapter_4.pdf
2. www.ijicic.org/ijicic-11-07072.pdf
3. www.ijeat.org/attachments/File/v3i5/E3206063514.pdf
L T P C
15ECC09: NETWORK ANALYSIS AND SYNTHESIS
3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To represent the network using different structures

To analyze the electrical network in S-domain
To synthesize an electrical network from the given impedance/admittance function.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Analyze the functions of various electric networks
Synthesize the network for the given specification.
Design filter, attenuator and equalizer for the particular applications.
PRE REQUISITES:
81
linear system theory, both continuous and discrete, knowledge to solve problems in S-domain and Z-domain
UNIT I NETWORK REPRESENTATION 10
Development of circuit concept Network elements Conventions for describing networks Dot conventions
for coupled circuits Network equations Topological description of networks Graph of a Network,
definitions, tree, co-tree, link, basic loop and basic cut set, Incidence matrix, cut set matrix, Tie set matrix Two
port networks: T & Representation, Ladder and Lattice networks Parameters (Z, Y, h, ABCD)
Interconnection of two ports.
UNIT II ANALYSIS OF NETWORKS IN 'S' DOMAIN 9
Network functions Concept of Complex frequency Transform Impedances Network functions of one port and
two port networks Concept of poles and zeros Network analysis using Laplace transformation Properties
of driving point and transfer functions Time response and stability from pole zero plot.
UNIT III ELEMENTS OF NETWORK SYNTHESIS 9
Network realizability Hurwitz Polynomials Positive real functions Properties of RC- RL & LC networks
Foster and Cauer forms of realization Transmission zeroes Synthesis of transfer functions.
UNIT IV PASSIVE FILTER DESIGN 9
The Neper The Decibel Characteristic impedance of Symmetrical Networks Current and voltage ratios
Propagation constant Image impedance Characteristic impedance variation vs frequency in stop and pass
band of filters Types of frequency selective filters, Constant k filters, m derived filters Composite filters
UNIT V ATTENUATORS AND EQUALIZERS 8
Attenuators T, , Lattice and Bridged T attenuators Equalizers Inverse Networks Series equalizers,
Shunt Equalizers, Constant Resistance equalizers Applications.
TUTORIAL:15 PERIODSTOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
nd
1. Franklin F. Kuo, Network Analysis and Synthesis, 2 edition. Wiley student edition, 2006
rd
2. UmeshSinha, Network Analysis and Synthesis, 3 edition, SatyaPrakashan, 2012
rd
3. Vanvalkenburg, Network Analysis", Pearson education, 3 Edition, 2006.
nd
4. John D.Ryder, "Networks, lines and fields", 2 Edition ,Prentice Hall of India, 2006
REFERENCE BOOKS:
rd
1. Vasudev K. Aartre, "Network Theory and Filter Design", 3 Edition, New Age International (P) Ltd.,
2014.
2. Lawrence P. Huelsman, "Active and Passive Analog Filter Design", McGraw Hill, 1993
th
3. A.Sudhakar, ShyammohanS.Palli, Circuits and Networks, - Analysis and Synthesis, 5 Edition,
Mcgraw Hill, 2015.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www-control.eng.cam.ac.uk/~mcs/Japan_mtns_06.pdf
2. http://www.freevideolectures.com Electrical Engineering IIT Kharagpur
L T P C
15ECC10: NUMERICAL METHODS FOR ELECTRO MAGNETIC FIELDS
3 2 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To become acquainted with important topics in computational electromagnetics, including finite difference,
finite element, and integral equation methods.
To formulate and solve practical engineering problems in electromagnetics using the numerical methods
presented.
82
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Apply the numerical methods for various EM problems
Analyze the solution of em problem using different numerical methods
PRE REQUISITES:
Exposure to numerical methods, partial differential equations, some knowledge of programming (e.g., MATLAB, C,
C++), Electromagnetics, Linear Circuit Analysis
UNIT I SOLVING EM PROBLEMS USING NUMERICAL METHODS 9
Review of Electromagnetic Theory Classification of EM Problems Analytical solution methods for EM problems
Limitations of classical methods Application of Numerical methods in solving EM problems
UNIT II MOMENT METHODS 9
Integral Equations Connection Between Differential and Integral Equations Greens Functions for Free Space,
For Domain with Conducting Boundaries Applications Scattering Problems Scattering by Conducting Cylinder,
Scattering by an Arbitrary Array of Parallel Wires, EM Absorption in the Human Body.
UNIT III FINITE DIFFERENCE METHODS 9
Accuracy and Stability of FD Solutions Practical Applications Guided Structures Transmission Lines,
Waveguides Wave Scattering analysis using FDTD Yees Finite Difference Algorithm, Leap frog algorithm
Accuracy and Stability, Lattice Truncation Conditions, Initial Fields Programming Aspects, Absorbing Boundary
Conditions for FDTD, Numerical Integration for discrete data Eulers Rule, Trapezoidal Rule, Simpsons rule,
Newton Cotes Rules, Gaussian Rules Multiple Integration
UNIT IV FINITE ELEMENT METHOD 9
Typical finite elements Solution of Laplaces Equation Solution of Poisson Equation Solution of Wave Equation
Automatic Mesh Generation Rectangular Domains, Arbitrary Domains Definition of Blocks, Subdivision of Each
Block, Connection of Individual Blocks, Higher Order Elements Pascal Triangle, Local Coordinates, Shape
Functions, Fundamental Matrices.
UNIT V TRANSMISSION-LINE-MATRIX METHOD 9
Transmission-line Equations, Solution of Diffusion Equation, Solution of Wave Equations, Inhomogeneous and Lossy
Media in TLMGeneral Two-Dimensional Shunt NodeScattering MatrixRepresentation of Lossy Boundaries, Three-
Dimensional TLM Mesh, Application of TLM modeling for CRLH Metamaterials.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
rd
1. Matthew N.O. Sadiku, Numerical Techniques in Electromagnetics with MATLAB, 3 Edition, CRC Press,
2009.
2. BharathiBhat, StriplineLike Transmission Lines for Microwave Integrated Circuits, New Age International,
2003.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Tatsuo Itoh, Numerical Techniques for Microwave and MillimeterWave Passive Structures, Wiley, 1989
2. David B. Davidson, Computational Electromagnetics for RF and Microwave Engineering, Cambridge, 2005.
rd
3. Silvester and Ferrari, Finite Elements for Electrical Engineers, 3 Edition, Cambridge, 1996.
4. JianMing Jin, Theory and Computation of Electromagnetic Fields, IEEE Press, 2010.
5. Christophe Caloz and Tatsuo Itoh, Electromagnetic Metamaterials: Transmission Line Theory and
Microwave Applications, Wiley-IEEE Press, 2005.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://matematicas.uc3m.es/dptodocs/colloquiumcarlosiii.pdf
2. www.pp.bme.hu/ee/article/viewFile/4666/3771
83
3. www.ie.itcr.ac.cr/acotoc/Maestria_en...de...II/.../chapter%2015.pdf
L T P C
15ECC11: ADVANCED COMPUTER PROGRAMMING
3 0 2 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To learn concepts of advanced programming in C

To learn advanced OOP concepts
To learn the advanced data structures and Linux Programming
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Develop modular C programs using pointers and preprocessors

Develop advanced OOP in C++ and Java
Develop applications using Data Structures
Write a variety of applications using standard Linux system calls and library functions.
PRE REQUISITES:
Basic knowledge of C, OOPs, data structures, Linux fundamentals
UNIT I ADVANCED C CONCEPTS 9
Preprocessor Directives Operators Conditional Compilation Define, undef, line, error, pragma directives,
Command Line Arguments.
UNIT II ADVANCED POINTERS IN C LANGUAGE 9
Arrays with negative indexes Pointers to Pointers Using const in pointer declarations Void pointers NULL
Pointers Expires Pointers Pointers to functions Reallocation Pointer to structures.
UNIT III ADVANCED OOP CONCEPTS 9
Object class Reflection Interfaces Object cloning Inner classes Proxies Generic classes Generic
methods Generic code and virtual machine Inheritance and generics Reflection and generics Exceptions
Exception hierarchy Stack Trace Elements Assertions Logging.
UNIT IV ADVANCED DATA STRUCTURE 9
Standard Containers Vector, List, Map and Set, Stack and Queue Standard Algorithms Sorting, Copying and
Replacing Algorithms, Searching and Traversing Algorithms, Set Permutation and Heap Algorithms Standard
Function objects and Adaptors.
UNIT V LINUX KERNEL PROGRAMMING 9
Programming under Linux Files Signals Timers Process Threads Resource Usage Inter Process
Communication Synchronization Mechanisms Sockets Devices.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
nd
1. B.W.Kernighan, D.M.Ritchie, The C Programming Language, 2 Edition, Prentice Hall, 2015.
nd
2. Timothy Budd, Understanding Objectoriented programming with Java, 2 Edition, Pearson Education,
2000.
rd
3. Michael Beck, Linux Kernel Programming, 3 Edition, AddisonWesley Professional, 2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
th
1. Yashavant P. Kanetkar, Understanding Pointers in C, 4 Edition, BPB Publication,2009
2. Daoqi Yang, C++ and ObjectOriented Numeric Computing for Scientists and Engineers, Springer,2001
84
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/cprogramming/
2. http://www.cprogramming.com/tutorial/ctutorial.html
3. https://homes.cs.washington.edu/~djg/2011sp/lec23_6up.pdf
4. https://sites.google.com/site/linuxlabjntu09/solutions
5. http://www.tldp.org/LDP/lkmpg/2.6/lkmpg.pdf
L T P C
15ECC12: SPEECH SIGNAL PROCESSING
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To analyze the mechanics of speech

To determine the time and frequency domain parameters of speech.
To analyze the speech using prediction.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Analyze time and frequency domain parameters of speech.

Apply prediction in speech analysis
Apply speech processing for ManMachine communication.
PRE REQUISITES:
Aerodynamic and acoustic mechanisms of sound production in speech, signal processing concepts, digital filter
theory
UNIT I MECHANICS OF SPEECH 9
Speech production mechanism Nature of Speech signal Discrete time modelling of Speech production
Representation of Speech signals Classification of Speech sounds Articulatory features, Auditory perception
Anatomical pathways from the ear to the perception of sound Peripheral auditory system.
UNIT II TIME DOMAIN METHODS FOR SPEECH PROCESSING 9
Time domain parameters of Speech signal Time dependent processing of speech Methods for extracting the
parameters Energy, Average Magnitude Zero crossing Rate Short Time Auto Correlation Function Pitch period
estimation using Auto Correlation Function.
UNIT III FREQUENCY DOMAIN METHOD FOR SPEECH PROCESSING 9
Short Time Fourier analysis Filter bank analysis Formant extraction Pitch Detection Analysis by Synthesis
Pitch synchronous spectrum Analysis Pitch synchronous estimation of the glottal wave Analysis synthesis
systems Phase vocoder Channel Vocoder.
UNIT IV LINEAR PREDICTIVE ANALYSIS OF SPEECH 9
Basic Principles of Linear Predictive Analysis The Auto correlation method The Covariance method Solution
of LPC equations Cholesky Decomposition solution Durbins Recursive solution Comparison of solutions LPC
Vocoder quantization considerations Voice Excited LPC Vocoders.
UNIT V SPEECH PROCESSING FOR MANMACHINE COMMUNICATION 9
Voice Response Systems Design Considerations Multiple outputs Digital Voice Response System Speech and
speaker Recognition Systems Isolated Digit Recognition System Large Vocabulary word Recognition System.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
th
1. L.R.Rabiner and R.W.Schaffer, Digital Processing of Speech signals, 4 Edition, Pearson Education,
85
2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ben Gold and Nelson Morgan, Speech and Audio Signal Processing, John Wiley and Sons Inc. , 2004.
2. Quatieri, Discretetime Speech Signal Processing, Prentice Hall, 2001.
nd
3. J.L.Flanagan, Speech analysis: Synthesis and Perception, 2 edition, 1972.
4. I.H.Witten, Principles of Computer Speech, Academic Press, 1982.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.isle.illinois.edu/~hasegawa/notes/
2. http://www.speech.cs.cmu.edu/
L T P C
15ECC13: ADVANCED ELECTRONIC SYSTEM DESIGN
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To design modern Power Supplies using SCR and SMPS technology.

To employ signal shielding & grounding techniques, High Speed A/D and D/A Converters and CAD for
fabrication of PCBs.
To understand the cognitive radio analog VLSI circuit operation.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Design SMPS and data acquisition system.
Design computer aided PCB layout for any circuit.
Analyze the operation of cognitive radio and analog VLSI circuits.
PRE REQUISITES:
Basic electronics & circuits and circuit theory, Digital and microprocessors, wireless communication, basic VLSI
design
UNIT I DESIGN OF POWER SUPPLIES 9
DC power supply design using transistors and SCRs Design of crowbar and foldback protection circuits Switched
mode power supplies Forward, flyback, buck and boost converters Design of transformers and control circuits for
SMPS UPS.
UNIT II DESIGN OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS 9
Introduction to technology of printed circuit boards (PCB) General lay out rules and parameters PCB design
rules for Digital, High Frequency, Analog, Power Electronics and Microwave circuits Computer Aided design of
PCBs.
UNIT III DESIGN OF DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEMS 9
Amplification of Low level signals Grounding, Shielding and Guarding techniques Dual slope, quad slope and
high speed A/D converters Microprocessors Compatible A/D converters Multiplying A/D converters and
Logarithmic A/D converters Sample and Hold Design of two and four wire transmitters.
UNIT IV COGNITIVE RADIO 9
Cognitive radio platforms and test beds public safety and cognitive radio network security Cognitive radio for
broadband wireless access in TV bands Antennas for cognitive radios System design and FPGA implementation
for cognitive wireless devices.
UNIT V DESIGN OF VLSI SYSTEM 9
86
DCT, FFT and filter architectures Transmitter back end and Receiver front end design Artificial cochlea design
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. B.Razavi, Principles of Data Conversion System Design, Wiley IEEE Press, 1994.
2. Walter C.Bosshart, Printed Circuit Boards Design and Technology, TMH, 2008
3. Alexander M. Wyglinski, MaziarNekovee and Y. Thomas Hou, Cognitive Radio Communications and
NetworksPrinciples and Practice, Elsevier, 2010.
4. Keshab K. Parhi, VLSI Digital Signal Processing Systems, Design and implementation , John Wiley &
Sons, 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
rd
1. Keith H.Billings, Switched Mode Supplies Handbook, 3 Edition, McGrawHill Publishing Co., 2011.
2. OtmarKigenstein, Switched Mode Power Supplies in Practice, John Wiley and Sons, 1989.
3. Muhammad H.Rashid, Power Electronics Circuits, Devices and Applications, Prentice Hall of India,
2009.
4. NihalKularatna, Electronic Circuit Design: From Concept to Implementation, CRC Press, 2008.
5. HrishikeshVenkataraman, GabrielMiroMuntean, Cognitive radio and its application for next generation
cellular and wireless networks, Springer, 2012.
6. Uwe MeyerBaese, Digital Signal Processing with Field Programmable Gate Arrays (Signals and
rd
Communication Technology), 3 Edition, Springer, 2007.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.ssc.pe.titech.ac.jp/materials/VLSICS03_shortcourse_matsu_homepage.pdf
2. http://www.smdp.iitkgp.ernet.in/PDF/TCAD/TKB.pdf
3. ftp://ftp.scv.si/vss/franc_stravs/SMPSosnove1.pdf
4. http://www.series.upatras.gr/userfiles/file/Courses/SeriesNA36_course1_moduleI_magenes.pdf
5. http://www.ursi.org/proceedings/procga11/ursi/DBC6.pdf.
L T P C
15ECC14: WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To identify different types of personal, local, wide, and metropolitan area wireless networks.
To explain the necessity of physical and wireless MAC layer alternatives and their mechanisms.
To describe the advancements in wireless networks.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Realize the Challenges in Wireless Networks.
Analyze different wireless networking standards.
Apply network protocol concepts associated with ad hoc and sensor networks, wireless MANs, LANs and
PANs.
PRE REQUISITES:
Internet concepts, LAN, multiple access techniques and mobile networks
UNIT I CHALLENGES IN WIRELESS NETWORKS 9
Medium Access Alternatives Fixed Assignment for Voice Oriented Networks Random Access for Data Oriented
Networks Handoff and Roaming Support Security and Privacy
87
UNIT II WIRELESS LANs 9
Wireless LANs IEEE 802.11b WLAN Architecture and Services Installation of WLAN Other IEEE 802.11
standards a,g,n, HIPERLAN, WiFi and WiMax standards.
UNIT III WIRELESS WANs 9
First Generation Analog Second Generation TDMA GSM GPRS Second Generation CDMA IS-95 Third
Generation Systems WCDMA & CDMA 2000.
UNIT IV ADHOC AND SENSOR NETWORKS 9
Characteristics of MANETs Tabledriven and Source initiated On Demand routing protocols, Hybrid protocols
Wireless Sensor networks Classification Routing protocols Sensor Network Architecture Data Dissemination
Data Gathering MAC Protocols for Sensor Networks Location Discovery and quality of a Sensor Network.
UNIT V ADVANCES IN WIRELESS NETWORKS 9
Bluetooth Zig Bee Ultra wide Band Radio communication Optical wireless Networks Software Defined Radio
Cognitive Radio WBAN.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. KavehPahlavan, Prashant Krishnamurthy, "Principles of Wireless Networks: A unified approach", Prentice

Hall, 2002.
nd
2. William Stallings, "Wireless Communications and Networks", 2 Edition, Pearson Education, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
th
1. Dharma PrakashQingAn Zeng &A grawal, Introduction to Wireless and Mobile Systems, 4 Edition,
Thomson India Edition, 2015.
2. Vijay. K. Garg, Wireless Communication and Networking, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2007.
rd
3. Clint Smith, P.E. & Daniel Collins, 3G Wireless Networks, 3 Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2014.
4. Gary. S. Rogers & John Edwards, An Introduction to Wireless Technology, Prentice Hall, 2003.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://williamstallings.com/Wireless/Wireless2e.html
2. http://www.isi.edu/nsnam/ns/tutorial/
L T P C
15ECC15: DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To analyze the mathematical transforms necessary for image processing and different image enhancement
techniques
To analyze image restoration procedures and image segmentation techniques.
To analyze the image compression procedures.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Simulate basic image processing algorithms
Develop algorithms for image enhancement and compression
Develop algorithms for image restoration and segmentation
PRE REQUISITES:
88
MATLAB, algebra and trigonometry, Fourier Transform and Complex Variables, Statistical Methods in Engineering,
digital filtering operations, channel coding fundamentals
UNIT I DIGITAL IMAGE FUNDAMENTALS 9
Elements of digital image processing systems Elements of visual perception, brightness, contrast, hue, saturation,
mach band effect Color image fundamentals RGB, HSI models, Image sampling, Quantization Two
dimensional mathematical preliminaries, 2D transforms DFT, DCT, KLT, DWT and SVD.
UNIT II IMAGE ENHANCEMENT 9
Spatial filtering Intensity Transformation Histogram equalization and specification techniques, Noise distributions,
Image Smoothing, Image sharpening, Median, Geometric mean, Harmonic mean Contraharmonic mean filters
Homomorphic filtering Color image enhancement.
UNIT III IMAGE RESTORATION 9
Model of the Image Degradation/Restoration Process Noise Models Restoration in the Presence of Noise Only
Spatial Filtering Periodic Noise Reduction by Frequency Domain Filtering Linear, PositionInvariant Degradations
Estimating the Degradation Function Inverse Filtering Minimum Mean Square Error (Wiener) Filtering
Constrained Least Squares Filtering Geometric Transformations.
UNIT IV IMAGE SEGMENTATION 9
Edge detection Edge linking via Hough transform Thresholding Region based segmentation Region growing
Region splitting and Merging Segmentation by morphological watersheds Dam construction Watershed
segmentation algorithm.
UNIT V IMAGE COMPRESSION 9
Need for data compression Huffman, Run Length Encoding, Arithmetic coding, Vector Quantization, Transform
coding JPEG standard, MPEG.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
rd
1. Rafael C. Gonzalez and Richard E. Woods, Digital Image Processing', 3 Edition, Prentice Hall, 2009.
2. Anil K. Jain, Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing, Pearson Education, 2003.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Kenneth R. Castleman, Digital Image Processing, Pearson, 2006.

2. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods and Steven Eddins, Digital Image Processing using MATLAB,
Pearson Education, Inc., 2004.
3. D. E. Dudgeon and RM. Mersereau, Multidimensional Digital Signal Processing, Prentice Hall Professional
Technical Reference, 1990.
th
4. William K. Pratt, , Digital Image Processing, 4 Edition, John Wiley, New York, 2007
rd
5. Milan SonkaetaI, Image Processing, Analysis and Machine Vision, 3 Edition, Vikas Publishing House,
2007.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.digitalimageprocessingplace.com
2. www.ou.edu/class/.../articles/CompressionMethods_Gif_Jpeg_PNG.html
L T P C
15ECC16: TELECOMMUNICATION SWITCHING SYSTEMS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
89
To introduce switching systems applied with the telecommunication systems
To derive mathematical models for the analysis of telecommunication traffic
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Apply Traffic theory to understand the characteristics of the telephone systems
Analyze the processes and performance of a digital telephone switching systems
Perform network synchronization and network management
PRE REQUISITES:
calculus, probability, computer systems, layered network models, multiplexing fundamentals
UNIT I EVOLUTION OF SWITCHING SYSTEMS 9
Functions of a Switching System Strowger Switching Components Step by Step Switching Design Parameters
100 Line Switching System 1000 Line Blocking Exchange Crossbar Switching Principle of Crossbar Switching
Crossbar Switch Configurations Crosspoint Technology Crossbar Exchange Organization Electronic
Switching Reed Electronic Systems Digital Switching Systems.
UNIT II DIGITAL SWITCHING 9
Switching Functions Space Division Switching Time Division Switching Twodimensional Switching STS
Switching, TST Switching, No. 4 ESS Toll Switch Digital CrossConnect Systems Digital Switching in an Analog
Environment Elements of SS7 signaling.
UNIT III NETWORK SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL AND MANAGEMENT 9
Timing Timing Recovery: PhaseLocked Loop, Clock Instability, Jitter Measurements, Systematic Jitter Timing
Inaccuracies Slips, Asynchronous Multiplexing Network Synchronization U.S. Network Synchronization
Network Control Network Management.
UNIT IV DIGITAL SUBSCRIBER ACCESS 9
ISDN ISDN Basic Rate Access Architecture, ISDN U Interface, ISDN D Channel Protocol High Data Rate Digital
Subscriber Loops Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line, VDSL Digital Loop Carrier Systems Universal Digital
Loop Carrier Systems, Integrated Digital Loop Carrier Systems, Next Generation Digital Loop Carrier Fiber in the
Loop Hybrid Fiber Coax Systems Voice band Modems Local Microwave Distribution Service Digital Satellite
Services.
UNIT V TELECOMMUNICATION TRAFFIC ANALYSIS 9
Traffic Characterization Arrival Distributions, Holding Time Distributions GoS LostCall Systems Queuing
Systems Network Blocking Probabilities EndtoEnd Blocking Probabilities, Overflow Traffic Delay Systems
Erlang B system Exponential service Times, Constant Service Times, Finite Queues, Tandem Queues.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
rd
1. J. Bellamy, Digital Telephony, 3 Edition, John Wiley, 2009.
2. JE Flood, Telecommunications Switching, Traffic and Networks, Pearson Education, 2007
3. Viswanathan. T., Telecommunication Switching System and Networks, PHI Ltd., 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. R.A.Thomson, Telephone switching Systems, Artech House Publishers, 2000.

th
2. W. Stalling, Data and Computer Communications, 8 Edition, Pearson, 2009.
3. T.N.Saadawi, M.H.Ammar, A.E.Hakeem, Fundamentals of Telecommunication Networks, Wiley
Interscience, 1994.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://ieteelan.ac.in/SolnQPJun2013/AE64.pdf
2. http://www.netlab.tkk.fi/opetus/s38120/k02/LecturesEn/120L21e.pdf
90
L T P C
15ECC17: RF ENGINEERING
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To analyze RF transistor amplifiers.

To acquire knowledge on Active RF components
To know working of RF Filters.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Design active and passive RF Components.
Utilize Smith Chart to perform impedance matching in advanced RF system.
Perform measurements using VNA.
PRE REQUISITES:
Knowledge in low frequency behavior of Active and passive components, Transmission lines.
UNIT I TWO PORT RF NETWORKS CIRCUIT REPRESENTATION 9
Importance of Radio frequency design Frequency Spectrum RF behavior of passive components wire,
resistor, capacitor and inductor, chip components and circuit board considerations Scattering matrix
Concept of N port scattering matrix representation S matrix formulation of two-port junction Properties of S
parameters Reciprocal and lossless networks Transmission matrix Applications of RF.
UNIT II RF FILTER DESIGN 9
Filter types and parameters Insertion loss Butterworth and Chebyshev filters Denormalization of standard
LPF design Filter Implementation Coupled filters.
UNIT III ACTIVE RF COMPONENTS 9
RF Diodes Schottky, PIN Diode, Varactor Diode, GUNN diode, IMPATT, TRAPATT, BARRITT, Tunnel diode
Construction, Functionality and frequency Response of BJT,JFET,MOSFET and HEMT.
UNIT IV RF TRANSISTOR AMPLIFIER DESIGN AND MATCHING NETWORKS 9
Amplifier power relation Stability considerations Gain considerations Noise figure Impedance matching
networks, frequency response T and matching networks Microstriplinematching networks
UNIT V RF MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENTS 9
Signal Generator Power meter Frequency Counters VNA VSA Noise Figure
Meter Coaxial Cable and Connectors.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Reinhold.Ludwig and PavelBretshko, RF Circuit Design, Pearson Education, Inc., 2006.

2. Joseph J. Carr, Practical Radio Frequency Test and Measurement, Newness, 2002.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
th
1. D.M.Pozar, Microwave Engineering., 4 Edition, John Wiley & sons, Inc., 2011.
2. M.M.Radmanesh, RF & Microwave Electronics Illustrated, Pearson Education, 2007.
nd
3. Robert E.Colin, Foundations for Microwave Engineering, 2 Edition McGraw Hill, 2001.
WEB REFERENCES:
91
1. http://www.radio-electronics.com/info/t_and_m/rf-microwave-power-meter/measurements.php
2. www.ti.com/lit/ml/slap127/slap127.pdf
L T P C
15ECC18: SENSORS AND ACTUATORS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To recognize different types of sensors and actuators for different environments.

To learn about the different measurements using sensors
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Analyze the Performance characteristics of sensors, Actuators and sensor networks
Apply suitable sensors and actuators for engineering applications
PRE REQUISITES:
Transducer theory, optical theory, electromagnetic field theory, microwave engineering fundamentals
UNIT I CLASSIFICATION AND PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS OF SENSORS 9
AND ACTUATORS
Classification of Sensors and Actuators - General Requirements for Interfacing - Units and Measures - Transfer
function - Impudence and matching - Range, Span, Resolution, Accuracy, Errors, Repeatability, Sensitivity and
analysis - Hysteresis , Nonlinearity and saturation - Frequency response, response time and bandwidth -
Calibration - Excitation - Deadband - Reliability.
UNIT II TEMPERATURE SENSORS AND THERMAL ACTUATORS 9
Thermo resistive Sensors: Themistors, Resistance temperature sensors - Silicon resistive sensors - Thermoelectric
Sensors - PN Junction Temperature Sensors - Optical and Acoustical Sensors - Thermo mechanical sensors and
Actators.
UNIT III OPTICAL SENSORS AND ACTUATORS 9
Optical Units and materials - Effects of Optical Radiation - Quantum-Based Optical Sensors - Photoelectric
Sensors - Coupled Charge (CCD) Sensors and Detectors - Thermal-Based Optical Sensors - Active Far Infrared
(AFIR) Sensors - Optical Actuators.
UNIT IV ELECTRIC, MAGNETIC, SENSORS AND ACTUATORS 9
The Electric Field: Capacitive Sensors and Actuators - Magnetic Fields: Inductive sensors and Hall effect sensors -
Magneto hydrodynamic (MHD) Sensors and Actuators - Magnetometers - magnetic Actuators - Voltage and
Current Sensors
UNIT V RADIATION SENSORS , MEMS AND SMART SENSORS 9
Radiation Sensors - Microwave Radiation - Antennas as Sensors and Actuators - MEMS Sensors and Actuators -
Smart Sensors and Actuators - Sensor Networks.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
1. Nathan Ida, Sensors, Actuators and their Interfaces, Scitech publishing, 2013.
2. Patranabis D, Sensor and Actuators, Prentice Hall of India (Pvt) Ltd. 2005.
REFERENCE BOOK:
nd
1. Clarence W. de Silva, Sensors and Actuators: Engineering System Instrumentation, 2 Edition, CRC
Press, 2015
2. Ernest O. Doeblin, Measurement system, Application and design, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company
Ltd., Fiftieth Edition, 2004
92
3. Bradley D.A., and Dawson, Burd and Loader, Mechatronics, Thomson Press India Ltd., 2004
4. RenganathanS,Transducer Engineering, Allied Publishers (P) Ltd., 2003.
5. Bolton W., Mechatronics, Thomson Press, 2003.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.endnote.com/downloads/style/sensors-and-actuators
2. www.iav.com/en/engineering/.../sensor-and-actuator-systems
3. www.biophysics.org/2015naiwat/
L T P C
15ECC19: PARALLEL AND DISTRIBUTED PROCESSING
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To design and analyze parallel and distributed processing

To equip students with Debugging techniques of a parallel programming
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Analyze parallel and distributed architectures and their functions for problem solving
Apply parallel and distributed programming skills to measure the performance.
PRE REQUISITES:
Introductory computer architecture and algorithms, Data Structures, Linear Algebra and Numerical Methods.
UNIT I PARALLEL ARCHITECTURES 9
Need and definition of parallel processing shared memory multiprocessing Distributed memory using parallelism
tools and languages Parallelism in sequential machines Multiprocessor architecture Pipelining, Array
processors.
UNIT II SHARED MEMORY PROGRAMMING AND THREAD BASED 9

IMPLEMENTATION
Shared Memory Programming and its general model Process model under UNIX Thread management, Example
with threads Attributes of Threads Mutual Exclusion with threads and Thread implementation.
UNIT III DEBUGGING PARALLEL PROGRAMS AND OTHER PARALLELISM 9

PARADIGMS
Debugging Techniques Debugging Message passing parallel programs and shared memory parallel programs
Dataflow computing Systolic architectures Functional and logic paradigms Distributed shared memory.
UNIT IV DISTRIBUTED COMPUTING MESSAGE PASSING AND RPC MODEL 9
Messagepassing model, General model, programming model Parallel Virtual machine Remote procedure calls
(RPC) Parameter passing JAVA Remote Method Invocation Distributed computing environment(DCE),
Developing Applications in DCE.
UNIT V DISTRIBUTED DATABASES AND DISTRIBUTED OPERATING SYSTEMS 9
Objectives of distributed databases Distributed DBMS Architecture Distributed Database Design Query
Processing Transaction Management Distributed Concurrency Control Distributed DBMS Reliability, DDBMS
structure Need for Distributed operating systems, network operating systems Distributed OS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Harry F. Jordan and Gita Alaghband, Fundamentals of parallel processing, PHI, 2006.
93
2. M.Sasikumar, D.Shikhare and P. Ravi Prakash, Introduction to parallel processing, PHI, 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. V. Rajaraman and C. Siva Ram Murthy, Parallel computers: Architecture and programming, PHI, 2008.
2. Quinn, M.J., Designing Efficient Algorithms for Parallel Computers, McGraw Hill, 1995.
3. Culler, D.E., Parallel Computer Architecture, A Hardware Software approach, Harcourt Asia Pte. Ltd.,
1999.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.cs.iit.edu
2. http://www.cfdonline.com
L T P C
15ECC20: HIGH SPEED NETWORKS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To provide with an up-to-date survey of developments in High Speed Networks.

To be aware of techniques involved to support real-time traffic and congestion control.
To provide with different levels of quality of service (QoS) to different applications.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Analyze queuing models and do queuing analysis
Realize the inadequacy of conventional congestion control schemes in high speed architectures
Differentiate the architecture of Integrated and Differentiated Services
Describe the protocols for QoS support
PRE REQUISITES:
Principles of Data Communications Networks, gigabit networks; error and congestion control
UNIT I HIGH DATA RATE ARCHITECTURES 9
The Need for Speed and Quality of Service in computer Networks, Frame Relay Networks Asynchronous
transfer mode ATM Protocol Architecture, ATM logical Connection, ATM Cell ATM Service Categories AAL,
High Speed LANs: The Fast Ethernet, Emergence of HighSpeed LANs, Gigabit Ethernet, Fiber Channel.
UNIT II CONGESTION AND TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT 8
Queuing Analysis Queuing Models Single Server Queues Multiple Server Queues Effects of Congestion
Congestion Control Traffic Management Congestion Control in Packet Switching Networks Frame Relay
Congestion Control.
UNIT III TCP AND ATM CONGESTION CONTROL 10
TCP Congestion Control Retransmission Timer Management Exponential RTO backoff KARNs Algorithm
Window management Performance of TCP over ATM. Traffic and Congestion control in ATM Requirements
Attributes Traffic Management Frame work, Traffic Control ABR traffic Management ABR rate control, RM
cell formats, ABR Capacity allocations GFR traffic management.
UNIT IV INTEGRATED AND DIFFERENTIATED SERVICES 9
Integrated Services Architecture Approach, Components, Services Queuing Discipline, Fair Queuing,
Processor Sharing, BitRound Fair Queuing, Generalised Processor Sharing, Weighted Fair Queuing Random
Early Detection, Differentiated Services.
UNIT V PROTOCOLS FOR QoS SUPPORT 9
RSVP Goals & Characteristics, Data Flow, RSVP operations, Protocol Mechanisms Multiprotocol Label
94
Switching Operations, Label Stacking, Protocol details RTP Protocol Architecture, Data Transfer Protocol,
RTCP.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. William Stallings, High Speed Networks and Internet:Performance and quality of service, Prentice Hall,
nd
2 Edition, 2002.
nd
2. Jean Warland, PravinVaraiya, High Performance Communication Networks, Morgan Kaufmann, 2
Edition, 2000.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. IvanPepelnjak, Jim Guichard, Jeff Apcar, MPLS and VPN architectures, Cisco Press, 2000.
2. Abhijit S. Pandya, Ercan Sea, ATM Technology for Broad band Telecommunication Networks, CRC
Press, 1998.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://web.iiit.ac.in/~bezawada/CN/
2. http://uw714doc.sco.com/en/NET_tcpip/SetUpSubnetsRouters.html
L T P C
15ECC21: CDMA ENGINEERING
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To disseminate the characteristics of CDMA Link structure and Call processing techniques
To make known the design engineering of CDMA and their performance.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Understand the operation of CDMA link and call processing in mobile communication technologies.
Apply the concept of CDMA for applications in wireless communication.
Analyze the performance of CDMA based products or systems.
Evaluate CDMA based engineering problems.
PRE REQUISITES:
Basic knowledge of Probability, random variables, Digital modulation, cellular systems and radio technology,
Antenna
UNIT I CDMA CONCEPTS 9
Need for spread spectrum communication Spreading codes Direct sequence and Frequency hopping spread
spectrum communication system Spread spectrum performance DS CDMA RAKE receiver Power control
Soft handover Inter frequency handover Capacity Effects of loading, sectorization and voice activity.
UNIT II LINK STRUCTURE AND CALL PROCESSING 8
Asymmetric links Forward link Pilot channel Sync channel Paging channel Traffic channel Modulator
Reversing access channel Traffic channel Call processing states Initialization state Idle state Access state
Traffic channel state.
UNIT III CDMA LINK ANALYSIS 10
Forward Link analysis Reverse link analysis Reverse link rise Frequency reuse factor PN offset planning
Short PN sequence Co PN offset Adjacent PN offset.
95
UNIT IV CDMA PERFORMANCE AND TRAFFIC ENGINEERING 9
Channel supervision Power control parameters Search window sizes Field optimization Traffic intensity
Grade of service ErlangB Model and ErlangC Model Soft and hard blocking.
UNIT V NEXT GENERATION CDMA 9
Multirate design Spreading technique Advanced error control techniques Coherent detection Inter operability
in next generation CDMA Multicarrier CDMA Forward link Reverse link.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Samuel C Yang, CDMA RF System Engineering, Artech House, 1998.

2. John B..Groe and Lawrence E. Larson, CDMA Mobile Radio Design, Artech house, 2001.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. KamilSH.Zingangirav, Theory of Code Division Multiple Access Communication, IEEE press Wiley,
2004
nd
2. Vijay Kumar Garg, IS 95 CDMA and CDMA 2000: Cellular/PCS Systems Implementation, 2 Edition,
3. Ramjee Prasad, OFDM for Wireless Multimedia Communication, Artech House, Boston, London, 2004.
4. Andreas F. Molisch, Wireless Communication, Wiley India, 2010.
5. Raymond Steele, ChinChun Lee, Peter Gould, GSM CDMA One and 3G Systems, Wiley India, 2001.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. link.springer.com/chapter/10.1007%2F978-3-642-05197-5_2
2. vvv.ece.illinois.edu/ece559/projects/aburomeh_report.pdf
3. textofvideo.nptel.iitm.ac.in/117102062/lec38.pdf
L T P C
15ECC22: VLSI SIGNAL PROCESSING
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To analyze various VLSI DSP algorithms in FIR and IIR filters

To know about the bit level architectures for multipliers in DSP Architectures
To learn the Asynchronous and Wave pipeline concepts in DSP Architectures
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Synthesize novel architectures FIR and IIR filters using VLSI DSP Techniques
Synthesize DSP architectures for Synchronous, Asynchronous and wave pipelining methods.
PRE REQUISITES:
Integrated Circuits and Systems, digital circuit design and elementary DSP operations, Experience with Verilog,
Synopsys, and Cadence or Mentor Graphics design automation tools
UNIT I DSP SYSTEMS 9
DSP algorithms, Data flow and Dependence graphs Critical path, Loop bound, iteration bound, Pipelining and
Parallel processing of FIR filters Pipelining and Parallel processing for low power.
UNIT II RETIMING, FOLDING AND UNFOLDING 9
96
Retiming Definitions and properties Retiming Techniques, Unfolding and properties of unfolding Critical path,
Register Minimization, folding Folding of Multirate systems.
UNIT III CONVOLUTION ALGORITHMS 10
Fast convolution CookToom algorithm, Winograd Algorithm, Parallel FIR filters, DCT and IDCT, pipelining in first
order IIR filters, Parallel processing of IIR filters Combined pipelining and parallel processing of IIR filters.
UNIT IV BITLEVEL ARITHMETIC ARCHITECTURES 9
Bitlevel arithmetic Parallel multipliers with sign extension Parallel carry Ripple and carry Save multipliers
Design of Lyons bit Serial multipliers using Horners rule Bitserial FIR filter CSD representation, CSD
multiplication using Horners rule for precision improvement Distributed Arithmetic fundamentals.
UNIT V SYNCHRONOUS, WAVE AND ASYNCHRONOUS PIPELINING 8
Synchronous pipelining and clocking styles, clock skew in edge Triggered single phase clocking, twophase
clocking Wave pipelining Constraint space diagram and degree of Wave pipelining Asynchronous pipelining,
bundled data versus dual rail protocol.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
1. Keshab K. Parhi, VLSI Digital Signal Processing Systems, Design and implementation , John Wiley &
Sons, 2012.
REFERENCE BOOK:
1. Uwe MeyerBaese, Digital Signal Processing with Field Programmable Gate Arrays (Signals and
rd
Communication Technology), 3 Edition, Springer, 2007.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.ece.umn.edu/~parhi/
2. www.ece.umn.edu/users/parhi/SLIDES/chap13.pdf
3. www.ece.umn.edu/users/parhi/SLIDES/chap8.pdf
L T P C
15ECC23: BIOMEMS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To learn various MEMS fabrication techniques.

To understand different types of sensors and actuators and their principles of operation at the micro scale
level.
To know the application of MEMS in different field of medicine.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the subject, students shall be able to

Apply various MEMS fabrication techniques.
Analyze different types of sensors and actuators and their principles of operation at the micro Scale level.
Apply MEMS in different field of medicine.
PRE REQUISITES:
Physics and calculus, Basics of Micro Electro Mechanical Systems (MEMS), biomedical Signals and Sensors
UNIT I MEMS MATERIALS AND FABRICATION 9
Typical MEMs and Microsystems Materials for MEMS Active substrate materials Silicon and its compounds,
97
Silicon piezoresistors, Gallium Arsenide, quartz, polymers.
Micromachining photolithography, thin film deposition, doping, etching, bulk machining, wafer bonding, LIGA.
UNIT II MECHANICAL AND THERMAL SENSORS AND ACTUATORS 9
Mechanics for MEMs design Static bending of thin plates Mechanical vibration Thermomechanics Fracture
and thin film mechanics.
Mechanical sensors and actuators Beam and cantilever Microplates, strain, pressure and flow measurements
Thermal sensors and actuators Actuator based on thermal expansion Thermal couples Thermalresistor
Shape memory alloys Inertia sensor, flow sensor.
UNIT III ELECTROSTATIC AND PIEZOELECTRIC SENSORS AND ACTUATORS 9
Parallel plate capacitors pull in effect, Electrostatic sensors and actuators Inertia sensor Pressure sensor Flow
sensor tactile sensor comb drive.
Properties of piezoelectric materials Piezoelectric sensor and actuator Inchworm motor Inertia sensor Flow
sensor.
UNIT IV MICROFLUIDIC SYSTEMS 9
Fluid dynamics Continuity equation Momentum equation Equation of motion Laminar flow in circular conduits
Fluid flow in microconduits in submicrometer and nanoscale.
Microscale fluid Expression for liquid flow in a channel Fluid actuation methods Dielectrophoresis Microfluid
dispenser Microneedle, Micropumps Continuous flow system, micromixers.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF BIOMEMS 9
CAD for MEMs Drug delivery Micro total analysis systems (MicroTAS) detection and measurement methods
Microsystem approaches to polymerase chain reaction (PCR) DNA sensor MEMS based drug delivery.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Tai Ran Hsu, MEMS and Microsystems Design and Manufacture, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company,
New Delhi, 2002.
2. Wanjun Wang, Stephen A.Soper,BioMEMs: Technologies and Applications, CRC Press, New York, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Marc J. Madou Fundamentals of Microfabrication: the Science of Miniaturization, CRC Press, 2002
2. NadimMaluf, Kirt Williams. An introduction to MicroelectroMechancial Systems Engineering, Second
Edition, Artech House Inc, MA, 2004.
3. Chang Liu, Foundations of MEMS, Pearson Education International, New Jersey, USA,2006
4. NitaigourPremchandMahalik, MEMS, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi, 2007.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.tc.umn.edu/~drsteve/Lectures/Introduction%20to%20BioMEMS.pdf
2. http://freevideolectures.com/Course/2323/MEMS-and-Microsystems/31
3. http://www.learnerstv.com/video/Free-video-Lecture-4339-Engineering.htm
L T P C
15ECC24: MEDICAL ELECTRONICS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
98
To interpret the methods of recording various bio potentials and measure clinical laboratory and various
physiological parameters.
To recognize the working of Cardiac care units and the use of radiation for diagnosis and therapy.
To identify the working of different physiological assist devices and the need and techniques of electrical
safety in Hospitals.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Evaluate the methods of recording various bio potentials and measurement of physiological information.
Analyze the working of Cardiac care units and different physiological assist devices.
Realize the recent trends in Medical Instrumentation and the techniques used for electrical safety in
Hospitals.
PRE REQUISITES:
circuit theory including complex impedance, transducers concepts, amplifiers, filters, noise and communication
theory
UNIT I ELECTROPHYSIOLOGY AND BIOPOTENTIAL RECORDING 9
Biopotentials Biopotential electrodes Biological amplifiers ECG, EEG, EMG, PCG, EOG, lead systems and
recording methods, typical waveforms and signal characteristics.
UNIT II CLINICAL LABORATORY AND PHYSIOLOGICAL PARAMETER 9

MEASUREMENT
Colorimeter Photometer Auto analyzer Blood Flow meter Cardiac Output Measurement Respiratory
Measurement Blood Pressure Temperature Measurement and Blood Cell Counters.
UNIT III RADIOLOGICAL EQUIPMENTS AND ASSIST DEVICES 9
Diagnostic xray equipments Use of Radio Isotope in diagnosis Radiation Therapy Heart lung machine
Different types of Oxygenators Pulmonary function analyzers Principle of Hemodialysis Hemodialyser
UNIT IV CARDIAC CARE UNITS AND TELEMETRY 9
Pace makers Different types, Batteries for pace makers Angiogram Angioplast DC Defibrillators,
Asynchronous and Synchronous types Patient Monitoring system Principles of Biotelemetry and Radio pill.
UNIT V RECENT TRENDS IN MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION 9
Principles and application of Thermograph Endoscopy Unit Laser in Medicine Diathermy Units MRI and
CT Scans Ultrasound Doppler Scan Electrical Safety in Medical Equipment.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
nd
1. Leislie Cromwell, Biomedical instrumentation and measurement, 2 Edition, Prentice Hall of India,
2010.
th
2. Khandpur, R.S., Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation, TATA McGrawHill, 18 Reprint, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
nd
1. Joseph J.Carr and John M.Brown, Introduction to Biomedical equipment Technology, 2 Edition, John
Wiley and Sons, 2003.
rd
2. Webster J.G, Medical Instrumentation application and design, 3 Edition, John Wiley and sons, 2012.
rd
3. S.K.Venkata Ram, Biomedical Electronics and Instrumentations, 3 Edition, Galgotia Publications pvt
Ltd., 2009.
4. R. Anandanatarajan, Biomedical Instrumentation And Measurements, Prentice Hall of India, 2011.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.biomed.engr.sc.edu/bme_lab/.../29)%20BioPotential%20Basics.pdf
99
2. www.egr.msu.edu/classes/ece445/mason/Files/7BioAmps.pdf
3. www.hsc.wvu.edu/cai/lemieux/pdfs/8.29.06lecture.pdf
4. www.pierce.ctc.edu/staff/.../lecture_notes/Lecture%2021%20notes.htm
5. www.winthropendoscopy.org/
6. www.biomedikal.in/2010/04/lecturenotesonmedicalelectronics
7. www.cchaforlife.org/wp.../ACHDPacemakersanddefibrillators.pdf
L T P C
15ECC25: INTERNET AND JAVA
2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To acquire essential skills in core Java

To make use of Java for developing Networking application
To understand the concepts of WWW, HTML, PHP and XML.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Develop Core Java Programs using JDK
Write applets and swing for event handling in Java.
Develop Java codes for Network applications, JDBC and Java apk.
Develop Interactive web pages using HTML and Java Script.
PRE REQUISITES:
C programming, Object oriented programming, C++, CCNA, J2EE and J2ME
UNIT I JAVA FUNDAMENTALS 9
The Java programming environment JDK, Eclipse IDE Fundamental Programming structures: Objects and
Classes, Inheritance, Interfaces and Implementations, Exceptions and Debugging, Multithreading.
UNIT II EVENTDRIVEN PROGRAMMING USING JAVA 9
Applet Programming Components, Event handling, AWT Event hierarchy - Java Swing : Model View Controller,
Swing Components: Buttons, Layout Management Menu & Tool Bars
UNIT III NETWORK PROGRAMMING IN JAVA 9
Networking with Java URL Classes, UDP datagrams Sockets Programming Transfer of Data from client to the
server Telnet application Java Message Services Remote Method Invocation.
UNIT IV ADVANCED JAVA PROGRAMMING 9
Creating Packages, JAR files, Annotations JDBC Databases Applications using JDBC Java and XML
Java apk creation
UNIT V WORLD WIDE WEB 9
HTTP Protocol Web browsers Web site and Web page design, HTML, XHTML, Dynamic HTML CSS Java
Script CGI
TOTAL: 45PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Steven Holzneret. al, Java 2 Programming , Dreamtech Press, 2006.

rd
2. Chris Bates, Web Programming Building Internet Applications, 3 Edition, Wiley Publications, 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
100
1. Elliotte Rusty Harold, Java Network Programming, OReilly publishers,2000.
rd
2. Robert W.Sebesta, Programming the worldwide web, 3 Edition, Pearson Education, 2007.
th
3. Cay S.Hortsmann, Gary Cornwell, Core Java 2, 7 Edition, Pearson Education, 2005.
4. Patrick Naughton, Complete Reference: Java2, Tata McGrawHill, 2003.
5. Kogent Learning Solutions Inc., Java Server Programming, Platinum Edition, Dream tech Press 2010.
rd
6. Behrouz A. Forouzon , TCP/IP Protocol Suite, 3 edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/java/
2. www.javatpoint.com/socket-programming
3. www.livinginternet.com/w/w.htm
L T P C
15ECC26: CRYPTOGRAPHY AND NETWORK SECURITY
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To become skilled at fundamentals of secret and public key cryptography

To describe network security threats, network security tools and applications.
To be aware of the importance of information security.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Apply symmetric and asymmetric ciphers to encrypt data.
Derive digest for the purpose of authentication.
Identify the common network vulnerabilities and design the defense mechanisms.
PRE REQUISITES:
Probability and number theory, algorithms, networking and programming such as C
UNIT I SYMMETRIC KEY CRYPTOGRAPHY 9
OSI Security Architecture Classical Encryption techniques Cipher Principles Data Encryption Standard Block
Cipher Design Principles and Modes of Operation Evaluation criteria for AES AES Cipher Triple DES
Placement of Encryption Function Traffic Confidentiality.
UNIT II PUBLIC KEY CRYPTOGRAPHY 10
Introduction to Number Theory Public Key Cryptography and RSA DiffieHellman key Exchange Elliptic Curve
Architecture and Cryptography Key Management Confidentiality using Asymmetric Encryption.
UNIT III AUTHENTICATION AND HASH FUNCTION 9
Authentication requirements Authentication functions Message Authentication Codes Hash Functions

Security of Hash Functions and MACs MD5 message Digest algorithm Secure Hash Algorithm RIPEMD
HMAC Digital Signatures Authentication Protocols Digital Signature Standard.
UNIT IV NETWORK SECURITY 9
Authentication Applications: Kerberos X.509 Authentication Service Electronic Mail Security PGP S/MIME
IP Security Web Security.
UNIT V SYSTEM LEVEL SECURITY 8
Intrusion detection Password management Viruses and related Threats Virus Counter measures Firewall
Design Principles Trusted Systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
101
TEXT BOOKS:
th
1. William Stallings, Cryptography and Network Security Principles and Practices, 7 Edition, Pearson
Education, 2016.
2. Behrouz A. Forouzan, Cryptography and Network Security, Tata McGrawHill, 2007
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Bruce Schneier, Applied Cryptography: Protocols, Algorithms, and Source Code in C, John Wiley & Sons
Inc, 2007.
th
2. Charles P. Pfleeger and Shari Lawrence Pfleeger, Security in Computing, 4 Edition, Prentice Hall, 2006
nd
3. Wade Trappe and Lawrence C. Washington, Introduction to Cryptography with coding theory,2 Edition,
4. Wenbo Mao, Modern Cryptography Theory and Practice, Pearson Education, 2003.
5. Thomas Calabrese, Information Security Intelligence: Cryptographic Principles and Applications, Cenage
Learning, 2006.
6. AtulKahate, Cryptography and Network Security, Tata McGrawHill, 2003.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://highered.mcgrawhill.com/sites/0072870222/student_view0/
2. www.interhack.net/pubs/network-security/
L T P C
15ECC27: MULTIMEDIA COMPRESSION TECHNIQUES
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To get acquainted with the special features of multimedia and evaluation techniques.
To analyze various compression techniques for variety of sources like audio, image, text and video.
To develop the ability to apply compression methodologies to different multimedia applications.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Analyze the requirement for compression in real time applications.
Apply various compression algorithms for the application requirements.
Evaluate the performances of compression algorithms.
PRE REQUISITES:
knowledge of digital data representation of various kinds (numbers, characters, images and sound), trigonometry,
probability, matrices, elements of computer systems and networks
UNIT I MULTIMEDIA CONCEPTS 9
Special features of Multimedia Graphics and Image Data Representations Fundamental Concepts in Video and
Digital Audio Storage requirements for multimedia applications Need for Compression Taxonomy of
compression Techniques Overview of source coding, source models, scalar and vector quantization theory
Evaluation techniques Error analysis and methodologies.
UNIT II TEXT COMPRESSION 9
Compaction techniques Huffmann coding Adaptive Huffmann Coding Arithmetic coding Shannon Fano
coding Dictionary techniques LZW family algorithms.
UNIT III AUDIO COMPRESSION 9
Audio compression techniques Law and A Law companding Frequency domain and filtering Basic sub
102
band coding speech coding standard G.722 Advanced Audio Coding MPEG audio, progressive encoding for
audio Silence compression, speech compression techniques Formant and CELP Vocoders.
UNIT IV IMAGE COMPRESSION 9
Predictive techniques DM, PCM, DPCM Optimal Predictors and Optimal Quantization Transform Coding
JPEG Standard Sub band coding algorithms Wavelet based compression Implementation using filters EZW,
SPIHT coders JPEG 2000 standards JBIG, JBIG2 standards.
UNIT V VIDEO COMPRESSION 9
Video compression techniques and standards MPEG Video Coding I MPEG 1 and 2 MPEG Video Coding II
MPEG 4 and 7 Motion estimation and compensation techniques H.261 Standard DVI technology PLV
DVI real time compression Packet Video.
TOTAL: 45PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
th
1. Khalid Sayood, Introduction to Data Compression, 4 Edition, Morgan Kauffman Harcourt India, 2012.
th
2. David Salomon, Data Compression The Complete Reference, 4 Edition, Springer Verlag, New York
Inc., 2007.
3. Yun Q.Shi and Huifang Sun, Image and Video Compression for Multimedia Engineering Fundamentals,
nd
Algorithms & Standards, 2 Edition, CRC press, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Peter Symes, Digital Video Compression, McGraw Hill, 2003.

nd
2. Mark Nelson, Data compression, 2 Edition, BPB Publishers, 1995.
3. Mark S.Drew and ZeNianLi, Fundamentals of Multimedia, Prentice Hall, 2009.
nd
4. Watkinson,J, Compression in Video and Audio,2 Edition, Focal press, 1995.
nd
5. Jan Vozer, Video Compression for Multimedia, 2 Edition, AP Profes, 1995.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.cit.cmu.edu/media/multimedia/
2. arxiv.org/pdf/1009.4981 www.uaudio.com Blog Studio Basics
3. http://www.seas.ucla.edu/spapl/paper/mark_eot156.pdf
4. rimtengg.com/coit2007/proceedings/pdfs/43.pdf
L T P C
15ECC28: MULTIRATE AND SPARSE SIGNAL PROCESSING
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To analyze the sampling rate conversion and multirate digital system structures.
To determine the Sparse representation.
To calculate uncertainty in sparsity.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Design multirate based simple filtering applications

Apply sparse representation to minimization problems.
Analyze the uniqueness of sparsity and apply to Image processing algorithms.
PRE REQUISITES:
Familiarity with linear algebra,Digital Signal Processing concepts, discrete-time signals and systems, Fourier and z-
transforms, sampling and reconstruction of signals.
103
UNIT I SAMPLING AND SAMPLING RATE CONVERSION 9
Uniform sampling and sampling theorem Sampling rate conversion Analog interpretation Direct Digital
approach Examples of Multirate Digital systems Sampling rate conversion in Digital Audio systems Conversion
between delta modulation and PCM signal coding formats.
UNIT II STRUCTURES FOR MULTIRATE DIGITAL SYSTEMS 9
Structures for FIR decimators and Interpolators Direct and Transposed Polyphase FIR structures with time
varying coefficients for Interpolation/Decimation by a factor of L/M IIR Structures for decimators and Interpolators
Polyphase Direct form , Comparison of Structures for decimation and Interpolation.
UNIT III SPARSE REPRESENTATION 9
Sparsity, Terminologies Underdetermined Linear Systems Regularization Convexity l1 Minimization Moving

to Sparse Solutions The l0 Norm and Implications The P0 Problem in sparse signal processing.
UNIT IV UNIQUENESS AND UNCERTAINTY 9
Uncertainty Principle for twoortho case Uncertainty of Redundant Solutions From Uncertainty to Uniqueness
Uniqueness via the Spark Uniqueness via the MutualCoherence Uniqueness via the Babel Function Upper
Bounding the Spark.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF MULTIRATE AND SPARSE SIGNAL PROCESSING 9
Scalable representation of multimedia signals Subband coding The SparseLand Model, Geometric
Interpretation of SparseLand, Processing of Sparsely Generated Signals Image Debluring A Case Study.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Ronald E Crochiere, Lawrence R. Rabiner, Multirate Signal Processing, Prentice Hall, 1983.
2. Michael Elad, Sparse and Redundant Representations: From Theory to Applications in Signal and image
processing, Spinger Science, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Omid S. Jahromi, Multirate Statistical Signal Processing, Springer, 2007.

2. JeanLuc Starck, FionnMurtagh, Jalal M. Fadili, Sparse image and signal processing Wavelets, Curvelets,
Morphological Diversity, Cambridge University press, 2010
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://dspguru.com/dsp/faqs/multirate/basics
2. http://videolectures.net/mlss09us_candes_ocsssrl1m/
L T P C
15ECC29: RADAR AND NAVIGATIONAL AIDS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To expose the radar fundamentals and various types of RADARS.

To be aware of various navigational aids.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Gain knowledge of radar fundamentals and various types of RADARS.
Get acquainted with moving target indication and navigational aids
PRE REQUISITES:
104
Basic navigation principles, knowledge of radio, Basic radio principles, antenna fundamentals
UNIT I PRINCIPLES OF RADAR 10
Radar Equation Radar Block diagram and Operation Radar Frequencies Millimeter and sub millimeter
waves Applications of Radar Prediction of Range Performance Minimum Detectable Signal Receiver
Noise Signal to Noise Ratio Matched filter impulse response Integration of radar Pulses Radar Cross
Section of Targets Cross section Fluctuations Radar Clutter.
UNIT II ANTENNAS FOR RADAR & NAVIGATION AND CW & FM RADAR 8
Antenna Concept Reflector Antennas Phased Array antennas Loop Antenna Doppler effect CW radar
FMCW radar Airborne Doppler Navigation Multiple Frequency CW radar.
UNIT III MTI & PULSE DOPPLER RADAR AND TRACKING & IMAGING RADAR 9
Delay line Cancellers Multiple or staggered Pulse Repetition Frequencies Range gated Doppler Filters
Block Diagram of Digital Signal Processor Example of MTI radar Processor Pulse Doppler Radar Non
coherent MTI MTI from moving platform Other types of MTI Airborne radar Tracking with radar Mono
pulse tracking Conical scan and sequential lobing Low angle tracking Air Surveillance Radar Synthetic
aperture radar (SAR).
UNIT IV NAVIGATIONAL SYSTEMS 9
Four Methods of Navigation Radio Direction Findings Loop input circuits Aural null direction finder
Goniometer Errors in Direction Finding Adcock Direction Finder Direction Finding at very high frequency
Automatic Direction Finder Range and Accuracy of Direction Finders LF/MF Four course Radio Range VHF
Omni Directional Range VOR receiving Equipment Range and Accuracy of VOR LORAN DECCA
navigation system.
UNIT V MODERN NAVIGATION 9
Aids to approach and Landing Instrument Landing System Ground controlled Approach System Microwave
landing system Distance Measuring Equipment TACAN Doppler frequency equations Track stabilization
Doppler navigation system GPS principle of operation Position location determination GPS receiver.
TOTAL: 45PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Skolnik M, "Introduction to Radar Systems", Tata McGrawHill, 2007.

nd
2. N.S.Nagaraja, "Elements of Electronic Navigation Systems", 2 Edition, Tata McGrawHill, 2004.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Peyton Z. Peebles, "Radar Principles", John Wiley, 2004.

rd
2. J.C Toomay, Hannen, Paul J, Principles of Radar", 3 Edition, PHI, 2010.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.turmaaguia.com/davi/skolnik/Skolnik_chapter_1.pdf
2. www.key2study.com/66web/acnsprelims.pdf
L T P C
15ECC30: SATELLITE COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To determine look angle of earth station antenna.

To calculate sub satellite point.
105
To analyze subsystem configuration.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Calculate linkbudget for satellite communication.
Analyze subsystem configuration.
Evaluate the performance of satellite access systems.
PRE REQUISITES:
Communication link budgets, modulation, coding, multiple access techniques, propagation effects, and earth
terminals
UNIT I SATELLITE ORBITS 9
Keplers Laws, Newtons law orbital parameters, orbital perturbations, station keeping, geo stationary and non-
Geo stationary orbits Look Angle Determination Limits of visibility EclipseSub satellite point Sun transit
outage Launching Procedures Launch vehicles and propulsion.
UNIT II SPACE SEGMENT AND SATELLITE LINK DESIGN 9
Spacecraft Technology Structure, Primary power, Attitude and Orbit control, Thermal control and Propulsion,
communication Payload and supporting subsystems, Telemetry, Tracking and command Satellite uplink and
downlink Analysis and Design, link budget, E/N calculation Performance impairments System noise, inter
modulation and interference, Propagation Characteristics and Frequency considerations System reliability and
design lifetime.
UNIT III SATELLITE ACCESS 9
Modulation and Multiplexing for different services Multiple accesses: FDMA, TDMA, Assignment Methods
Spread Spectrum technique for satellite communication.
UNIT IV EARTH SEGMENT 9
Earth Station Technology Terrestrial Interface, Transmitter and Receiver, Antenna Systems TVRO, MATV,
CATV Test Equipment Measurements on G/T, C/No, EIRP, Antenna Gain.
UNIT V SATELLITE APPLICATIONS 9
Mobile satellite services: GSM, GPS, LEO, MEO, Satellite Navigational System Direct Broadcast satellites
(DBS) Direct to home Broadcast (DTH), Digital audio broadcast (DAB), Digital video Broadcast Specialized
services: Remote sensing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
th
1. Dennis Roddy, Satellite Communication, 5 Edition, McGraw Hill International, 2011.
2. Wilbur L. Pritchard, Hendri G. Suyderhoud, Robert A. Nelson, Satellite Communication Systems
Engineering, Prentice Hall/Pearson, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. N.Agarwal, Design of Geosynchronous Space Craft, Prentice Hall, 1986.

nd
2. Bruce R. Elbert, The Satellite Communication Applications, 2 Edition, Artech House, 2004.
nd
3. Tri T. Ha, Digital Satellite Communication, 2 Edition, TMH, 2009.
4. Emanuel Fthenakis, Manual of Satellite Communications, McGraw Hill Book Co., 1984.
5. Robert G. Winch, Telecommunication Trans Mission Systems, McGrawHill Book Co., 2007.
6. Brian Ackroyd, World Satellite Communication and earth station Design, BSP professional Books,
1990.
7. M.Richharia, Satellite Communication SystemsDesign Principles, Macmillan, 2003
WEB REFERENCES:
106
1. www.cs.wustl.edu/~jain/cis78897/ftp/satellite_nets.pdf
2. en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Satellite
L T P C
15ECC31: AVIONICS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To develop understanding of aerodynamics.

To acquire knowledge on navigation at Radio frequencies.
To understand principle of aircraft displays.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Apply knowledge on aerodynamics to understand the working of modern Aircrafts.

Apply knowledge on IC technology for avionic system integration.
PRE REQUISITES:
Basic knowledge of electronics, software, integrated circuits, display devices
UNIT I ROLE OF AVIONIC SYSTEMS IN AIRCRAFTS 9
Introduction to aircraft Axes system Parts, Aircraft dynamics Lift & drag, angle of incidence/angle of attack,
pitching moment and aerodynamic centre, aircraft stability importance and role of Avionics systems which
interface directly with pilot Aircraft state sensor systems Navigation systems External world sensor systems
Task automation systems Avionics architecture evolution Avionics Data buses MIL STD 1553, ARINC 429,
ARINC 629.
UNIT II RADIO NAVIGATION 9
Short Range Navigation AidsAutomatic Direction Finder (ADF), Distance Measuring Equipment(DME), VHF
OmniDirectional Range (VOR)
Long Range Navigation Aids Long Range Navigation (LORAN), DECCA, Optimized Method for Estimated
Guidance Accuracy (OMEGA).
ApproachLanding Navigation Aids Instrument Landing System (ILS), Microwave landing System (MLS)
UNIT III INERTIAL AND SATELLITE NAVIGATION SYSTEMS 9
Inertial sensors Gyroscopes, Accelerometers, Inertial navigation systems Basic principles & Schuler Tuning
platform axes initial alignment and gyro compassing Vertical navigation channel Strap down IN system
computing Satellite Navigation GPS.
UNIT IV AIR DATA SYSTEMS AND AUTOPILOT 9
Air data quantities Altitude, Airspeed, Mach no., Vertical speed, Total Air temperature, Stall warning, Altitude
warning Autopilot Basic principles Longitudinal and lateral autopilot Safety Measures.
UNIT V AIRCRAFT DISPLAYS 9
Display technologies LED, LCD, CRT, Flat Panel Display Primary Flight parameter displays Head Up Display,
Helmet Mounted Display, Night vision goggles, Head Down Display, MFD, MFK, Virtual cockpit.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
th
1. Albert Helfrick. D, Principles of Avionics, Avionics communications Inc., 4 edition,2007
2. Collinson, R.P.G, Introduction to Avionics, Chapman and Hall, 1996.
107
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Middleton, D.H, Avionics Systems, Longman Group UK Ltd, 1989.

2. Spitzer, C.R. Digital Avionics Systems, Prentice Hall, 1993.
3. Spitzer, C.R, The Avionics Handbook, CRC Press, 2000.
4. Pallet, E.H.J, Aircraft Instruments and Integrated Systems, Longman Group UK Ltd, 1992.
nd
5. N.S.Nagaraja, Elements of Electronic Navigation Systems, 2 Edition, TMH, 2000.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.milstd1553.com/
2. https://www.nasa.gov/
L T P C
15ECC32: ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE AND COMPATIBILITY
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To analyze EMI Sources, EMI problems

To analyze methods in PCB level / Subsystem and system level design
To measure the emission. immunity level from different systems
To analyze various testing equipment and compare prescribed EMC standards
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Design TV and other household articles radiation hazard free and compliant to EMI / EMC standards.
Perform EMI measurements
Apply the concepts of EMI Coupling in cables and other equipment
Apply techniques for reducing the cross talk
PRE REQUISITES:
Design method for a digital system, Electromagnetics, interference
UNIT I PRINCIPLES OF EMI AND EMC 9
Definition of EMI and EMC with examples Classification of EMI/EMC CE, RE, CS, RS Units of Parameters
Sources of EMI EMI coupling modes CM and DM ESD Phenomena and effects Transient phenomena and
suppression.
UNIT II EMI MEASUREMENTS 9
Basic principles of RE, CE, RS and CS measurements EMI measuring instruments Antennas LISN Feed
through capacitor Current probe EMC analyzer and detection technique open area site Shielded anechoic
chamber TEM cell.
UNIT III EMC STANDARD AND REGULATIONS 8
National and International standardizing organizations FCC, CISPR, ANSI, DOD, IEC, CENEEC, FCC CE and RE
standards CISPR, CE and RE Standards, IEC/EN, CS standards Frequency assignment spectrum
conversation.
UNIT IV EMI CONTROL METHODS AND FIXES 10
Shielding Theory and materials, Grounding, Bonding General procedure and guidelines, Filtering
characteristics of filters Power line filter Filter evaluation and filter installation, EMI gasket, Isolation transformer,
opto isolator.
UNIT V EMC DESIGN AND INTERCONNECTION TECHNIQUES 9
108
Cable routing and connection Component selection and mounting PCB design Trace routing, Impedance
control, decoupling, Zoning and grounding general guidelines EMC Specifications and PCB Guidelines for SMPS
Devices EMC Improvement Guidelines.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
nd
1. V.P.Kodali, Engineering EMC Principles, Measurements and Technologies, 2 Edition, IEEE Press,
2001.
2. C.R.Paul, Introduction to Electromagnetic Compatibility, John Wiley and Sons, 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
rd
1. Bemhard Keiser, Principles of Electromagnetic Compatibility, 3 Edition, Artech house, 1986.
nd
2. Henry W.Ott. Noise Reduction Techniques in Electronic Systems, 2 Edition, John Wiley and Sons,
1988.
3. Donald R. J. White and William G. Duff, A Handbook Series on Electromagnetic Interference and
Compatibility: Electrical noise and EMI specifications, Don White Consultants, 1971.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http:// www.ewh.ieee.org/soc/emcs/
2. www.compliance-club.com/pdf/DesignTechniquesPart2.pdf
3. http://www.radio-electronics.com/info/circuits/emc-emi/design-techniques-for-emc.php
L T P C
15ECC33: MOBILE ADHOC NETWORKS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To be aware of fundamental concepts and design issues of Ad Hoc Wireless Networks

To be exposed to the architectures and protocols of Ad Hoc Wireless Networks
To familiarize with different MAC, routing and transport layer protocols of adhoc networks.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Describe the unique issues in adhoc wireless networks
Analyze the design issues, goals and classifications of protocols in different network layers.
Analyze the QoS issues in the mobile adhoc networks.
Analyze the issues in QoS solutions and Energy Management Schemes in Ad Hoc Wireless Networks.
PRE REQUISITES:
Computer networks, wireless communication.
UNIT I MOBILE ADHOC NETWORKS AND IEEE STANDARDS 802.11 9
Adhoc networks Definition General and design Issues Applications Characteristics of Wireless channel
Comparison of OSI Reference Model TCP/IP Reference Model and ATM Reference Model IEEE 802.11
standards: 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.15, HIPERLAN.
UNIT II MEDIUM ACCESS PROTOCOLS 10
Design issues, goals and classification Contention based protocols with reservation Scheduling algorithms
Protocols using directional antennas.
UNIT III NETWORK PROTOCOLS 9
109
Routing Protocols: Design issues, goals and classification Proactive vs reactive routing Unicast routing
algorithms, hybrid routing algorithm, Power aware routing Protocols, Hierarchical Routing, Multicast routing
algorithms, Tree based Multicast Routing Protocols and Mesh based Multicast Routing Protocols.
UNIT IV END TO END DELIVERY AND SECURITY 8
Transport layer: Issues in designing Transport layer classification, adhoc transport protocols Security issues in
adhoc networks: issues and challenges, network security attacks, secure routing protocols.
UNIT V QUALITY OF SERVICE AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT SCHEMES 9
Issues and Challenges in Providing QoS in Ad Hoc Wireless Networks Classifications of QoS Solutions. MAC
Layer Solutions Network Layer Solutions QoS Frameworks Need for Energy Management Classification of
Energy Management Schemes Battery, Transmission Power, System Power Management Schemes.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
nd
1. C.Siva Ram Murthy and B.S.Manoj, Ad hoc Wireless Networks Architectures and protocols, 2 Edition,
Pearson Education, 2011
2. Charles E. Perkins, Ad hoc Networking, AddisonWesley, 2000
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Stefano Basagni, Marco Conti, Silvia Giordano and Ivan Stojmenovic, Mobile Adhoc Networking, Wiley
IEEE press, 2004.
2. Mohammad Ilyas, The Handbook of AdHoc Wireless Networks, CRC press, 2002.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.cs.jhu.edu/~cs647/intro_adhoc.pdf
2. http://www.cs.ucy.ac.cy/courses/EPL651/Resources/papers/RoutingProtocolsForAdHocMobileWirlessNEtw
orks.pdf
3. www.cse.fau.edu/~jie/research/publications/Publication_files/qossbk.pdf
4. www.ubicc.org/files/pdf/EEDSR ubicc_102.pdf
L T P C
15ECC34: 4G WIRELESS SYSTEMS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To explore the network architecture in 4G wireless systems.

To analyze the issues in OFDM, SC FDMA modulation schemes.
To provide adequate knowledge of transmit diversity and MIMO spatial Multiplexing.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Evaluate the hardware requirements of transmitter and receiver for 4G wireless systems
Evaluate Diversity and Spatial Multiplexing schemes in 4G wireless systems
Design a transceiver for 4G wireless systems specifications
PRE REQUISITES:
Basics of mobile communications, Digital Communications, channel coding techniques
UNIT I 4G NETWORK ARCHITECTURE AND OFDM 9
110
LTE Evolution to 4G Network Architecture Multicast System Architecture OFDM Mathematical system
model for OFDM system OFDM for downlink Capacity of OFDMA SNR Analysis of OFDM system Walsh
Spread OFDM Fast Frequency Hopping OFDM.
UNIT II PAPR PROBLEM IN OFDM AND SC FDMA 9
Introduction to SC FDMA SCFDMA for uplink Hybrid SCFDMA OFDM PAPR problem in OFDM Measure of
PAPR PAPR in QAM modulations PAPR in SCFDMA PAPR with spectrum shaping Coverage gain due to low
peakiness.
UNIT III TRANSMIT DIVERSITY 9
Transmit Diversity Schemes Cyclic Delay Diversity Frequency Shift transmit diversity time shift transmit
diversity Precoding vector switching Block codes based transmit diversity Downlink transmission chain
Codeword to layer Mapping Transmit diversity precoding.
UNIT IV MIMO SPATIAL MULTIPLEXING AND CHANNEL STRUCTURE 9
MIMO Spatial Multiplexing MIMO capacity Code words and Layer Mapping Downlink MIMO transmission chain
MIMO Precoding CDD based precoding Open loop spatial multiplexing Channel Structure and Bandwidth
Frame and Slot structure Frame Structure type 2 Link adaptation and feedback computation.
UNIT V UPLINK AND DOWNLINK CONTROL SIGNALING 9
Uplink control signaling Data Control Multiplexing Control Signaling contents Periodic and aperiodic reporting
Downlink control signaling Data Control Multiplexing Resource Element groups Control format indicator
channel Downlink resource allocation Downlink Control Information Downlink HARQ indicator.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. StefaniaSesia, IssamToufik and Matthew Baker, LTE The UMTS Long Term Evolution: From Theory to
nd
Practice,2 Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2011.
2. Farooq Khan, LTE for 4G Mobile broadbandAir Interface Technologies and Performance, Cambridge
REFERENCE BOOK:
1. Ralf Kreher and KarstenGaenger, LTE Signaling, Troubleshooting and Optimization, John Wiley & Sons,
2011.
WEB REFERENCE:
1. http:// www.3gpp.org
2. www.ijric.org/volumes/Vol2/9Vol2.pdf
3. www.utdallas.edu/~hxm025000/PYen_WCNC_11.pdf
L T P C
15ECC35: REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEM
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To develop the skills for working in Real Time Systems

To acquire essential skills about various real time models
111
To develop skills in working of c/OSII RTOS
To apply concepts of RTOS in real life problems
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Schedule tasks in real time models using RTOS
Perform inter task communication in C/OS II RTOS
Perform time and memory management using C/OS II RTOS
Develop various RTOS based applications
PRE REQUISITES:
microcontroller-based systems, Familiarity with Windows-based development using Visual Studio, operating system
concepts, Proficiency with ANSI-C and C++
UNIT I REAL TIME SYSTEMS 10
Issues in real time computing Structure of a real time system Task classes Performance measures
estimating program run times Task assignment and scheduling Classical uniprocessor scheduling algorithms
Uniprocessor scheduling of IRIS tasks Mode changes Fault tolerant scheduling
UNIT II REAL TIME MODELS 9
Event Based, Process Based and Graph Based Models Petrinet Models System Performance Analysis
Optimization of Time Loading and Memory Loading Models of Multiprocessor Systems and Distributed Systems
Endto end Tasks in Heterogeneous Systems Temporal Distance Constraints Concurrency.
UNIT III RTOS CONCEPTS 8
Foreground/Background process Resources Tasks Multitasking Priorities Schedulers Kernel Exclusion

Intertask communication Interrupts Clock ticks C/OS II Kernel structure C/OS II Initialization Porting
C/OS II.
UNIT IV RTOS FUNCTIONS 9
Task Management Time management Semaphore management Mutual exclusion Event Management
Message management Memory management.
UNIT V RTOS APPLICATIONS 9
Design Issues Polled Loop Systems Comparison and Study of Various RTOS like QNX VX Works Portable
Software On Silicon (pSOS) RTOS for Image Processing Embedded RTOS for Voice over IP RTOS for fault
tolerant applications RTOS for Control systems.
TOTAL: 45PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Krishna C.M., Kang G Shin, RealTime Systems, Tata McGrawHill Pub. Co. Ltd, 2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Phillip A. Laplante, RealTime Systems Design and Analysis, John Wiley & Sons, Inc, 2008.
2. Jane W.S.Liu, RealTime Systems, Pearson Education, 2000.
3. Jean J Labrosse, Embedded Systems Building Blocks, CMP Books, 2005.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://micrium.com/rtos/ucosii/overview/
2. http://www.kalinskyassociates.com/Wpaper1.html
3. http://www.electro.fisica.unlp.edu.ar/temas/p7/HRT/Chapter11.pdf
112
L T P C
15ECC36: RF MEMS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the operation and characteristics of RF MEMS.

To analyze the design of passive components using MEMS.
To analyze the design of passive circuits using MEMS.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Design RF system using MEMS components.
Integrate MEMS devices.
Evaluate MEMS based RF system in terms of power consumption and size Reduction.
PRE REQUISITES:
Basics of microelectronics, material physics and signal processing, introduction to MEMS
UNIT I RF MEMS RELAYS AND SWITCHES. 9
MEMs structures Switch parameters Actuation mechanisms Electrostatic switching, Magnetic Switching,
Electromagnetic switching and thermal switching Bistable micro relays and micro actuators, Dynamics of
switching operation Switching time and dynamic response, threshold voltage, switches for RF and Microwave
applications.
UNIT II MEMS INDUCTORS AND CAPACITORS 9
Micromachined inductor, Effect of inductor layout, Modeling and design issues of planar inductor Variable
inductors Polymerbased inductors Gap tuning and area tuning capacitors Dielectric tunable capacitors.
UNIT III MICROMACHINED RF FILTERS. 9
Modeling of mechanical filters Electrostatic comb drive, Micromechanical filters using comb drives and
Electrostatic coupled beam structures Surface acoustic wave filters Bulk acoustic wave filters.
UNIT IV MEMS PHASE SHIFTERS 9
Limitations Switched delay lines phase shifter Distributed Phase shifter Ferroelectric phase shifters
Micromachined transmission lines Micromachined directional coupler and mixer Design, fabrication and
measurement.
UNIT V MICROMACHINED ANTENNA & PACKAGING 9
Microstrip antennas design parameters Micromachining to improve performance Reconfigurable antennas

Integration and packaging for RF MEMS devices Reliability and thermal issues.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. V.K.Varadanetal, RF MEMS and their Applications, Wiley, 2003

2. H.J.D.Santos, RF MEMS Circuit Design for Wireless Communications, Artech House, 2002.
REFERENCE BOOK:
1. G.M.Rebeiz, RF MEMS Theory, Design and Technology, Wiley, 2003.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.nptelvideos.in/2012/12/memsmicrosystems.html
2. http://www.mems.ece.ufl.edu/EEL6935/Calendar/MEMSIIL15RFMEMS3.pdf
113
Offered by Civil Department
15CEA01 INDUSTRIAL POLLUTION PREVENTION AND CONTROL L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concept of sustainability.

To know environmental regulations.
To realize the environmental pollution
To understand the air pollution control methods
To know the principles of water treatment
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to
Identify the importance of sustainability and its indicators, strategies and barriers.
Implement the environmental regulations, policies and Regulations for clean environment
Familiarize the pollution and its regulating standards
Apply the different air pollution control methods gases and particulates
Apply the principles of water treatment and recovery methods.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Knowledge on Environmental Science
UNIT I SUSTAINABILITY 9
Industrial activity and environment - Industrialization and sustainable development - Indicators of sustainability-
Sustainability strategies - Barriers to sustainability - Pollution prevention in achieving sustainability
UNIT II ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATIONS 9
Prevention vs. control of industrial pollution - Environment policies and Regulations to encourage pollution
prevention - Environment friendly chemical processes - Regulations for clean environment and implications for
industries
UNIT III POLLUTION 9
Definition of pollutant - Types of pollution - Air - Water - Land - Noise - Adverse effects of pollutants eco system
and human health - Need for effluent treatment and toxicity control - Standards for portable water - Agricultural
and left-off streams- Air standards for cities - Industrial areas and Resorts.
UNIT IV AIR POLLUTION CONTROL METHODS 9
Particulate Emission Control- Gravitational Settling Chambers- Cyclone separators - Fabric filters - Electrostatic
Precipitators - Wet scrubbers - Absorbers - Control of sulphur di oxide - Oxides of nitrogen - Carbon monoxide
and hydrocarbons - Noise pollution measurements and its control.
UNIT V PRINCIPLES OF WATER TREATMENT 9
Primary, secondary and tertiary treatments - Advanced waste water treatments - Recovery of metals from
process effluents
114
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Bishop.P, "Pollution Prevention: Fundamentals and Practice", McGraw Hill International, McGraw Hill Book
Co., Singapore, 2010
2. Freeman.H.M, "Industrial Pollution Prevention Hand Book", McGraw Hill, 1995
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Rose.G.R.D, Air pollution and Industry, Van No strand Reinhold Co., New York 1972
2. Pandey.G.N and Carney.G.C, Environmental Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,1989
3. James. G. Mann and Liu.Y.A, "Industrial Water Reuse and Waste WaterMinimization", McGraw Hill, 1999
EXTENSIVE READING:
th
1. Kapoor.B.S, Environmental Engineering, 5 Edition, Khanna publishers,2012
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/
15CEA02 INTRODUCTION TO ENGINEERING SEISMOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart the basic knowledge about the Engineering Seismology

To create the awareness about the earthquake recording instruments and seismic records
To instruct the knowledge about the earthquake hazards and seismic hazard assessment
To understand the various seismic hazard analysis
To introduce the different types of risk and vulnerability assessment
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Categorize the various components of engineering seismology

Identify the different types of seismic recording instruments
Classify the various earthquake hazards and seismic hazard assessment
Do the various seismic hazard analysis
Analyze the types of risk and vulnerability
Knowledge on basics on earthquake
UNIT I ENGINEERING SEISMOLOGY 9
Introduction to engineering seismology - Terminologies and definitions - Earthquake types - Overview of plate
tectonics - Earthquake source mechanisms - Source models - Types of faults - Activity and fault studies -
Concepts of seismic magnitudes and intensity -Earthquake size, different magnitude scales and relations, Theory
of wave propagation - Seismic waves, body and surface waves.
UNIT II EARTHQUAKE RECORDING INSTRUMENTS 9
Earthquake recording instrumentations - Concept of seismograph - Seismic station - Sensors and data loggers -
115
Mechanical and digital sensors - Interpretation of Seismic Records -Acceleration, Velocity and Displacement -
Frequency and Time Domain parameters - Response Spectra and Spectral parameters - Epicentre and
magnitude determination.
UNIT III EARTHQUAKE HAZARDS AND SEISMIC HAZARD ASSESSMENT 9
Introduction to earthquake hazards -Strong ground motions and site effects - World great Earthquakes - Large
and Damaging Earthquakes of India - Instruction to seismic zones and codes - Global and National seismic
hazard assessment mapping programs - Safety of individual site - Concept of seismic micro zonation - Need for
Micro zonation - Types and Scale Methodology.
UNIT IV SEISMIC HAZARD ANALYSIS 9
Introduction to Seismic Hazard Analysis- Methods - Deterministic and Probabilistic - Attenuation models and
Simulation of Strong Ground Motion - Introduction to Site characterization - Different methods and experiments -
Geotechnical properties - Site classification and worldwide code recommendation.
UNIT V RISK CLASSIFICATIONS AND MAPPING 9
Concept of site response - Local site effects and evaluation methods - Ground motion amplifications and
estimation - Development of response /design spectrum - Introduction to liquefaction - Mechanism and factors
causing liquefaction - estimation methods and procedures- Mapping - Earthquake induced landslide - Landslide
hazard mapping - Tsunami hazard and Consideration for Tsunami hazard mapping.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
st
1. Stein, S., and M. Wysession, An Introduction to Seismology, Earthquakes, and Earth Structure, 1 edition,
Malden, MA: Blackwell, September 2003.
2. Steven L Kramer, Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering, Pearson Education, 2003
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Bozorgnia, Y. and Bertero, V.V., Earthquake Engineering - From Engineering Seismology to Performance -
Based Engineering CRC Press, Washington, 2004.
2. Leon Reiter, Earthquake hazard Analysis - Issues and Insights, Columbia University Press, New York,
1990.
3. Havskov, J. and Alguacil, G.,Instrumentation in Earthquake Seismology,Springer,Netherlands, 2004.
EXTENSIVE READING:
1. Judith Petts, Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Vol. I & II, Blackwell Science, 1999
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://nisee.berkeley.edu/
2. http://www.ethiopians.com/earthquake_engineering_resources.htm
15CEA03 SOLAR ENERGY UTILIZATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To enable the students to acquire knowledge of solar radiation data and its measurement.
To explain the concept of various forms of solar thermal systems.
To create basic knowledge on direct steam generation systems.
116
To learn the maintenance and implementation of solar photovoltaic.
To recognize the latest heat energy storages in buildings.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course the students will be able to,
Recognize the concepts of solar radiation data and its measurement.

Understand the working process of various solar thermal systems.
Appreciate the principles of solar parabolic concentrators and direct steam generation systems.
Know the importance of solar photovoltaic maintenance and their implementation.
Identify the orientation and design of buildings by using latest heat energy storages.
Knowledge on energy conservation
UNIT I SOLAR RADIATION 9
Sun and earth geometry- Solar radiation- Beam and diffuse radiations- Measurement of solar radiation
Pyranometer-Pyrheliometer- Sunshine recorder-Solar collectors and applications.
UNIT II SOLAR THERMAL SYSTEMS 9
Flat plate and evacuated tube collectors- Domestic hot water and process heat systems- Solar cooker- Solar
dryer-Solar desalination and solar pond.
UNIT III SOLAR POWER PLANT 9
Principles of solar parabolic concentrators- Trough and dish types- Compound parabolic concentrators- Fresnel
lens collectors- Central receiver plant- Direct steam generation systems-Solar furnaces.
UNIT IV SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAICS 9
Solar photovoltaic theory- Mono and polycrystalline silicon technologies- PV modules and integrated systems-
implementation and maintenance.
UNIT V SOLAR-CONSCIOUS BUILDINGS 9
Orientation and design of buildings- Passive solar heat- Thermal capacity -Insulation- Solar cooling-refrigeration
and air-conditioning- Space heating- Sensible and latest heat energy storages in buildings.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Sukhatme.K, Suhas P. Sukhatme, Solar energy: Principles of thermal collection and storage, Tata McGraw
Hill publishing Co. Ltd, 8th edition, 2008.
2. Soteris A. Kalogiru, Solar Energy Engineering: Processes and systems, First edition, Academic press,
2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
rd
1. Duffie.J.A, &Beckman.W.A, Solar Engineering of Thermal Processes, 3 edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.,
2006.
2. Martin A. Green, Third generation Photovoltaics: Advanced energy conversion, 1st edition, 2005.
3. Garg.H.P, Prakash.J, Solar energy fundamentals and applications, Tata McGraw Hill publishing Co. Ltd,
117
2006.
4. Yogi Goswami.D, Frank Kreith, Jan F.Kreider, Principle of solar engineering, 2nd edition, Taylor and
Francis, 2nd edition, 2000.
5. Tiwari.G.N, Solar energy: Fundamentals, Design, Modeling and Applications, CRC Press Inc., 2002.
15CEA04 ENVIRONMENTAL GEOTECHNOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the physics and chemistry of soil

To know inorganic and organic geochemistry.
To realize contaminant fate and transport in soil
To understand the soil remediation technologies
To find the principles behind site selection and methods of disposal
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Classify theIndex properties, classification and exchange capacity.

Analyse the inorganic and organic geochemistry and Distribution of metals in soils
Identify the contaminant fate and transport in soil
Apply the soil remediation technologies available in the affected soil
Procure idea in site selection and disposal methods
Knowledge on basic soil mechanics
UNIT I PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY OF SOIL 9
Soil formation - Composition - soil fabric - Mass volume relationship - Index properties and soil classification -
Hydraulic and consolidation characteristics - Chemical properties - Soil pH - Surface charge and point of zero
charge - Anion and Cation exchange capacity of clays - Specific surface area - Bonding in clays - Soil pollution -
Factors governing soil - Pollutant interaction.
UNIT II INORGANIC AND ORGANIC GEOCHEMISTRY 9
Inorganic Chemistry - Metal contamination - Distribution of metals in soils - Geochemical processes controlling
the distribution of the metals in soils - Chemical analysis of metal in soil - Organic geochemistry - Organic
contamination - Distribution of NAPLs in soils - Process controlling the distribution of NAPLs in soil - Chemical
analysis of NAPLs in soils.
UNIT III CONTAMINANT FATE AND TRANSPORT IN SOIL 9
Transport processes - Advection - Diffusion - Dispersion - Chemical mass transfer processes - Sorption and
desorption - Precipitation and dissolution - Oxidation and reduction - Acid base reaction - Complexation - Ion
exchange - Volatilization - Hydrolysis - Biological process - Microbial transformation of heavy metals.
118
UNIT IV SOIL REMEDIATION TECHNOLOGIES 9
Contaminated site characterization Containment Soil vapor extraction Soil washing Solidification and
stabilization Electro-kinetic remediation Thermal desorption Vitrification In-situ and Ex-situ Bioremediation
Phytoremediation Soil fracturing Biostimulation Bioaugumentation Chemical oxidation and reduction.
UNIT V SITE SELECTION AND METHODS OF DISPOSAL 9
Criteria for sites for waste disposal facilities Current practices for waste disposal Sub surface techniques
Passive contaminant system Leachate contamination Application of geo-membranes Rigid and flexible
membrane liners
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Calvin Rose, An introduction to the Environmental Physics of Soil, Water and Water Sheds, Cambridge
2. Paul Nathanail C. and Paul Bardos R., Reclamation of contaminated Land, John Wiley & Sons Limited,
2004.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Hari D. Sharama and Krishna R.Reddy, Geo-Environmental Engineering: Site Remediation, Water
Contamination and Emerging Water Management Technologies, John Wiley & Sons Limited, 2004.
2. Marcel Vander Perk, Soil and Water contamination from Molecular to catchment Scale, Taylor &Franncis,
2006.
EXTENSIVE READING:
1. William J. Deutsch, Groundwater Geochemistry: Fundamentals and Applications to Contamination, Lewis

Publishers, 1997.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/
15CEA05 PRINCIPLES OF GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Introduce students to the basic principles of Global Positioning System

Familiarize with GPS signals and data
Impart knowledge on GPS data processing
Know about various errors in GPS data
provide students with the skills required to link locational data to certain projections and present same as
maps
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course students will be able to
Acquaint with the fundamentals of Global Positioning System

Employ various methods to collect GPS data by receiving signals from receiver
119
Perform basic GPS receiver operation and data processing
Check the accuracy of GPS data and able to do necessary adjustments.
Produce a simple map from field data acquired using hand-held GPS
Knowledge on Surveying
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF GPS 9
Components of GPS - GPS receivers - Reference coordinates systems - Datum, geoid, ellipsoid, WGS 84
system Time and signal propagation through atmosphere- Their modelling and estimation - Satellite orbit
andEngineering Applications.
UNIT II GPS SIGNALS AND DATA 9
Navigational data - Collection methods - static positioning, kinematic positioning, Pseudo - Kinematic and stop
and go methods -Observation planning and strategy.
UNIT III GPS OBSERVABLES 9
Pseudo range and carrier phase parameters - Estimations, data handling, cycle slip detection and correction,
ambiguity resolution- GPS data processing -Single, Double and Triple differences.
UNIT IV ERRORS IN GPS DATA 9
Satellite geometry -Errors in different segments - Multipath errors - accuracy of GPS data and measures -
Network adjustments.
UNIT V DATUM TRANSFORMATION AND DIFFERENTIAL GPS 9
Reduction of observation -Transformation to various map projection systems - Real time kinematic GPS -Multiple
reference stations -Virtual reference stations.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Satheesh, Gopi, Global Positioning System and its Applications, McGraw Hill, 2005.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Leick, A., GPS Satellite Surveying, John Wiley, 2004

2. Kaplan, E.D. and Hegarty, C.J., Understanding GPS: Principles and Applications, Artech House, 2006
nd
3. Gunter, S., Satellite Geodesy, 2 Ed., WalterbdeGruyter, 2003.
4.
15CEA06 NON-CONVENTIONAL ENERGY RESOURCES L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To enable the students to acquire the knowledge of with various sources of Non-conventional energy
such as solar wind, small hydro, ocean & wave energy
To understand the working of solar thermal power plants
120
To know various aspects of geo-thermal energy
To have knowledge in wind and Thermo-electrical energy
To have exposure on biomass energy management
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the curse student will be able to

Learn fundamentals of solar radiation geometry, application of solar energy
Selection of sites for wind farm, different types of wind generators.
Realize the basic of small hydro, ocean & wave energy.
Have knowledge in geo-thermal energy
Appreciate bio mass energy management
Knowledge on alternate energy resources
UNIT I NON-CONVENTIONAL ENERGY RESOURCES 9
Various non-conventional energy resources- Introduction, availability, classification, relative Merits and Demerits -
Solar Cells - Theory of solar cells - Solar cell materials -Solar cell array -Solar cell power plant -Limitations.
UNIT II SOLAR THERMAL ENERGY 9
Solar radiation- Flat plate collectors and their materials - Applications and performance - Focussing of collectors
and their materials -Applications and performance -Solar thermal power plants - Thermal energy storage for solar
heating and cooling - Limitations.
UNIT III GEOTHERMAL ENERGY 9
Resources of geothermal energy - Thermodynamics of geo-thermal energy conversion- Electrical conversion and
non-electrical conversion -Environmental considerations - Magneto-hydrodynamics (MHD) - Principle of working
of MHD Power plant - performance and limitations - Fuel Cells - Principle of working of various types of fuel cells
and their working, performance and limitations.
UNIT IV WIND ENERGY 9
Wind Energy - Wind power and its sources- Site selection- Criterion - Momentum theory- Classification of rotors-
Concentrations and augments- Wind characteristics- Performance and limitations of energy conversion systems -
Thermo-electrical and thermionic Conversions - Principle of working - Performance and limitations.
UNIT V BIO-MASS 9
Bio-mass - Availability of bio-mass and its conversion theory - Ocean Thermal Energy Conversion (OTEC) -
Availability, theory and working principle -Performance and limitations -Wave and Tidal Wave - Principle of
working -Performance and limitations -Waste Recycling Plants.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. John Twideu and Tony Weir, Renewal Energy Resources BSP Publications, 2006.
2. M.V.R. KoteswaraRao, Energy Resources: Conventional & Non-Conventional, BSPPublications, 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. D.S. Chauhan, Non-conventional Energy Resources, New Age International, 2002

2. C.S. Solanki, Renewal Energy Technologies: A Practical Guide for Beginners, PHI Learning, 2006
121
3. Raja, Introduction to Non-Conventional Energy Resources,SciTech Publications, 2008
EXTENSIVE READING:
1. Peter Auer, "Advances in Energy System and Technology - Vol. 1 & 2", Academic Press, 2005.
15CEA07 ENERGY CONSERVATION AND MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To enable the students to acquire the knowledge of energy conservation measures.

To understand conservation measures in steam systems
To know energy conservation aspects of fluid machinery
To have knowledge in electrical energy conservation in various industries
To have exposure on energy management
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course student will be able to
Have knowledge of energy conservation measures

Appreciate conservation measures in steam systems
Realize energy consumption and energy saving potentials
Have knowledge on electrical energy conservation
Practice energy management
Knowledge on energy conservation
UNIT I ENERGY CONSERVATION PRINCIPLES 9
Energy scenario - Principles of energy conservation - Resource availability - Energy savings - Current energy
consumption in India - Roles and responsibilities of energy managers in industries.
UNIT II ENERGY CONSERVATION IN STEAM SYSTEMS 9
Power plant components, conservation measures in steam systems - Losses in boiler - Methodology of upgrading
boiler performance - Blow down control - Excess air control - Pressure reducing stations - Condensate recovery -
Condensate pumping - Thermo compressors - Recovery of flash steam - Air removal and venting - Steam traps -
Cooling towers.
UNIT III ENERGY CONSERVATION IN FLUID MACHINERY 9
Centrifugal pumps - Energy consumption and energy saving potentials - Design consideration - Minimizing over
design - Fans and blowers -Specification - Safety margin - Choice of fans - Controls and design considerations -
Air compressor and compressed air systems - Selection of compressed air layout - Energy conservation aspects
to be considered at design stage.
UNIT IV ELECTRICAL ENERGY CONSERVATION 9
122
Potential areas for electrical energy conservation in various industries - Conservation methods - Energy
management opportunities in electrical heating, lighting system - Cable selection - Energy efficient motors -
Factors involved in determination of motor efficiency - Adjustable AC drives - Variable speed drives - Energy
efficiency in electrical system.
UNIT V ENERGY MANAGEMENT 9
Organizational background desired for energy management persuasion -Motivation - Publicity role, Tariff analysis
- Industrial energy management systems - Energy monitoring - Auditing and targeting - Economics of various
energy conservation schemes Energy policy and energy labelling.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
st
1. Reay.D.A, Industrial energy conservation, Pergamon Press, 1 edition, 2003.
2. White.L.C, Industrial Energy Management and Utilization, Hemisphere Publishers, 2002.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Smith.C.B, Energy Management Principles, Pergamon Press, 2006.

2. Trivedi.P.R and Jolka.K.R, Energy Management, Common Wealth Publication, 2002.
EXTENSIVE READING:
1. Hamies, Energy Auditing and Conservation;Methods, Measurements,Management and Case study,

Hemisphere, 2003.
15CEA08 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concepts of sustainability and EIA

To expose the students to the need, methodology of EIA
To realize the documentation and application of Environmental Impact Assessment
To Understand the pollution control methods
To develop the skill to prepare Environmental Management Plan
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course student will be able to
Identify the impact on environment by the Infrastructural projects

Impart the knowledge in legal and regulatory aspect in India according to MoEF.
Comprehend the various components of EIA and its methods.
Appreciate the Methodologies, prediction and Assessment.
Prepare Environmental Management plan for Infrastructure engineering project.
Knowledge on environmental science
UNIT I BASIC FUNDAMENTALS COMPONENTS OF EIA 9
Historical Development of Environmental Impact Assessment - EIA in Project Cycle - Legal and Regulatory
Aspects in India - Types and Limitations of EIA - Cross Sectorial Issues and terms of references in EIA - Public
123
Participation in EIA.: EIA Process- Screening and Scoping - Setting - Analysis and Mitigation.
UNIT II METHODOLOGY 9
Matrices - Networks - Checklists - Connections and Combinations of Processes-Cost benefit analysis - Analysis
of Alternative - Software Packages for EIA - Expert Systems in EIA.
UNIT III PREDICTION AND ASSESSMENT 9
Prediction tools for EIA - Mathematical modelling for impact prediction - Assessment of Impacts on Air, Water and
Soil - Assessment of Impacts on Biological Community - Cumulative Impact Assessment - Documentation of EIA
findings -Report Preparation.
UNIT IV SOCIO-ECONOMIC IMPACT ASSESSMENT 9
Definition of Social Impact Assessment - Social Impact Assessment model and the planning process - Rationale
and measurement for SIA variables- Relationship between social impacts and change in community and
institutional arrangements - Individual and family level impacts - Communities in transition - Neighbourhood and
community impacts - Selecting, testing and understanding significant social impacts - Mitigation and
enhancement in social assessment - Environmental costing of projects.
UNIT V ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN 9
Environmental Management Plan - Preparation - EMP - Implementation and Review - Mitigation and
Rehabilitation plans - Policy and guidelines for planning and monitoring programmes - Post Project Audit - Ethical
and Quality aspects of Environmental Impact Assessment - Case Studies - EIA related to infrastructure,
Construction and Housing - Mining - Industrial Projects - Thermal Power - River Valley and Hydroelectric- Coastal
Projects -Nuclear Power.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Petts, J., Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment, Vol., I and II, Blackwell science, London, 1999.
2. Canter, L.W., Environmental Impact Assessment, McGraw Hill, New York, 1996
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Lawrence, D.P., Environmental Impact Assessment Practical Solutions to recurrent problems, Wiley-
Interscience, New Jersey, 2003.
15CEA09 FUNDAMENTALS OF SUPPLY CHAIN L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the fundamentals of the supply chain.

To provide knowledge on designing the supply chain network
To provide exposure on various types of facility location and network design
To impart knowledge on planning and managing of inventories in a supply chain.
To provide experience on sourcing, transportation and pricing products.
124
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to;
Comprehend the concepts behind the supply chain network.

Design the supply chain network.
Locate the facilities and design the network.
Plan and manage the inventories in a supply chain.
Do the sourcing, transportation and pricing products.
Knowledge on Engineering Economics & Cost analysis
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO SUPPLY CHAIN 9
Supply chain systems -Stages and decision phases and process view of supply chain - Supply chain flows -
Examples of supply chains -Competitive supply chain strategies -Drivers for supply chain performance.
UNIT II DESIGNING THE SUPPLY CHAIN NETWORK 9
Distribution Networking Role, Design - Supply Chain Network - SCN Role Factors -Framework for design
decisions.
UNIT III FACILITY LOCATION AND NETWORK DESIGN 9
Models for facility location and capacity location - Impact of uncertainty on SCN -Discounted cash flow analysis -
Evaluating network design decisions using decision trees - Analytical problems.
UNIT IV PLANNING AND MANAGING OF INVENTORIES IN A SUPPLY CHAIN 9
Inventory concepts -Trade promotions -Managing multi-echelon cycle inventory -Safety inventory determination -
Impact of supply uncertainty aggregation and replenishment.
UNITV SOURCING, TRANSPORTATION AND PRICING PRODUCTS 9
Role of sourcing -Supplier- Scoring and assessment - Selection and contracts -Design collaboration -Role of
transportation -Models of transportation and designing transportation network - Revenue management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Blanchard, D., Supply chain management: Best practices, John Wiley &Sons,New Jersey,2007.
2. Simchi-Levi, David, Xin Chen, and JulienBramel,The Logic of Logistics: Theory, Algorithms, andApplications
nd
for Logistics and Supply Chain Management 2 edition. Springer, New York, 2004.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Graves, S. C., and A. G. De Kok, Handbook in operations research and management science Vol.
11,Elsevier Publishing Company, 2003.
15CEA10 COASTAL ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
125
To provide knowledge on various aspects of coastal engineering
To provide an overview of the analysis and design procedures used in the field of coastal engineering
To understand the various issues connected with coastal sediment transport
To familiarize with planning and design of various coastal protection works
To impart knowledge on various types of modeling aspects
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Acquire knowledge on wave theory

Apply these engineering principles to solve the problems
Understand the basic concepts of coastal sediment transport
Design shore defense structures
Develop site specific physical and numerical models
Knowledge on Water Resources Engineering
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO COASTAL ENGINEERING 9
Introduction - Wind and waves - Sea and Swell - Introduction to small amplitude wave theory -Use of wave
tables- Mechanics of water waves - Linear (Airy) wave theory.
UNIT II WAVE PROPERTIES AND ANALYSIS 9
Introduction to non-linear waves and their properties - Waves in shallow waters - Wave Refraction - Diffraction
and Shoaling - Hinds east wave generation models -Wave shoaling -Wave refraction -Wave breaking - Wave
diffraction random and 3D waves- Short term wave analysis -Wave spectra and its utilities - Long term wave
analysis- Statistics analysis of grouped wave data
UNIT III COASTAL SEDIMENT TRANSPORT 9
Dynamic beach profile -Cross-shore transport -Along shore transport (Littoral transport) -Sediment movement
UNIT IV COASTAL DEFENSE 9
Field measurement -Models, groins, sea walls, offshore breakwaters and artificial nourishment -Planning of coast
protection works - Design of shore defence structures Case studies
UNIT V MODELING IN COASTAL ENGINEERING 9
Physical modeming in Coastal Engineering - Limitations and advantages - Role of physical modelling in coastal
engineering - Numerical modelling - Modelling aspects -Limitations - Case studies using public domain models
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. US Army Corps of Engineers, Coastal Engineering Manual, Vol. I-VI, Coastal Engineering Research
Centre, Department of the Army, Washington DC, 2006.
2. Kamphuis, J.W. Introduction to Coastal Engineering and Management, 2000.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. US Army Corps of Engineers, Coastal Engineering Manual, Vol. I-VI, Coastal Engineering Research
Centre, Department of the Army, Washington DC, 2006.
2. Kamphuis, J.W. Introduction to Coastal Engineering and Management, 2000
126
3. Dean, R.G. and Dalrymple, R.A. Water wave mechanics for Engineers and Scientists, Prentice-Hall, Inc.,
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, 1994
4. Sorenson, R.M. Basic Coastal Engineering, Wiley-Interscience Publication, New York, 1978.
15CEA11 MANUFACTURING COST ESTIMATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basics of cost estimation and different types of cost estimating methods.
To impart clear knowledge on cost and various factory expenses.
To gain knowledge on budget and measures of cost economics.
To compute the cost estimation in different shops.
To calculate machining time and cost for the different process.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Comprehend the different types of cost estimating methods.

Gain knowledge on calculating cost and expenses of various factory processes.
Acquire knowledge on measures of cost economics and able to create budget for the industry.
Calculate the process cost involved in different shops.
Work out machining time and cost for the different process.
Knowledge on Estimation
UNIT I COST ESTIMATION 9
Objective of cost estimation- Costing -Cost accounting- Classification of cost-Elements of cost- Types of
estimates -Methods of estimates -Data requirements and sources- Collection of cost- Allowances in estimation.
UNIT II COSTS AND EXPENSES 9
Aims of costing and estimation - Functions and procedure - Introduction to costs- Computing material cost- Direct
labor cost-Analysis of overhead costs - Factory expenses-Administrative expenses-Selling and distributing
expenses - Cost ladder - Cost of product.
UNIT III COST ECONOMICS 9
Budget -Need and Types - Budgetary control - Objectives and Benefits - Measures of cost economics - Make or
buy decision and Analysis - Depreciation - Causes of depreciation -Methods of Depreciation - Allocation of
overheads.
UNIT IV ESTIMATION OF COSTS IN DIFFERENT SHOPS 9
Estimation in Forging shop - Losses in forging - Forging cost-Estimation in welding shop - Gas cutting - Electric
welding-Estimation in foundry shop - Pattern cost - Casting cost - Illustrative examples.
UNIT V ESTIMATION OF MACHINING TIMES AND COSTS 9
Estimation of machining time for lathe operations - Drilling, Boring, Shaping, Planning, Milling and Grinding
operations - Illustrative examples.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
127
TEXT BOOKS:
1. R. Kesavan, C. Elanchezhian, B. VijayaRamanath, Process Planning And Cost Estimation, New Age
International (P) Ltd., Second Edition, 2015
2. Chitale.A.K and Gupta.R.C, Product Design and manufacturing, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, Sixth
Edition, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Adithan. M, Process Planning And Cost Estimation, New Age International (P) Ltd., Second Edition, 2015.
2. Banga.T.R and Sharma.S.C, Mechanical Estimating and Costing including contracting, Khanna publishers,
New Delhi, 2012.
3. Joseph G. Monks, Operations Management, Theory and Problems, McGraw Hill Book Company, New
Delhi, 2001.
4. Narang.G.B.S and Kumar.V, Production and Planning, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, Fourth edition 2010.
5. Adithan.M. and Pabla.B.S, Estimating and costing for the Metal Manufacturing Industries, CRC press,
1992.
Offered by EEE Department
15EEA01 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on
Measurement of force, torque and speed.
Measurement of industrial parameters like acceleration, Vibration and density.
Monitoring techniques for pressure in industrial process.
Advanced techniques for temperature and high temperature measurement.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Analyze Instrumentation systems and explain their applications to various industries.
Measure the changes in pressure, temperature in an industry.
COURSE PREREQUISITES:
Basics of measurements standards Instrumentation system Basic knowledge on industrial process.
UNITI CHARACTERISTICS, ERRORS & STANDARDS OF INSTRUMENTS 9
Functional elements of generalized instrumentation systems- Static and dynamic characteristics of measuring
instruments- Absolute, gross, systematic, random and limiting errors in measurements - Statistical estimation of
measurements data (Arithmetic mean, Average deviation, Standard deviation, Variance and Probable error of
mean) Standards and calibration.
UNITII MEASUREMENT OF ACCELERATION, VIBRATION AND FORCE 9
Accelerometers: - LVDT, Piezoelectric, Strain gauge and Variable reluctance type accelerometers - Seismic
instruments as accelerometer - Vibration sensor. Different types of load cells - Hydraulic, Pneumatic, strain
gauge and Piezoelectric load cells
UNITIII PRESSURE MEASUREMENT 9
Units of pressure Manometers and their types,-McLeod Gauge-Elastic type pressure gauges: Bourdon tube,
128
bellows and diaphragms - Capacitive type pressure gauge Piezo-resistive pressure sensor- Thermal
conductivity gauges Ionization gauge - calibration of pressure gauges.Dead weight tester.
UNITIV LOW TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT 9
Definitions and standards - Primary and secondary fixed points - Calibration of thermometers - Different types of
filled in system thermometers - Bimetallic thermometers - RTD - characteristics and signal conditioning-3 lead
and 4 lead RTDs - Thermistors.
UNITV HIGH TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT 9
Thermocouples - Laws of thermocouple - Fabrication of industrial thermocouples Compensating cable- Signal

conditioning for thermocouple - Radiation fundamentals - Radiation methods of temperature measurement - Total
radiation pyrometers - Optical pyrometers.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Doebellin, E.O.and Manik D.N., Measurement systems Application and Design, Special Indian Edition,
Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd, 2007.
2. Jones. B.E, "Instrument Technology, Vol.2, Butterworth-Heinemann, International Edition, 2003.
3. A. K. Sawhney, Puneet Sawhney, Course in Mechanical Measurements and Instrumentation and
Control, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, New Delhi, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Liptak, B.G., Instrumentation Engineers Handbook (Measurement), CRC Press, 2005

2. Patranabis,D., Principles of Industrial Instrumentation, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.
3. Eckman D.P., Industrial Instrumentation, Wiley Eastern Limited, 2003.
4. S.K.Singh., Industrial Instrumentation and Control, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw - Hill Education, 2008.
5. Jain, R.K., Mechanical and Industrial Measurements, Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 1999.
15EEA02 ILLUMINATION ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart in-depth knowledge on illumination and requirements of energy efficient lighting.

To make the students familiar with measurement of illumination.
To make the students design a lighting scheme.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to

Explicate the different types of lighting schemes.
Elucidate the measurement of light.
Explain the working of different lamps.
Demonstrate the ability to design illumination systems for desired specifications.
Demonstrate the awareness of impact of energy conservation approach to illumination systems.
Basics of Electrical Engineering, awareness about artificial lighting, Energy Conservation, Algebra, Trigonometry.
UNITI LIGHTING FUNDAMENTALS 9
129
Nature of light Importance of lighting sensitivity of eye colour sensation Quantum theory of light Terms
used in illumination Polar Curve Laws of illumination Illumination at a point Types of reflection Types of
lighting schemes Requirements of good lighting Stroboscopic effect Factory lighting Flood lighting
Street lighting.
UNITII PHOTOMETRY 9
Grease Spot Photometer Head Lummer - Brodhun Photometer Head Flicker Photometer Measurement of
MSCP by Integrating Sphere Photovoltaic cell Distribution photometry Illumination Photometer.
UNITIII LAMPS AND FITTINGS 9
Filament lamps Arc lamps Fluorescent lamps Mercury Vapour lamps Sodium Vapour lamps Halogen
lamps Neon lamps Induction lamps Emergency Lamps lighting for displays and signaling neon signs,
Lamp fittings Symmetrical fittings, Asymmetrical fittings.
UNITIV LIGHTING DESIGN AND CALCULATIONS 9
Basic design of illumination schemes for residential, commercial, street lighting, and sports ground. Selection of
lamps Calculation of wattage, number and arrangement of lamps Space height ratio Calculation of
illumination level available.
UNITV ENERGY EFFICIENT LAMPS AND WIRING METHODOLOGY 9
Compact Fluorescent Lamp (CFL) Selection of CFL Lumens output Disposal of waste CFL Limitations of
CFL Cold Cathode CFL, LED Terminologies Choice of LED Lamps for different lighting requirements
Benefits of LED lighting CFL Vs LED lighting, 12V DC home wiring Solar powered lamps Importance
Constraints in 12V DC wiring Voltage Regulation devices wiring and distribution, Necessary Appliances.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Joseph B. Murdoch, "Illumination Engineering from Edison's Lamp to the Laser, second edition, Visions
Comm., 1994.
2. Jack L. Lindsey, "Applied Illumination Engineering" The Fairmont Press Inc., 1991.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ronald N. Helms, M. Clay Beicher, "Lighting for Energy Efficient Luminous Environments", Prentice
Hall, 1991.
2. Marc Schiler, "Simplified Design of Building Lighting" John Wiley and Sons, 1992.
3. IES Lighting Handbook, 8th edition, 1993.
4. C.L. Wadhwa, Generation, Distribution and Utilization of Electrical Energy, New Age International Pvt.
Ltd, Third Edition 2015.
5. J.B. Gupta, Utilization of Electric Power and Electric Traction, S.K.Kataria and Sons, Eleventh Edition
2015.
6. G.C.Garg, Utilization of Electric Power and Electric Traction, Khanna Publishers, Ninth Edition 2009.
7. A.Chakrabarti, M.L.Soni, P.V.Gupta, U.S.Bhatnagar, A text Book on Power System Engineering,
Dhanpat Rai and Co, New Delhi, 2009.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://energy.gov/energysaver/articles/induction-lighting-old-lighting-technology-made-new-again
2. http://www.buildings.com/article-details/articleid/18718/title/led-vs-induction-lighting/viewall/true.aspx
3. http://www.edisontechcenter.org/InductionLamps.html
4. http://eartheasy.com/live_energyeff_lighting.htm
5. http://dreamgreenhouse.com/designs/12v/index.php
6. http://www.treehugger.com/sustainable-product-design/big-steps-in-building-change-our-wiring-to-12-
130
volt-dc.html
7. https://www.nelt.co.jp/english/products/ccfl/about.html
15EEA03 SWITCH MODE POWER CONVERTERS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Different types of power semi-conductor devices and their switching characteristics.
Operation, characteristics and performance parameters of controlled rectifiers.
Operation, switching techniques and basic topologies of DC-DC switching regulators.
Different modulation techniques of pulse width modulated inverters and to understand the harmonic
reduction methods.
Operation of AC voltage controllers
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Identify and select the switching devices for different power converter applications.
Design a suitable DC power supply for given load specification from AC or DC supply.
Design and analyze the single or three phase inverter.
Analyze the AC voltage controller
Semiconductor physics, Steady state operation of single phase AC circuits, Differentiation, Integration and
Fourier series
UNITI POWER SEMI-CONDUCTOR DEVICES 9
Introduction to Power Electronics - Study of switching devices: structure, operation, static and switching
characteristics of SCR, TRIAC, BJT, MOSFET, IGBT-SCR: Two Transistor model, turn on circuits and
commutation circuits
UNITII PHASE-CONTROLLED CONVERTERS 9
1-pulse, 2-pulse converters - circuit, operation, waveforms - Estimation of average load voltage and average
load current for continuous current operation - Input power factor estimation for ripple free load current
UNITIII DC TO DC CONVERTER 9
Step-down and step-up chopper - Time ratio control and current limit control Buck, boost, buck-boost
converter-Isolated Converters: Fly back and Forward converter
UNITIV INVERTERS 9
0 0
Single phase and three phase inverters (both 120 mode and 180 mode) - PWM techniques: single, multiple,
sinusoidal PWM, modified sinusoidal PWM Voltage and harmonic control
UNITV AC TO AC CONVERTERS 9
Single phase AC voltage controllers Integral cycle control, phase angle control - Estimation of RMS load
voltage, RMS load current and input power factor - Single phase cycloconverter
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
131
TEXTBOOKS:
th
1. Muhammad H.Rashid, Power Electronics Circuits, Devices and Applications, Pearson Publication, 4
Edition, 2004.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Mohan, Undeland, Robbins,Power Electronics: Converters Applications and Design, John Wiley &
Sons, 3rd Edition, 2003
2. Robert W. Erickson, Dragan Maksimovic, Fundamentals of Power Electronics, Springer Science &
nd
Business Media, 2 edition 2001.
15EEA04 POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Power generation through various methods.
Importance of measuring devices in power plant.
Boiler control techniques and turbine control techniques.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Demonstrate the measurement of various power plant parameters.
Implement various Control techniques in power generation process.
Basics of Measurements & instrumentation Power plant working concepts - Knowledge on power plant
parameters controls Fundamentals of control system .
UNITI MEASUREMENTS & INSTRUMENTATION IN POWER PLANT - I 9

Importance of measurement and instrumentation in power plant. Measurement of water purity- Measurement of
dissolved oxygen in feed water- Measurement of PH value of water- Measurement of O2,CO2, and CO content in
the gases - Measurement of Smoke and Dust- Dosimeters.
UNITII MEASUREMENTS & INSTRUMENTATION IN POWER PLANT - II 9
Measurement of feed water flow, air flow, steam flow and coal flow Drum level measurement Steam pressure
and temperature measurement Turbine speed and vibration measurement.
UNITIII BOILER CONTROL 9
Combustion of fuel and excess air Firing rate demand Steam temperature control Drum level control
Single, two and three element control Furnace draft controlflue gas dew point control.
UNITIV BURNER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 9
Burners for liquid and solid fuels Burner management Furnace safety interlocks Coal pulverizer control
Combustion control for liquid and solid fuel fired boilers air/fuel ratio control.
UNITV CONTROL OF TURBINE 9
Types of steam turbines impulse and reaction turbines compounding Turbine governing system Speed
and Load control- Basics of Automatic Load Frequency Control- Free Governor Mode of Operation (FGMO) -
132
Restricted Governor Mode of Operation (RGMO).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. S.C.Arora,S. Domkundwar, Power plant EngineeringDhanpat Rai &Co (P)Ltd,2015.

2. Sam Dukelow, Control of Boilers, Instrument Society of America, 2009.
3. Everett Woodruff , Herbert Lammers, Thomas Lammers, Steam Plant Operation,9th Edition
McGraw Hill, 2012.
4. Rajput R.K., A Text book of Power plant Engineering. 5th Edition, Lakshmi Publications, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Liptak B.G., Instrumentation in Process Industries, Chilton Book Company, 2005.

2. Jain R.K., Mechanical and Industrial Measurements, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2010.
3. P.K.Nag, Powerplant Engineering, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 3rd edition, 2007.
4. Tamilmani, Power plant instrumentation, Sams Publishers, 2011.
5. Krishnaswamy.K and Ponnibala.M., Power Plant Instrumentation, PHI Learning Pvt.Ltd., New
Delhi, 2011.
15EEA05 ELECTRICAL MACHINES AND DRIVES L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The basic concepts of different types of electrical machines and their performance.
The different methods of starting D.C motors and induction motors.
Conventional and solid-state DC and AC drives.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Demonstrate the concepts and different types of electrical machines.
Deliver the impact of starting D.C motors and induction motors.
Explain about conventional and solid-state DC and AC drives.
Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering
UNITI INTRODUCTION TO D.C. MACHINES 9
DC Machine Construction DC generator - Principle of operation EMF equation Self and separately excited
generators Characteristics of series, shunt and compound generators. DC motorPrinciple of operation Back
emf and torque equation characteristics - applications.
UNITII A.C. MACHINES 9
Alternators Construction Types Induced EMF Voltage regulation EMF and MMF methods. Three-phase
induction motors Construction Types Principle of operation slip-torque characteristics. Single-phase
induction motors ConstructionTypes Principle of operation.
UNITIII STARTING METHODS 9
Types of D.C Motor starters Two point, three point and four point starter. Types of A.C Motor starters DOL,
133
Auto transformer, Star-Delta and Rotor Resistance starter.
UNITIV CONVENTIONAL AND SOLID STATE SPEED CONTROL OF D.C. 9

DRIVES (Qualitative treatment only)
Speed control of DC series and shunt motors Armature and field control, Ward- Leonard control system - Using
controlled rectifiers and DC choppers(Circuit diagram and operation) applications.
UNITV CONVENTIONAL AND SOLID STATE SPEED CONTROL 9

OF A.C. DRIVES (Qualitative treatment only)
Speed control of three phase induction motor Voltage control, V/f control, slip power recovery scheme Using
inverters and AC voltage regulators (Circuit diagram and operation) applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
rd
1. A K Theraja & B L Theraja A Text Book of Electrical Technology Vol-2, 23 Edition S.Chand
Publications, 2007.
2. Dubey G.K., Fundamentals of Electrical Drives, Narosa Publishing House, Second Edition, 2015.
.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. P.C.Sen.,Principles of Electrical Machines and Power Electronics, Second Edition ,Wiley India Pvt.
Lt&Sons. 2013.
2. K. Murugesh Kumar, Electric Machines, Vikas publishing house Pvt Ltd, 2002.
3. M.D.Singh, K.B.Khanchandani, Power Electronics, Second Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2002.
4. Vedam Subramanyam, Electric Drives Concepts and Applications, Second Edition, McGraw Hill,
2010.
5. Nagrath .I.J. & Kothari .D.P, Electrical Machines ,Fourth Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2010.
15EEA06 REAL TIME EMBEDDED SYSTEMS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The architecture and programming of ARM processor.
The embedded computing platform design and analysis.
The basic concepts of real time Operating system.
The fundamentals of filters.
The system design techniques and networks for embedded systems
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to:
Describe the architecture and programming of ARM processor..
Explain the basic concepts of real time Operating system design.
Use the system design techniques to develop software for embedded systems.
Model real-time applications using embedded-system concepts.
134
Basics of Microprocessor and Microcontrollers
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED COMPUTING AND ARM 9

PROCESSORS
Complex systems and micro processors Embedded system design process Design example: Model train
controller- Instruction sets preliminaries ARM Processor CPU: programming input and output- supervisor
mode, exceptions and traps Co-processors- Memory system mechanisms CPU performance- CPU power
consumption.
UNIT II EMBEDDED COMPUTING PLATFORM AND DESIGN ANALYSIS 9
CPU buses Memory devices I/O devices Component interfacing Design with microprocessors
Development and Debugging Program design Model of programs Assembly and Linking Basic
compilation techniques Analysis and optimization of execution time, power, energy, program size Program
validation and testing.
UNIT III PROCESSES AND OPERATING SYSTEMS 9
Multiple tasks and multi processes Processes Context Switching Operating Systems Scheduling policies -
Multiprocessor Inter Process Communication mechanisms Evaluating operating system performance Power
optimization strategies for processes.
UNIT IV SYSTEM DESIGN TECHNIQUES AND NETWORKS 9
Design methodologies- Design flows Requirement Analysis Specifications-System analysis and architecture
design Quality Assurance techniques- Distributed embedded systems MPSoCs and shared memory
multiprocessors.
UNIT V CASE STUDY 9
Data compressor Alarm Clock Audio player Software modem-Digital still camera Telephone answering
machine-Engine control unit Video accelerator.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Wayne Wolf, Computers as Components - Principles of Embedded Computer System Design, Morgan
Kaufmann Publisher, 2006.
2. Marilyn Wolf, Computers as Components Principles of Embedded Computing System Design, Third
Edition Morgan Kaufmann Publisher (An imprint from Elsevier), 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Jonathan W.Valvano, Embedded Microcomputer Systems Real Time Interfacing, Third Edition
Cengage Learning, 2012.
2. David. E. Simon, An Embedded Software Primer, 1st Edition, Fifth Impression, Addison-Wesley
Professional, 2007.
3. Raymond J.A. Buhr, Donald L.Bailey, An Introduction to Real-Time Systems- From Design to
Networking with C/C++, Prentice Hall, 1999.
4. C.M. Krishna, Kang G. Shin, Real-Time Systems, International Editions, Mc Graw Hill 1997
5. K.V.K.K.Prasad, Embedded Real-Time Systems: Concepts, Design & Programming, Dream Tech
Press, 2005.
6. Sriram V Iyer, Pankaj Gupta, Embedded Real Time Systems Programming, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2004.
15EEA07 FUNDAMENTALS OF ELECTRIC POWER UTILIZATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
135
Different types of lamps
Methods of heating and welding
Refrigeration and Air Conditioning
Electrolytic processes and storage of electricity
Electric traction systems
Electrical energy conservation
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Elucidate the working of various electric lamps and the various types of electric heating, electric welding
and design a heating element
Explain the working principle of refrigerators and Air Conditioning System
Explain about electrolytic processes and storage of electricity
Explain about electric traction.
Explicate the importance of electrical energy conservation and apply various measures for economic
aspects of utilising electrical energy
Basics of Electrical Engineering, Effects of electric current, Chemical reactions in electrolyte, awareness about
artificial lighting, refrigeration and air conditioning, Characteristics and application of different electric motors,
awareness about traction, Algebra, Trigonometry.
UNITI ILLUMINATION, INDUSTRIAL HEATING AND WELDING 9
Different types of lamps - incandescent fluorescent mercury vapour lamps.

Role of electric heating for industrial applications resistance heating induction heating dielectric heating -
electric arc furnaces.
Brief introduction to electric welding welding generator, welding transformer and their characteristics.
UNITII REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 9
Principle of a refrigerator Vapour Compression System Mechanical and Electrical circuits Voltage Regulator
Water Cooler Coefficient of Performance Standard rating Maintenance and trouble shooting of
refrigerators Air conditioning system Types operation Mechanical and Electrical circuits Cooling
capacity Thermo-electric Refrigeration Central Air Conditioning System.
UNITIII ELECTROLYTIC PROCESSES AND STORAGE OF ELECTRICITY 9
Electrolysis, Faradays laws of Electrolysis Electroplating Electrical Equipments Agitation and Filtration
Plant Extraction and refining of metals Storage of Electricity Lead Acid Battery Characteristics
Indications of a fully charged battery Nickel iron and Nickel cadmium batteries Applications Capacity rating
of batteries Charging and maintenance of batteries Battery chargers.
UNITIV ELECTRIC TRACTION 9
Merits of electric traction requirements of electric traction system supply systems traction motors d.c.
series motor mechanics of train movement Speed Time curve tractive effort specific energy consumption.
UNITV ECONOMIC ASPECTS OF ELECTRICAL ENERGY UTILISATION 9
Introduction to Energy conservation and Energy auditing - Tools for Energy auditing Energy conservation in
Chemical industry, Pulp and Paper industry, Sugar industry, Cement industry, Textile industry, Iron and Steel
Industry Energy Conservation in household and commercial sectors Energy Conservation Legislation
Tariffs - Influence of power factor The most economic power factor - PF improvement.
136
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. C.L. Wadhwa, Generation, Distribution and Utilization of Electrical Energy, New Age International Pvt.
Ltd, Third Edition 2015.
2. E. Openshaw Taylor, Utilization of Electrical Energy in SI Units, Orient Longman Pvt. Ltd, Eleventh
Edition 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. H. Partab, Art and Science of Utilisation of Electrical Energy, Dhanpat Rai and Co, New Delhi, Third
Edition 2014.
2. J.B. Gupta, Utilization of Electric Power and Electric Traction, S.K.Kataria and Sons, Eleventh Edition
2015.
3. G.C.Garg, Utilization of Electric Power and Electric Traction, Khanna Publishers, Ninth Edition 2009.
4. A.Chakrabarti, M.L.Soni, P.V.Gupta, U.S.Bhatnagar, A text Book on Power System Engineering,
Dhanpat Rai and Co, New Delhi, 2009.
5. N.V.Suryanarayana, Utilisation of Electric Power : Including Electric Drives and Electric Traction, New
Age International Publishers, Second Edition 2014.
6. V.K.Mehta, Rohit Mehta, Basic Electrical Engineering, S.Chand Limited, 2008.
15EEA08 SOFT COMPUTING TECHNIQUES AND APPLICATIONS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To provide an introduction to the emerging area of intelligent control and optimization.

To impart knowledge on expert systems, fuzzy logic systems, artificial neural networks and optimization
techniques.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Explain the concept of intelligent control and their applications.
Analyze Fuzzy Logic and Artificial Neural Networks through case studies.
Design Genetic Algorithms system through case study.
Basic understanding of problem solving, design and analysis of algorithms, Algebra, Elementary differential
Calculus, probability, basic knowledge on human nervous system and nervous cells.
UNITI INTRODUCTION 9
Approaches to intelligent control Architecture for intelligent control Symbolic reasoning system rule-based
systems the AI approach Knowledge representation Expert systems.
UNITII ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS 9
Concept of Artificial Neural Network and its basic mathematical model McCulloch-Pitts neuron model simple
perceptron Adaline and Madaline Feed-forward Multilayer Perceptron Learning and Training the neural
network Hopfield network Self-organizing network Neural Network based controller.
UNITIII GENETIC ALGORITHM AND ANT-COLONY OPTIMIZATION 9
137
TECHNIQUE
Basic concept of Genetic algorithm and detailed algorithmic steps Flowchart GA operators adjustment of
GA parameters Concept of ant-colony search technique for solving optimization problems.
UNITIV FUZZY LOGIC SYSTEM 9
Introduction to crisp sets and fuzzy sets basic fuzzy set operation and approximate reasoning Introduction to
fuzzy logic modeling and control Fuzzification inferencing and defuzzification Fuzzy knowledge and rule
bases.
UNITV APPLICATIONS 9
Applications of Neural Network to engineering problems GA applications to engineering optimisation problems

Fuzzy modeling and control schemes for non-linear systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Sivanandam S.N., Deepa S.N., Principles of Soft Computing, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., Reprint 2012.
2. Jang J.S.R., Sun C.T. and Mizutani E., Neuro-Fuzzy and Soft Computing: A Computational Approach
to Learning and Machine Intelligence, PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Jacek.M.Zurada, Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems, Jaico Publishing House, 1999.

2. Klir G.J., Folger T.A., Fuzzy sets, uncertainty and Information, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 1993.
3. Zimmerman H.J., Fuzzy set theory-and its Applications, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1994.
4. Driankov D., Hellendoorn H., Reinfrank M., Introduction to Fuzzy Control, Narosa Publishers, 2001.
5. Goldberg D.E., Genetic algorithms in Search, Optimization and Machine learning, Addison Wesley,
1989.
6. Padhy N.P., Artificial Intelligence and Intelligent System, Oxford University Press, 2005.
7. Allain Bonnet, Artificial Intelligence Promise and Performance, Prentice Hall International Publishers,
1985.
8. Sivanandam S.N., Paulraj M., Introduction to Artificial Neural Networks, Vikas Publishing House Pvt.
Ltd., First Edition, 2003.
9. Donald A. Waterman, A Guide to Expert Systems, Addison-Wesley Publishers, Second Edition, 1993.
15EEA09 FUNDAMENTALS OF POWER QUALITY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Various Power Quality issues.
Power quality problems and methods of control.
Various methods of power quality monitoring and suppression.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Analyze the various power quality issues.
Analyze the power quality events and assessment.
Mitigate the power quality problems using relevant devices.
138
UNITI INTRODUCTION TO POWER QUALITY 9
Terms and definitions: Overloading, under voltage, sustained interruption; sags and swells; waveform distortion,
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD), Computer Business Equipment Manufacturers Associations (CBEMA) curve.
UNITII VOLTAGE SAGS ANDSWELLS 9
Sources of sags and interruptions, estimating voltage sag performance, motor starting sags, estimating the sag
severity, fast transfer switches- Sources of over voltages: Capacitor switching, lightning, ferro-resonance;
mitigation of voltage swells
UNITIII HARMONICS 9
Harmonic distortion: Voltage and current distortion, THD-TDD, harmonic sources from commercial and industrial
loads, locating harmonic sources- resonance-harmonic distortion evaluation, devices for controlling harmonic
distortion, passive filters, active filters
UNITIV Power Quality Benchmarking 9
Benchmarking Process-RMS voltage variation Indices-Harmonic Indices-Power Quality Contracts-Power Quality

Insurance
UNITV POWER QUALITY MONITORING 9
Monitoring consideration-Power quality measurement equipment: harmonic / spectrum analyzer, flicker meters,
disturbance analyzer- applications of expert system for power quality monitoring.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Roger.C.Dugan, Mark.F.McGranagham, Surya Santoso, H.Wayne Beaty, Electrical Power Systems

Quality, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New Delhi, Third Edition, 2013.
2. Math H.J.Bollen, Understanding Power Quality Problems-Voltage Sag & Interruptions, (New York:
IEEE press, 2000).
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. C.Sankaran, Power Quality, CRC press, 2002.

2. Arindam Ghosh, Power Quality Enhancement Using Custom Power Devices, Springer International
Edition, 2002
3. PSCAD User Manual.
4. J.Arrilaga, N.R.Watson, S.Chen, Power System Quality Assessment, John Wiley & Sons, 2000.
15EEA10 WIRING, ESTIMATION AND COSTING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Electrical supply systems and its protection equipments
Different wiring methods
Estimation for electrical wiring
COURSE OUTCOMES:
139
Address Electrical supply systems and its protection equipments
Explain about different wiring methods
Estimate for a wiring system
Electrical supply system-Three-phase four wire distribution system-Types of domestic loads-Protection against
Electric shock-Earthing- Domestic Wiring Protection equipments: Fuse-Miniature Circuit Breaker Residual
Current Circuit Breaker or Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker-General requirements of Electrical Installations
UNITII TYPES AND INSTALLATION OF WIRING SYSTEMS 9
Types of wires, Factors influencing the choice of wiring system, Types of wiring system, Conduit Wiring System,
Accessories, Advantages and Disadvantages of Conduit Wiring Systems, IE rules, 1956: rules 50, 56, 57, 58,
60,61 Internal wiring systems Looping-in system Ring system tree system - Position of switches, cutouts,
main switch board, sub-distribution boards
UNITIII DESIGN OF SIMPLE ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT 9
System of Connection of Appliances and accessories-Schematic diagram and Wiring diagram of Light and Fan
circuits-Wiring diagram of a single tube light controlled by a switch-Alarm circuits without relays-Alarm circuits
with relays
UNITIV ELEMENTS OF ESTIMATION 9
Introduction -Purpose of Estimating and Costing-Qualities of a good Estimator-Essential Elements of Estimating

and Costing-Tender-Guidelines for Inviting Tenders-Quotation-Other Important Factors of Estimating and Costing
UNITV DOMESTIC ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION AND ESTIMATES 9
Estimation of load requirements-Estimation of connected load, Maximum demand, and type of supply required for
a domestic building and related problem- Determination of size of distribution boards Different types of
commonly available distribution boards-Estimation of Accessories required, wiring materials and labour
requirement for a domestic building and related problem-Pre-commissioning tests for domestic wiring Installation:
Visual Inspection, Testing- Special features applicable for High-Rise apartment buildings
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
th
1. Uppal S.L, Electrical Wiring - Estimating and Costing, Khanna Publishers, 6 Edition, 2011
2. Giridharan M.K., Electrical Systems Design, I.K. International Publishing House, New Delhi, 2011
3. Raina K.B., Bhattacharya S.K., Electrical Design Estimating and Costing, New Age International Pvt.
Ltd., Publishers, 1991.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
th
1. J.B. Gupta, A Course in Electrical Installation Estimating and Costing, S. K. Kataria & Sons, 9
Edition, 2012
Offered by CSE Department
140
15CSA01 INTERNET PROGRAMMING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To identify the basics of Internet and its protocol
To learn HTML5 controls for the creation of static web pages
To present HTML documents using Cascading Style Sheets (CSS).
To learn to create user interactive web pages using JavaScript and DOM
To handle the clients requests at the server end using PHP
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Exploit the basics of Internet and realize the significance of HTTP protocol in the WWW.
Develop website using HTML5
Design interesting and appealing HTML pages using CSS
Validate the users data using JavaScript
Access and process various elements of web pages using DOM
Generate dynamic response to client request using PHP
PREREQUISITES:
Programming Principles
UNIT I BASICS OF NETWORK AND WEB CONCEPTS 9
Types of Network Reason for Networks Communication between Computers Serial and Parallel
Communication Asynchronous and Synchronous Communication Simplex, Half-Duplex, Full-Duplex
Communications Data Rate, Bandwidth and Throughput Switched Connections Topologies used in
Networking Basic Internet Protocols The World Wide Web HTTP Request Message HTTP Response
Message Web Clients Web Servers
UNIT II HTML5 9
Introduction to HTML5 Editing HTML5 W3C HTML validation service Headings Linking - Images Special
characters and horizontal rules Lists Tables Forms Internal linking - Meta elements New HTML5 Form
input types Input and datalist elements and auto complete attribute Page structure elements Introduction to
Canvas Canvas Coordinate System Rectangles Drawing arcs and circles Shadows
UNIT III CSS3, JAVASCRIPT 9
Types of CSS Conflicting style sheets Positioning Elements Element Dimension Box model and Text Flow
Media types Media Queries Drop-Down Menus Text shadows Rounded corners Color Box
Shadows. Introduction to JavaScript Syntax - Variables and Data types JavaScript Control Statements
Operators Literals - Functions Objects Arrays Built-in objects
UNIT IV DOCUMENT OBJECT MODEL 9
Introduction to the Document Object Model Intrinsic Event Handling Modifying Element Style The Document
Tree Properties of window DOM Collections Using Timer and Dynamic Styles to create animated effects
JavaScript Event Handling Reviewing the load, mousemove, mouseover, mouseout events Form processing
with focus, blur, submit, reset Event Bubbling More Events
UNIT V PHP 9
Introduction Converting Between Data Types Arithmetic Operators Initializing and Manipulating Arrays
String Comparisons String processing with regular expressions Form Processing and Business Logic
Reading from a database Using Cookie Dynamic Content
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. P.J. Deitel, H.M. Deitel, Internet and World Wide Web How to program, Pearson Education
141
Publishers, Fifth Edition, 2009.
2. Jeffrey C. Jackson, "Web Technologies - A Computer Science Perspective", Pearson Education, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. John Cowley, "Communications and Networking An Introduction", Springer, Second Edition, 2013
2. Robert. W. Sebesta, "Programming the World Wide Web", Pearson Education, Fourth Edition, 2007.
3. Kogent Learning Solutions Inc., Html5 Black Book: Covers CSS3, JavaScript, XKL, XHTML, AJAX,
PHP and jQuery, Dreamtech Press, 2011.
4. Bates, Developing Web Applications, Wiley, 2006.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.nptel.ac.in
2. http://www.echoecho.com/javascript.htm
3. http://www.w3schools.com/php/
4. http://www.theshulers.com/whitepapers/internet_whitepaper/index.html
5. http://www.protocols.com/pbook/tcpip2/#UDP
15CSA02 FUNDAMENTALS OF SOFTWARE ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To explore the fundamental concepts of software engineering
To learn the requirements engineering process and planning for software development
To understand the software design principles
To know coding standards and different testing strategies
To learn the project management principles and quality assurance standards
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Apply software engineering principles for software development.
Formulate software requirement specification and plan for software development
Design software according to the specification
Code the software using guidelines / standards and conduct testing
Manage and maintain the software process by assuring the quality
PREREQUISITES:
Knowledge of Problem Solving Techniques is preferred
UNIT I SOFTWARE AND SOFTWARE ENGINEERING 8
The Nature of Software - Software Engineering - Software Myths Process Models: Prescriptive Process
Models, Specialized Process Models, Personal and Team Process Models Overview of Agile Process -
Overview of CMMi
UNIT II REQUIREMENTS ENGINEERING AND PLANNING 10
Requirements Engineering: Establishing the Groundwork - Eliciting Requirements - Negotiating Requirements -
Validating Requirements - Requirements Analysis using scenario based modeling. Process and Project Metrics:
Software Measurement - Metrics for Software Quality. Estimation: The Project Planning Process Resources -
Software Project Estimation - Decomposition Techniques - Empirical Estimation Models - Project Scheduling
UNIT III MODELLING AND DESIGN 9
Modelling: Data Modeling Concepts - Class-Based Modeling - Flow-Oriented Modeling - Creating a Behavioral
Model Design Concepts - Architectural Design: Software Architecture, Architectural Styles, Architectural Design,
142
Architectural Mapping Using Data Flow - User Interface Design: The Golden Rules, User Interface Analysis and
Design, Interface Analysis
UNIT IV CODING AND SOFTWARE TESTING 9
Coding standards and guidelines - Testing: Strategic approach to Software Testing - Test Strategies for
Conventional Software - Validation Testing - System Testing Debugging White-box Testing - Basis Path
Testing - Control Structure Testing - Black-box Testing
UNIT V PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND SOFTWARE QUALITY 9
Project Management Concepts: The Management Spectrum, People, Product and Process Software
Configuration Management Risk Management - Quality Management: Software Quality, Achieving Software
Quality - Elements of Software Quality Assurance - The ISO 9000 Quality Standard
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
Roger S. Pressman and Bruce R. Maxim, Software Engineering A practitioners approach, McGraw Hill
Publications, Eighth Edition, 2014
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Pankaj Jalote, An Integrated Approach to Software Engineering, Springer, Third Edition, 2005
2. Ian Sommerville, Software engineering, Pearson Education Asia, Seventh Edition, 2007.
3. Watts S.Humphrey, A Discipline for Software Engineering, Pearson Education, 2007.
4. James F.Peters and Witold Pedrycz, Software Engineering, Engineering Approach, Wiley-India, 2007.
5. Stephen R.Schach, Software Engineering, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2007.
6. S.A.Kelkar, Software Engineering, Prentice Hall of India Pvt, 2007
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.mhhe.com/pressman
2. www.rspa.com/spi/
3. http://www.comp.lancs.ac.uk/computing/resources/IanS/
4. http://www.ee.umanitoba.ca/~cilab/main.html
5. http://www.wiley.com/college/comp/peters189642
15CSA03 INTRODUCTION TO DATABASE L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To correlate the role of database management systems in information technology applications
To structure data using relational model
To explore the features of structured query language
To reduce the anomalies using Normalization
To manage transaction and concurrency control techniques.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Draw the ER Diagram for enterprise applications
Design databases using relational model
Query the database using SQL
Apply normalization techniques on the databases
Perform transaction and concurrency control techniques.
PREREQUISITES:
143
Knowledge of Data Files is preferred
UNIT I DATABASE FUNDAMENTALS 9
Purpose of Database Systems View of Data - Database System Architecture Database Users and
Administrators Data Models Structure of Network Model Structure of Hierarchical Model Entity
Relationship Model Constraints Removing Redundant Attributes in Entity Sets E-R Diagrams - Design
Issues Extended E-R Features Introduction of Relational Model E-R Reduction to Relational Schemas
UNIT II RELATIONAL DATABASE MODEL 9
Structure of Relational Databases Database Schema Schema Diagrams Relational Query Languages -
Relational Algebra Tuple Relational Calculus - Domain Relational Calculus
UNIT III STRUCTURED QUERY LANGUAGE 9
Overview of SQL query language SQL Data definition Basic Structure of SQL Queries Additional Basic
Operations Set Operations Null values Aggregate Operations Nested Subqueries Joins Views
Integrity Constraints Authorization. Introduction to Advanced SQL: Functions and Procedures Triggers
UNIT IV NORMALIZATION 9
Functional Dependencies Non-loss Decomposition Dependency Preservation - First, Second, Third Normal
Forms Boyce Codd Normal Form
UNIT V TRANSACTION AND CONCURRENCY CONTROL 9
Transaction Model ACID properties Transaction States Serializability - Conflict serializability View
Serializability Testing Serializability. Concurrency Control Lock Based Protocols Deadlocks Multiple
Granularity Time Stamp Based Protocols Validation Based Protocols
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Henry F Korth, Abraham Silberschatz, S. Sudharshan, Database System Concepts, McGraw Hill, Sixth
Edition, 2011.
2. C.J. Date, A. Kannan and S. Swamynathan, An Introduction to Database Systems, Pearson
Education, Eighth Edition, 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. R. Elmasri, S.B. Navathe, Fundamentals of Database Systems, Pearson Education/Addison Wesley,
Sixth Edition, 2010.
2. Thomas Cannolly and Carolyn Begg, Database Systems, A Practical Approach to Design,
Implementation and Management, Pearson Education, Fifth Edition, 2009.
3. Raghu Ramakrishnan, Johannes Gehrke, Database Management Systems, McGraw Hill, Third Edition
2004.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.nptel.ac.in
2. http://www.1keydata.com/datawarehousing/data-modeling-levels.html
3. http://www.cs.uwaterloo.ca/~gweddell/cs448/Arch.pdf
4. http://www.sql-tutorial.net/SQL-tutorial.asp
5. http://sqlzoo.net/
6. http://www.service-architecture.com/database/articles/ acid_properties.html
15CSA04 INTRODUCTION TO DATA STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS L T P C

3 0 0 3
144
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the basics of problem solving techniques and analysis of algorithms
To learn the various searching and sorting techniques
To impart knowledge on ADTs such as List, Stack, Queue
To explore the binary trees and priority queues
To get exposure on hashing techniques and graphs
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Analyze recursive and non recursive algorithms for complexity
Apply various searching / sorting algorithms for solving real-world problems
Implement List, Stack and Queue with appropriate data structures
Work with binary trees and heap based priority queue
Exploit the hashing technique and graph algorithms
PREREQUISITES:
Knowledge of Memory Organization, Fundamentals of C Programming
UNIT I ANALYSIS OF ALGORITHMS 9
Introduction to Algorithms and algorithmic problem solving Problem types. Analysis of Algorithms: Analysis
Framework - Asymptotic Notations Best case, worst case and average cases - Mathematical analysis of
non-recursive algorithms - Recurrence equations Solving recurrence equations - Mathematical analysis of
recursive algorithms.
UNIT II SEARCHING AND SORTING ALGORITHMS 9
Search Algorithms: Linear search - binary search - Analysis of Search algorithms. Sorting Algorithms: Bubble
sort - Exchange sort - Insertion sort Merge sort Quick sort Heap sort - Analysis of Sorting Algorithms.
UNIT III LISTS, STACKS AND QUEUES 9
Abstract Data Types The List ADT Singly Linked List Doubly Linked List Circular Linked List
Applications and analysis of List. The Stack ADT Applications and Analysis of Stack. The Queue ADT
Applications and Analysis of Queues.
UNIT IV TREES AND HEAPS 9
Preliminaries Binary Trees Expression Trees- Traversals. The Search Tree ADT Binary Search Trees
Applications of BST. Priority Queues Binary heap Heap operations - Applications of heaps.
UNIT V HASHING AND GRAPHS 9
Hashing Closed hashing: Separate Chaining Open Addressing - Linear probing. Graph ADT Representation
of graph Graph Traversals: DFS and BFS. Applications of Graph - Finding Shortest Path - Connected
components.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Anany Levitin, Introduction to the Design and Analysis of Algorithm, Pearson Education Asia, 2003.
2. Mark Allen Weiss, Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C, Pearson Education Asia, Second
Edition, 1997.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Alfred V. Aho, John E. Hopcroft and Jeffry D. Ullman, Data Structures and Algorithms, Pearson
Education, New Delhi, 2006
2. Ellis Horowitz, Sartaj Sahni and Dinesh Mehta, Fundamentals of Data Structures in C, Orient
Longman, Second Edition, 2008.
3. Jean-Paul Tremblay and Paul G. Sorenson, An Introduction to Data Structures with Applications, Tata
McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, Second Edition, 1991.
WEB REFERENCES:
145
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106101059/
2. http://www.personal.kent.edu/~rmuhamma/Algorithms/algorithm.html
3. http://www.mif.vu.lt/~algis/dsax/DsSort.pdf
4. http://cslibrary.stanford.edu/103/LinkedListBasics.pdf
5. www.cs.cornell.edu/courses/cs312/2005sp/lectures/rec19.html
15CSA05 FUNDAMENTALS OF OPERATING SYSTEMS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To acquire basic knowledge of operating system structures and its functioning
To study the concept of process management
To learn the basics of memory management
To understand the structure of file systems
To familiarize with different operating systems
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Identify the components of operating system and their functionalities
Analyze the various process management algorithms
Evaluate the performance of various memory management techniques
Design a simple file system and analyze the performance
Work with some popular operating systems like Linux, Windows
PREREQUISITES:
Working Principles of Computers
UNIT I OPERATING SYSTEMS OVERVIEW 9
Introduction to operating systems Computer system organization - architecture Operating system structure -
operations Process, memory, storage management Open source operating systems OS services User
interface System calls System programs Process concept - scheduling Operations on processes
Cooperating processes Inter-process communication Threads
UNIT II PROCESS MANAGEMENT 9
Basic concepts Scheduling algorithms Algorithm evaluation The critical section problem Synchronization
hardware Semaphores Classic problems of synchronization Deadlocks Deadlock characterization
Methods for handling deadlocks Deadlock prevention Deadlock avoidance Deadlock detection Recovery
from deadlock.
UNIT III MEMORY MANAGEMENT 9
Memory management Swapping Contiguous memory allocation Paging Segmentation - Virtual memory:
Background Demand paging Copy on write Page replacement Allocation of frames Thrashing
UNIT IV FILE MANAGEMENT 9
File concept Access methods Directory structure File-system mounting Protection Directory
implementation Allocation methods Free space management Disk scheduling Disk management
UNIT V CASE STUDY 9
The Linux system History Process management Scheduling Memory management File systems Inter
Process Communication
Windows OS - History Design principles
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
146
TEXTBOOK:
1. Abraham Silberschatz, Peter B. Galvin, Greg Gagne, Operating System Concepts Essentials, John
Wiley & Sons Inc., 8th Edition, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, Modern Operating Systems, Addison Wesley, Second Edition, 2001.
2. Charles Crowley, Operating Systems: A Design-Oriented Approach, Tata McGraw Hill Education,
1996.
3. D M Dhamdhere, Operating Systems: A Concept-based Approach, Tata McGraw-Hill Education,
Second Edition, 2007.
4. William Stallings, Operating Systems: Internals and Design Principles, Prentice Hall, Seventh Edition,
2011.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.nptel.ac.in
2. http://cseweb.ucsd.edu/classes/fa06/cse120/lectures/120-fa06-l13.pdf
3. http://www.cs.kent.edu/~farrell/osf03/oldnotes/
15CSA06 FUNDAMENTALS OF CLOUD COMPUTING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To learn the basics and challenges of Cloud Computing
To introduce the virtualization concepts and cloud file system
To get an exposure on third-party cloud solutions
To understand the cloud security and efficiency issues
To explore the possibilities of applying cloud solutions in various applications
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Identify the challenges in Cloud Computing adoption
Implement virtualization and work with cloud file system
Identify the various cloud-based solutions available with different providers
Secure and optimize the cloud for delivering better performance
Identify and provide cloud-based solution for the problem under consideration
PREREQUISITES:
Knowledge of Computers, Networking is preferred
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO CLOUD COMPUTING 9
Overview of Distributed computing - Introduction to Cloud Computing: Definitions - Central idea - Properties and
Characteristics - Benefits - Cloud service and deployment model - Organizational scenario - Architecture -
Vocabulary - Challenges - Supporting services - Management and administration of Cloud services
UNIT II VIRTUALIZATION AND FILE SYSTEM 9
Virtualization Techniques: Virtualization Technology - Overview of x86 virtualization - Types of virtualization -
Virtualization products - VLAN - SAN - VM Migration - VM Consolidation and Management - Cloud interoperability
standards
Cloud File System: Distributed file system - GFS - HDFS
UNIT III CLOUD SOLUTIONS 9
Different Cloud Providers and service comparison: Infrastructure service providers - Comparison between
infrastructure service providers - Identification of business requirement - Cloud infrastructure setup procedure -
Platform service providers - Comparison between platform service providers - Identification of business
147
requirement - Cloud platform setup procedure - Cloud application development - Software service providers -
Comparison between software service providers
Cloud Database - Cloud programming model - Private cloud computing platforms
UNIT IV CLOUD SECURITY - MIDDLEWARE AND TESTING 9
Cloud Security: Fundamentals - Cloud Risk - Division - Security Architecture - VM Security Challenges -
Vulnerability assessment tool for cloud - Open source security solution products
Cloud Middleware: Need for Cloud Middleware - QoS issues in cloud - Data migration and Streaming -
Performance monitoring tools in cloud - Best practices
Cloud Testing: Types - Testing strategy
UNIT V CLOUD APPLICATIONS AND CASE STUDIES 9
Advanced Cloud Applications - Sharing and Collaborative services in cloud - Outside the cloud services - Cloud
Analytics - Software plus services - Cloud Content Delivery Network services (CDN) - Mobile cloud computing -
Sky computing - Cloud governance
Case Study: Cloud infrastructure adoption case study - Cloud platform adoption case study - Cloud software
services adoption case study - Cloud simulation tools - Future of cloud computing
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Rishabh Sharma, Cloud Computing Fundamentals, Industry Approach and Trends, Wiley India, 2015.
2. Kai Hwang, Geoffrey C Fox, Jack G Dongarra, Distributed and Cloud Computing from Parallel
Processing to the Internet of Things, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ronald L. Krutz, Russell Dean Vines, Cloud Security A comprehensive Guide to Secure Cloud
Computing, Wiley India, 2010.
2. John W.Rittinghouse and James F.Ransome, Cloud Computing: Implementation, Management, and
Security, CRC Press, 2010.
3. George Reese, Cloud Application Architectures: Building Applications and Infrastructure in the Cloud
O'Reilly
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://whatiscloud.com/basic_concepts_and_terminology/cloud
2. http://www.vmware.com/in/virtualization/overview
3. http://www.csoonline.com/article/2125258/cloud-security/cloud-security--the-basics.html
4. http://thecloudtutorial.com/cloudvendors.html
5. http://thecloudtutorial.com/freecloudcomputingapplications.html
15CSA07 PRINCIPLES OF MULTIMEDIA L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To study the basic concepts related to Multimedia
To explain the basic multimedia building blocks and application development tools.
To demonstrate online multimedia application creation tools
To understand computer animation basics and needs
To demonstrate various computer animation techniques.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
148
Identify the architectural components for multimedia applications.
Work with various elements of multimedia.
Develop audio, video, and images using multimedia tools.
Identify issues and solutions in implementing security for multimedia applications.
Model and render the 3D objects using animation tools.
Develop interactive animations using multimedia tools
PREREQUISITES:
Fundamental Knowledge of Graphics, Data is preferred
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MULTIMEDIA 9
Multimedia overview: Components , Hypermedia ,File formats Color models Digital Audio representation
Digital music making MIDI - Digital Video: Video compression techniques Multimedia for portable devices
UNIT II MULTIMEDIA BUILDING BLOCKS 9
Multimedia building blocks: Text, Graphics, Video Capturing, Sound capturing and editing - Introduction to 2D &
3D graphics Surface characteristics and texture Lights Animation: key frames & tweening Techniques
Principles of animation 3D animation File formats
UNIT III MULTIMEDIA APPLICATIONS 9
Databases: Properties of MMDBMS, Multimedia queries, Management of continuous data, document modeling,
Media Servers- Security: Digital Signatures, steganographic methods: single images, motion pictures, audio data,
3D scenes, copyright protection.
UNIT IV COMPUTER ANIMATION BASICS 9
History of Computer Animation - Modeling digital objects : Modeling Concepts - Modeling Techniques
Rendering Concepts : Lights, Camera and Materials - color- Rendering Process - Hidden surface removal - Z-
Buffer - Ray tracing
UNIT V COMPUTER ANIMATION TECHNIQUES 9
Principles of animation - Computer Animation techniques: keyframe Techniques, camera animation, light
animation, animation file formats - Advanced Computer Animation techniques: Motion Capture, Facial animation,
crowd animation - Visual effects techniques: Crowd replications, 3-d morphing, motion control.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. John F. Koegel Bufend, Multimedia systems, Pearson Education, Delhi, 2002
2. Parekh R, Principles of Multimedia, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2006.
3. Isaac V.Kerlow, The Art of 3D Computer Animation and Effects, Wiley Publications, 4th Edition,2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Mohammed Dastbaz, Designing Interactive Multimedia, McGraw Hill Publication, 2002.
2. Ralf Steinmetz and Klara Nahrstedt, Multimedia Applications, Springer, 2007
15CSA08 INTRODUCTION TO GENETIC ALGORITHMS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To learn the fundamental concepts of genetic algorithms
To solve optimization problems using advanced GA operators
To understand the multi objective optimization concepts
To learn the significance of evolutionary algorithms
149
To study the applications of genetic algorithms
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Explore the basics of genetic algorithms
Solve real world problems using advanced operators of GA
Work with multi objective optimization problems
Identify the different evolutionary algorithms for solving problems
Apply genetic algorithms to solve real-world domain problems
PREREQUISITES:
Knowledge of Problem Solving Techniques towards Optimization is preferred
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO GENETIC ALGORITHMS 9
Introduction - Comparison of Biological and GA terminology Mutation Selection Elitism Crossover -
Initialization
UNIT II ADVANCED OPERATORS OF GA 9
Combinatorial optimization Constraints - Multicriteria optimization - Hybrid algorithm - Alternative selection and
crossover methods - Meta Gas Mutation - Parallel GA
UNIT III MULTIOBJECTIVE OPTIMIZATION 9
Multi objective optimization problem - Principles of Multi objective optimization problem - Difference with single
objective optimization - Dominance and Pareto optimality - Optimality conditions
UNIT IV EVOLUTIONARY ALGORITHMS 9
Difficulties with classical optimization algorithms - Genetic algorithms - Evolution strategies - Evolution
programming - Genetic programming Multi-model function optimization
UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF GENETIC ALGORITHMS 9
Image registration - Recursive prediction of night light levels - Estimation of the optical parameter of liquid
crystals - Design of energy - efficient buildings - Multi objective network rehabilitation of Messy GA
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.David A Coley, An Introduction to Genetic Algorithms for Scientists and Engineers, World Scientific
Publishing Company,1997.
2. Kalyamoy Deb, Multi objective optimization using Evolutionary Algorithms, John Wiley & Sons, First
Edition, 2003.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Melaine Mitchell An Introduction to Genetic Algorithms, First MIT Press paperback edition, 1998.
2. S.N. Sivanandam, S.N. Deepa Introduction to Genetic Algorithms, Springer, 2008.
3. David E. Goldberg Genetic Algorithms, Pearson Education, Fourth Edition, 2009.
4. Koza, John, Wolfgang Banzhaf, Kumar Chellapilla, Kalyanmoy Deb, Marco Dorigo, David Fogel, Max
Garzon, David Goldberg, Hitoshi Iba, and Rick Riolo(Eds.), "Genetic Programming", Academic Press.
Morgan Kaufmann, USA, 1998.
5. John R.Koza, Forrest H Bennett III , David Andre, Martin A Keane, "Genetic Programming III: Darwinian
Invention and Problem Solving" Morgan Kaufmann, USA, 1999.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.doc.ic.ac.uk/~nd/surprise_96/journal/vol1/hmw/article1.html
2. http://www.obitko.com/tutorials/genetic-algorithms/
3. http://intelligence.worldofcomputing.net/machine-learning/genetic-algorithms.html#.VtVvblLlwgQ
4. http://epubs.siam.org/doi/abs/10.1137/0202009
5. http://study.com/academy/lesson/genetic-algorithms-examples-lesson.html
6. http://www.csbdu.in/pdf/Practical_Genetic_Algorithms.pdf
7. http://www.obitko.com/tutorials/genetic-algorithms/ga-basic-description.php
150
8. https://www.cs.wmich.edu/~elise/courses/cs6800/Genetic-Algorithms.ppt
15CSA09 XML PROGRAMMING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To learn the basics of markup languages and CSS
To acquire knowledge on XML and its DTD structure.
To understand XML schema creation.
To familiarize with DOM-based and SAX-based parsers.
To study XSLT documents and different custom markup languages.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Construct / design web pages using HTML and CSS
Experiment XML document validation using DTD
Validate XML documents using schemas
Conduct experiments on XML documents using DOM / SAX parsers
Transform XML documents to HTML using XSLT and review other custom markup languages
PREREQUISITES:
Basic Principles of Programming is preferred
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MARKUPS AND CSS 9
History of WWW History of SGML History of XML Review of HTML tags: Lists tables links images -
frames. Cascading Style Sheets (CSS): Inline styles creating CSS with style, element external CSS.
UNIT II XML MARKUP CREATION AND DTD 9
XML Markup introduction Parsers, well-formed and valid XML documents Parsing XML document with msxml
characters markup XML namespaces - Document Type Declaration - Element Type Declarations - Attribute
Declarations Simple DTD creation.
UNIT III XML SCHEMAS 9
Schema versus DTDs - Microsoft XML Schema: Describing elements - Describing attributes Data types
Simple XML schema creation.
UNIT IV DOM AND SAX PARSERS 9
DOM with JavaScript DOM components Traversing the DOM SAX-based parsers Events Simple SAX
program DOM versus SAX
UNIT V EXTENSIBLE STYLESHEET LANGUAGE TRANSFORMATION (XSLT) 9
Templates Creating elements and attributes Iteration and sorting Conditional processing Combining
stylesheets Variables.
Introduction to Custom Markup Languages: Mathematical Markup Language (MathML) - Chemical Markup
Language (CML) - Wireless Markup Language (WML) - NewsML.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
H.M. Deitel, P.J. Deitel, T.R. Nieto, T.M. Lin, and P. Sadhu, XML How to program, Pearson Education
India, 2001.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Heather Williamson, XML: The Complete Reference, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2001.
2. Cliff Binstock, The XML Schema Complete Reference, Addison-Wesley Professional, 2003.
3. Steven Holzner, Inside XML, New Riders, 2001.
4. Erik T. Ray, Learning XML, Second Edition, O'Reilly Media, Inc., 2003.
151
5. Elliotte Rusty Harold, W. Scott Means, XML in a Nutshell, O'Reilly Media Inc., 2004.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.w3schools.com/xml/default.asp
2. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/xml/
3. http://www.xmlmaster.org/en/article/d01/
4. http://www.javatpoint.com/xml-tutorial
15CSA10 INTRODUCTION TO UML L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To introduce object oriented modelling concepts and the role of UML
To learn to model the requirements and work flows
To explore the ways to model logical structure
To know how to how to represent dynamic behavior in UML
To understand the representation of behavior modelling in UML
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Model a scenario using Object Oriented Modelling
Identify use cases and draw Use case and activity diagrams
Represent logical design using class and object diagrams
Represent dynamic behavior using sequence and collaboration diagrams
Model the behaviors using state transition diagram
PREREQUISITES:
Knowledge of Modelling, Object Oriented Principles is preferred
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND OBJECT ORIENTED MODELLING 9
Introduction to UML - UML and Process - Perspectives of UML - Object Oriented Paradigm-Models - Object
Modelling - Models and Diagrams - Views of a Model
UNIT II MODELLING REQUIREMENT AND WORKFLOW 9
Modelling Requirements as Use cases - Use Case Diagrams Relationships - Levels of Use Cases - Use cases
and features. Activity Diagrams: Basics Activities and Action - Decisions and merges - Swim lanes -
Concurrency
UNIT III MODELLING LOGICAL STRUCTURE 9
Classes Objects Class relationship - Class Diagram Multiplicity - Types Implementation classes
Interfaces packages and subsystems Object diagrams.
UNIT IV MODELLING ORDERED INTERACTION 9
Sequence Diagrams Participants - Time-event, signals and messages - Use case and sequence diagram -
Collaboration Diagram
UNIT V BEHAVIOUR MODELLING 9
State Diagrams: States, Transitions, Advanced state diagrams. Component and Deployment Diagrams -
Extension using stereo types and properties
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
Kim Hamilton and Russell Miles, Learning UML 2.0, O'Reilly, 2006
REFERENCE BOOKS:
152
1. Sinan Si Alhir, Learning UML, O'Reilly, 2003.
2. Martin Fowler, UML Distilled, Addison Wesley, Third Edition, 2004.
3. Grady Booch, James Rumbaugh, Ivar Jacobson, The Unified Modeling Language User Guide,
Addison-Wesley, 2005.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.uml.org/
2. http://www.omg.org/ocup-2/coveragemap-found.htm#FoundationRefs
3. https://www.gliffy.com/uses/uml-software/
4. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/uml/
15CSA11 INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER ORGANIZATION L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To have a knowledge on basic digital principles.
To understand the basic structure and operation of a digital computer.
To explore the basic processing unit
To study the hierarchical memory system.
To learn the pipelining architecture concepts.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Apply digital principle concepts to design logical circuits
Design the arithmetic circuits for faster operations
Analyze the main processing units of a computer.
Analyze memory hierarchy and its impact on computer cost/performance.
Design a pipeline for consistent execution of instructions with minimum hazards
PREREQUISITES:
Knowledge in Working Principles of Computers is preferred
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL PRINCIPLES 9
Boolean functions Simplifications of Boolean functions using Karnaugh map- Implementation of Boolean
functions using logic gates - Decoders and encoders - Multiplexers and demultiplexers
UNIT II BASIC STRUCTURE OF COMPUTERS 9
Functional units Basic operational concepts Performance Instructions and instruction sequencing
Addressing modes RISC and CISC Styles Arithmetic: Design of fast adders Multiplication of unsigned and
signed numbers Fast Multiplication Floating point numbers and operations.
UNIT III BASIC PROCESSING UNIT 9
Fundamental concepts Instruction Execution Hardware Components - Instruction Fetch and Execution Steps
Control Signals Hardwired control
UNIT IV MEMORY SYSTEM 9
Basic concepts Memory hierarchy - Semiconductor RAM Read-only Memories Direct Memory Access
Cache memories Performance considerations Virtual memory
UNIT V PIPELINING 9
Basic concepts Pipeline organization and issues Data dependencies Memory and branch delays
Performance evaluation
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
153
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Carl Hamacher, Zvonko Vranesic, Safwat Zaky, and Naraig Manjikian, Computer Organization and
Embedded Systems, McGraw Hill Higher Education, Sixth Edition, 2011.
2. M.Morris Mano, Digital Design, Pearson Education, 3rd edition, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. David A. Patterson and John L. Hennessy, Computer Organization and Design: The
Hardware/Software interface, Elsevier, Third Edition, 2005.
2. Computer Organization, ISRD Group, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006.
3. William Stallings, Computer Organization and Architecture Designing for Performance, Pearson
Education, Sixth Edition, 2003.
4. Charles H.Roth, Jr. Fundamentals of Logic Design, Jaico Publishing House, Cengage Earning, 4th
Edition, 2005.
5. Donald D.Givone, Digital Principles and Design, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2007.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.ics.p.lodz.pl/~dpuchala/CompArch/Lecture_6.pdf
2. http://www.dauniv.ac.in/downloads/CArch_PPTs/
3. www.nptel.ac.in
4. http://cse.iitk.ac.in/users/karkare/courses/2011/cs220/html/notes.html
Offered by Mechanical Department
15MEA01 AUTOMOTIVE MAINTENANCE AND POLLUTION CONTROL L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The concepts of automobile maintenance

The methods of pollution control in automobiles
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Understand the basic concept of engine maintenance

Acquire knowledge about the Chassis Drive-line Maintenance
Understand the Maintenance and servicing of auxiliaries
Understand concept of Air Pollution due to Automobile Exhaust and its control methods
Understand about Exhaust Emission Control
Thermal Engineering
Automobile Engineering
UNIT I ENGINE MAINTENANCE 9
Engine troubles, effects & remedies, different major & minor services for engine, inspection and checking of
components visually and dimensionally, reconditioning methods of engine components, engine tune-up, special
tools & advanced equipment.
UNIT II CHASSIS DRIVE-LINE MAINTENANCE 9

Maintenance, repair and servicing of clutches, Fluid flywheel, gear boxes, Automatic transmission, Continuously
Variable Transmission (CVT) unit, propeller shaft, differential unit, front axle and rear axle, suspension systems,
servicing of brake systems- hydraulic, air systems, brake bleeding and brakes adjustments, maintenance and
servicing of steering system-Manual & Power Steering system, wheel balancing, wheel alignment, maintenance
154
of tyres, tyre rotation, frame defects, chassis frame alignment.
UNIT III MAINTENANCE, SERVICING OF AUXILIARIES 9

Cooling system service, anti-corrosion additives, anti-freezing solutions, dry & wet liners, petrol fuel and diesel
fuel system maintenance, Multi-Point Fuel Injection (MPFI) maintenance, lubrication system services, chassis
lubrication, lubrication chart, maintenance and care of storage batteries, battery testing methods, maintenance of
ignition systems, tyre service & reconditioning.
UNIT IV AIR POLLUTION DUE TO AUTOMOBILE EXHAUST 9

Sources of Emission, Exhaust gas constituents & analysis, Ingredients responsible for air pollution, Smoke,
odour, Smog formation, Sources of pollution, effects, Analysis of air pollutants, Air pollution control models and
equipment.
UNIT V EXHAUST EMISSION CONTROL 9

Basic methods of emission control, catalytic converter, After burners, reactor manifold, air injection, crank case
emission control, evaporative loss control, Exhaust gas recirculation, Fuel additives. Pollution Norms: European
pollution norms, Indian pollution norms as per Central Motor Vehicle Rules (C.M.V.R.), Measurement Devices for
HC, CO,NOX,Smoke.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. John B. Heyhood, Internal Combustion Engines Fundamentals, McGraw Hill, 1989.

2. Stone.R, Introduction to Internal Combustion Engines, CBS Publishers & Distributors, 2002.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Newton, Steeds and Garet, Motor Vehicles, Society of Automotive Engineers, U.S., 13th revised
Edition, 2002.
2. Joseph Heitner, Automotive Mechanics, East-West Press, 2nd Edition, 2004.
3. Martin W. Stockel and Martin T Stockel, Automotive Mechanics Fundamentals, Goodheart-Willcox Co;
Instructor's Manual Edition 2005.
4. Heinz Heisler, Advanced Engine Technology, SAE International Publications USA, 2003.
15MEA02 FUNDAMENTALS OF ENERGY RESOURCES L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
To enable the students to understand the interaction between different parts of the energy system.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Understand the basics of energy systems.

Apply the fundamentals of energy conversion for practical applications.
Realize the importance of non-conventional energy systems.
Understand the concepts of Biomass energy.
Know about energy conservation techniques.
Power plant Technology.

Heat Transfer.
UNIT I ENERGY 9
Introduction to energy Global energy scene Indian energy scene - Units of energy conversion factors, general
155
classification of energy, energy crisis, energy alternatives.
UNIT II CONVENTIONAL ENERGY 9

Conventional energy resources, Thermal, hydel and nuclear reactors, Thermal, hydel and nuclear power plants,
Efficiency, merits and de-merits of the above power plants, combustion processes, fluidized bed combustion.
UNIT III NON-CONVENTIONAL ENERGY 9

Solar energy, solar thermal systems, flat plate collectors, focusing collectors, solar water heating, solar cooling,
solar distillation, solar refrigeration, solar dryers, solar pond, solar thermal power generation, solar energy
application in India, energy plantations. Wind energy, types of windmills, ocean wave energy conversion, ocean
thermal energy conversion, tidal energy conversion, geothermal energy.
UNIT IV BIOMASS ENERGY 9

Biomass origin - Resources Biomass estimation. Thermochemical conversion Biological conversion,
Chemical conversion Hydrolysis & hydrogenation, bio-crude, biodiesel power generation, gasifier, biogas,
integrated gasification.
UNIT V ENERGY CONSERVATION 9

Energy conservation - Act; Energy management importance, duties and responsibilities; Energy audit Types
and methodology, reports, instruments. Material and energy balance, thermal energy management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Rao, S. and Parulekar, B.B., Energy Technology, Khanna Publishers, 2005.
2. Rai, G.D., Non-conventional Energy Sources, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2010.
3. Nagpal, G.R., Power Plant Engineering, Khanna Publishers, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Godfrey Boyle, Renewable Energy, Power for a Sustainable Future, Oxford University Press, U.K., 3rd
Revised Edition 2012.
2. Twidell, J.W. & Weir, A., Renewable Energy Sources, EFN Spon Ltd., UK, 1986.
3. Tiwari G.N., Solar Energy Fundamentals Design, Modelling and applications, Narosa Publishing
House, New Delhi, 2002.
4. Freris L.L., Wind Energy Conversion systems, Prentice Hall, UK, 1990.
15MEA03 MANUFACTURING FOR INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Electronics manufacturing.
Surface Mount Technology and Packing Technology.
Defects, Inspection techniques employed in SMT assembly process.
Repair, rework and quality aspects of Electronics assemblies.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Understand the basics of Electronics manufacturing and fabrication steps.
Know the types of Mounting and Packaging Technologies.
Know various Defects, Inspection techniques employed in SMT assembly process.
Learn repair, rework and quality aspects of Electronics assemblies.
Crystal Structure, Semi-conducting materials.
Atomic Structure, Miller Indices, Periodic table, Crystal defects.
156
Various Joining processes, filing and assembly tools.
Silicon and its chemistry.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION OF SEMICONDUCTORS 9
Semiconductor materials, devices Process technology Basic fabrication steps Oxidation,
Photolithography, Etching, Diffusion, Ion implantation, Metallization Material characterization Wafer
shaping Crystal characterization.
UNIT II ETCHING AND DIFFUSION 9

Etching Definition Types - Wet chemical etching Silicon, Silicon Dioxide, Silicon Nitride and Polysilicon,
Aluminum, Gallium Arsenide Dry etching Reactive plasma etching Techniques and equipment
Applications Diffusion Definition Basic diffusion process Extrinsic diffusion Lateral diffusion.
UNIT III SURFACE MOUNT TECHNOLOGY AND PACKAGING 9

Introduction to packaging, types Pin grid array package, Ball grid array package Attachment
methodologies Wire bonding, Tape automated bonding, Flip chip bonding Surface mount technology
Introduction Through hole components.
UNIT IV INSPECTION AND TESTING 9

Inspection techniques, equipment and principle - AOI, X-ray. Defects and Corrective action - Stencil printing
process, component placement process, reflow soldering process, under fill and encapsulation process -
Electrical testing of PCB assemblies- In circuit test, functional testing - Fixtures and jigs.
UNIT V REPAIR, REWORK, QUALITY AND RELIABILITY OF ELECTRONICS 9

ASSEMBLIES
Repair tools Methods - Rework criteria and process - Thermo-mechanical effects and thermal management -
Reliability fundamentals - Reliability testing - Failure analysis - Design for manufacturability - Assembly
Reworkability Testing - Reliability and environment.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.Gary S. May, Simon M. Sze, Fundamentals of Semiconductor Fabrication, Wiley Student Edition,
2004.
2. Ray Prasad, Surface Mount Technology Principles and practice, Second Edition, Chapman and
Hall, New York, 1997.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Puligandla Viswanadham and Pratap Singh, Chapman and Hall, Failure Modes and Mechanisms in
Electronic Packages, New York, N.Y, 1998.
2. Ning - Cheng Lee, Reflow Soldering Process and Trouble Shooting SMT, BGA, CSP and Flip Chip
Technologies, Elsevier Science, 1995.
3. Zarrow, Phil, Surface Mount Technology Terms and Concepts, Elsevier Science and Technology,
1997.
4. C.A.Harper, Electronic Packaging and Interconnection Handbook, McGraw Hill Inc.,New York,
N.Y.,2004.
15MEA04 HUMAN FACTORS IN ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To recognize the important issues concerned with the human factors aspects of tasks, products and
environments.
To study human behaviour during working.
To know the methods of quantifying and predicting human comfort, human performance and human
health.
157
To recognize the role of standards, recommendations and regulations applicable to tasks, products
and environments.
To recognize limitations to predict human responses, including inter-subject variability and intra-
subject variability.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Able to explain the various aspects of human sensory and cognitive attributes that influence human
performance.
Able to design the working space, work station ergonomically by considering human body
dimensions.
Able to predict the human behaviour, human comfort and human performance during working.
Able to design man machine system effectively.
Able to assess human skill and capabilities.
Basics of ergonomics, various work postures and risk factors.
Interest to study the human behaviour such as motivation talk, personality and determination of
attitudes.
Ability to understand the concept behind man-machine system, theory behind Ergonomics system
and virtual environments.
Design of systems, tools and equipment, Knowledge of Man-Machine systems.
Work study, Method study, Motion study.
UNIT I ERGONOMICS AND ANATOMY 9
Introduction to ergonomics: The focus of ergonomics, ergonomics and its areas of application in the work
system, a brief history of ergonomics, attempts to humanize work, modern ergonomics,
Posture stability and posture adaptation, low back pain, risk factors for musculoskeletal disorders in the
workplace, behavioral aspects of posture.
UNIT II HUMAN BEHAVIOR 9
Individual differences, Factors contributing to personality, fitting the man to the job, Influence of difference on
safety, Method of measuring characteristics, Accident Proneness.
Motivation, Complexity of Motivation, Job satisfaction. Management theories of motivation, Job enrichment
theory. Frustration and Conflicts, -Determination of attitudes, changing attitudes. Motivational requirements.
UNIT III ANTHROPOMETRY AND WORK DESIGN FOR STANDING AND SEATED 9
WORKS
Designing for a population of users, percentile, sources of human variability, anthropometry and its uses in
ergonomics, principles of applied anthropometry in ergonomics, application of anthropometry in design, design
for everyone, anthropometry and personal space, effectiveness and cost effectiveness
Fundamental aspects of standing and sitting, an ergonomics approach to work station design, design for
standing workers, design for seated workers, work surface design, visual display units, guidelines for design of
static work, effectiveness and cost effectiveness, research directions
UNIT IV MAN- MACHINE SYSTEM AND REPETITIVE WORKS AND MANUAL 9

HANDLING TASK
Applications of human factors engineering, man as a sensor, man as information processor, man as controller
Man Vs Machine.
Ergonomics interventions in Repetitive works, handle design, key board design- measures for preventing in
work related musculoskeletal disorders (WMSDs), reduction and controlling, training.
Anatomy and biomechanics of manual handling, prevention of manual handling injuries in the work place,
design of manual handling tasks, carrying, and postural stability.
UNIT V HUMAN SKILL & PERFORMANCE AND DISPLAY, CONTROLS AND 9

VIRTUAL ENVIRONMENTS
158
Human strength capabilities - Features of the human body- measures of the physiological functions-strength
and endurance- speed of movements.
Principles for the design of visual displays- auditory displays- design of controls- combining displays and
controls- virtual (synthetic) environments, research issues.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK:
1. Bridger R.S., Introduction to Ergonomics, CRC Press; 3rd Edition, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Michael ONeill, Ergonomic Design for Organizational Effectiveness, CRC Press; 2ndEdition 1998.
2. Mark S. Sanders, Human Factors in Engineering & Design, McGraw-Hill Higher Education; 7th
Edition, 1992.
3. Philip Jacobs, Dan McLeod & Nancy Larson, The Ergonomics Manual, Saunders group, UK, 1990.
4. Thomas A. Hunter, Engineering Design for Safety, McGraw-Hill, 1992.
15MEA05 DECISION SUPPORT SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To review and clarify the fundamental terms, concepts associated with Decision Support Systems,
computerized decision aids, expert systems, group support systems and executive support systems.
To discuss the modelling and analysis of the Decision Support Systems.
To understand the enterprise DSS and knowledge management.
To understand the intelligent systems used in DSS.
To discuss organizational and social implications of Decision Support Systems.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Demonstrate an understanding of the theory of decisions and decision analysis including probability,
decisions under uncertainty, risk taking, and real-world problems.
Demonstrate the different models used in the DSS.
Analyze, design and build an information system using emerging tools and technologies for a given
business problem.
Recognize the relationship between enterprise information needs and decision making.
Explain the components and concepts of DSS, their characteristics and capabilities.
Analyze typical decision situations to determine whether it is practical to support them with computer
technology and, if so, how.
Gain an appreciation of working on systems development projects in a team environment and obtain
experience with project management.
Describe and understand the concept of decision support systems including collection of data,
database management, modeling, group and organizational decision support systems, executive
information systems, and expert systems.
Operation analysis.
Reasoning skills and critical thinking.
159
Deductive problem solving techniques.
UNIT I DECISION MAKING AND COMPUTERIZED SUPPORT 9
Decision Making: Introduction and Definitions - Managers and Decision Making - Managerial decision making
and Information Systems - Managers and computerized support Need - framework for decision support
concept of decision support systems (DSS) executive support systems - preview of the modeling process-
phases of decision making process.
UNIT II MODELING AND ANALYSIS 9

DSS components- DSS classifications - Data warehousing, access, analysis, mining and visualization -
modeling and analysis- Static and dynamic models influence diagrams Optimization via mathematical
programming Heuristic programming simulation multidimensional modeling model base management.
UNIT III ENTERPRISE DECISION SUPPORT SYSTEMS AND KNOWLEDGE 9

MANAGEMENT
Group decision making Group support systems- Technologies Creativity and Idea generation - enterprise
information systems (EIS) Comparing and Integrating EIS and DSS - supply and value chain and DSS-
supply chain problems and solutions Computerized systems - knowledge management methods,
technologies and tools.
UNIT IV INTELLIGENT SYSTEMS 9

Artificial intelligence (AI) Concepts and Definitions AI versus natural intelligence - expert systems-
concepts, structure, types and benefits and problems knowledge Engineering - knowledge acquisition and
validation - knowledge representation Techniques Inference techniques
UNIT V IMPLEMENTATION, INTEGRATION, AND IMPACTS 9

Implementation Major issues of implementation implementation strategies Models of integration
Intelligent DSS Intelligent modelling and model management problems and issues in integration - impact of
management support systems - overview personnel management issues impact of Individuals Impacts
on productivity, quality and competitiveness Issues of legality, privacy and ethics Other societal impacts.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
1. Efraim Turban and Jay E Aronson, Decision Support and Intelligent Systems, Prentice Hall,
6thEdition, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. George M. Marakas, Decision Support Systems, Prentice Hall, 2nd Edition, 2002.
2. Daniel J. Power, Decision Support Systems: Concepts and Resources for Managers, Greenwood
Publishing Group, 1st Edition, 2002.
3. Quazi Khabeer, Business Process Management and Decision Support Systems, Alpha Science
International Limited, 1stEdition, 2013.
4. Elain Rich, Kevin Knight and Shivashankar B. Nair , Artificial intelligence, Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Company Limited, 3rd Edition, 2009.
15MEA06 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS AND COST ANALYSIS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To learn about the basics of economics.

To make cost analysis related to engineering so as to take economically sound decisions.
To learn about different types of maintenance analysis.
160
To learn about depreciation and inflation.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the completion of the course the students will be able to
Understand the concept of Engineering Economics, types of costs and make economic analysis.
Remember, understand and apply various Interest formulae and their applications for different
investment situations.
Compare and analyze various investment alternatives and make appropriate decisions.
Make replacement and maintenance analysis to take optimal decisions.
Understand the concept of depreciation, and inflation.
Economics basics.
Profit and Loss.
Concept of money, loans.
Interest rate, maintenance
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMICS 9
Introduction to economics-Flow in an economy-Law of supply and demand, Concept of engineering
economics-Engineering efficiency, economic efficiency, Scope of engineering economics Elements of costs,
marginal cost, marginal revenue, sunk cost, opportunity cost, break-even analysis- V ratio, Elementary
economic analysis Material selection for product design selection for a product, process planning.
UNIT II VALUE ENGINEERING 9

Make or buy decision, Value engineering Function, aims, Value engineering procedure. Interest formulae
and their applications Time value of money, Single payment compound amount factor, Single payment
present worth factor, Equal payment series sinking fund factor, Equal payment series payment Present worth
factor- equal payment series capital recovery factor-Uniform gradient series annual equivalent factor, Effective
interest rate, Examples in all the methods.
UNIT III CASH FLOW 9

Methods of comparison of alternatives present worth method (Revenue dominated cash flow diagram),
Future worth method (Revenue dominated cash flow diagram, cost dominated cash flow diagram), Annual
equivalent method (Revenue dominated cash flow diagram, cost dominated cash flow diagram), rate of return
method, Examples in all the methods.
UNIT IV REPLACEMENT AND MAINTENANCE ANALYSIS 9

Replacement and Maintenance analysis Types of maintenance, types of replacement problem,
determination of economic life of an asset, Replacement of an asset with a new asset capital recovery with
return and concept of challenger and defender, Simple probabilistic model for items which fail completely.
UNIT V DEPRECIATION 9
Depreciation- Introduction, Straight line method of depreciation, declining balance method of depreciation-Sum
of the years digits method of depreciation, sinking fund method of depreciation/ Annuity method of
depreciation, service output method of depreciation-Evaluation of public alternatives- introduction, Examples,
Inflation adjusted decisions procedure to adjust inflation, Examples on comparison of alternatives and
determination of economic life of asset.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
1. Panneer Selvam, R, Engineering Economics, Prentice Hall of India Ltd, New Delhi, 2nd Edition,
2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Chan S.Park, Contemporary Engineering Economics, Prentice Hall of India, 6th Edition2015.
161
2. Donald.G. Newman, Jerome.P.Lavelle, Engineering Economics and analysis, Oxford University
Press, 12th Edition, 2013.
3. Degarmo, E.P., Sullivan, W.G and Canada, J.R, Engineering Economy, Pearson, 6th Edition2014.
4. Grant.E.L, Ireson.W.G, and Leavenworth, R.S, Principles of Engineering Economy, Wiley, 8th
Edition1990.
5. Smith, G.W., Engineering Economy, Iowa State Press, 4th Edition1987.
15MEA07 NANO TECHNOLOGY L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basics behind the nanotechnology.
To impart knowledge on the synthesis of various nanomaterials.
To acquire knowledge on the characterization tools used in nanotechnology.
To have exposure on nanomaterials patterning technologies.
To gain knowledge on nanodevices and their purpose in the engineering applications.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to:
Demonstrate the classification and properties of nanomaterials.
Able to synthesis various nanomaterials.
Identify the various characterization techniques using sophisticated techniques.
Understand the patterning and lithographic techniques.
Apply the perceptions of the nanotechnology for various technical applications.
Material Science.
Basic knowledge in Physics and Chemistry.
Fundamentals and technological importance of new materials.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Nanoscale architecture -Classification of nanostructures - Surface to volume ratio -Fraction of surface atoms
Surface energy- changes to the system total energy - effect of nanoscale dimensions on various properties
thermal, chemical, mechanical, magnetic, optical and electronic properties.
UNIT II PREPARATION METHODOLOGIES 9

Fabrication methods top down processes milling, ECAP process bottomup process vapour phase
deposition methods plasmaassisted deposition process - MBE and MOMBE - liquid phase methods -
colloidal and solgel methods methods for templating the growth of nanomaterials ordering of nanosystems
- self-assembly.
UNIT III CHARACTERISATION 9

Analytical and imaging techniques - Electron Microscopy: Scanning Electron Microscopy, Transmission
Electron Microscopy - Scanning Tunnelling Microscopy - Atomic Force Microscopy X-Ray diffraction
techniques Spectroscopy techniques Raman spectroscopy surface analysis and depth profiling.
UNIT IV PATTERNING AND LITHOGRAPHY TECHNIQUES 9

Optical lithography Electron lithography - X-ray Lithography - Ion lithography. Plasma properties Feature
size control and anisotropy etch mechanism Lift off techniques Plasma reactor Fl2 & Cl2 based etching
Relative plasma etching techniques and equipments.
UNIT V NANODEVICES 9
Single Electron devices: Nano scale MOSFET Resonant tunnelling transistor Single electron transistors -
Single electron dynamics - Nano robotics and Nano manipulation DNA based nano devices Gas based nano
devices - Quantum structures and devices - Quantum layers, wells, dots and wires - Carbon nanotube based
162
logic gates, optical devices - Connection with quantum devices- Single molecule electronic devices photonic
band gap systems - applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Timp Gregory, Nanotechnology, Springer, 2012.

2. Guozhong Cao, Nanosrtuctures and nanomaterials: Synthesis, properties and applications, Imperial
College Press, 2004.
3. Robert Kelsall, Ian Hamley, Mark Geoghegan, Nanoscale Science and Technology, John Wiley &
sons, Inc., 2005.
4. Michael Kohler, Wolfgang Fritzsche, Nanotechnology: An Introduction to Nano structuring
Techniques, Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH, 2009.
5. Charles. P. Poole, Frank. J. Owens, Introduction to Nanotechnology, John Wiley, 2010.
6. Stefan Landis, Nano Lithography, Wiley, 2011.
7. Pradeep T., A Text book of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.
15MEA08 FUEL CELL & HYDROGEN ENERGY L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To familiarize the need and production of Hydrogen.

To impart basic knowledge about Fuel cell.
To analyze the fuel cell from the thermodynamics perspective.
To understand the different components and types of fuel cell.
To know the heat and mass transfer analysis and current issues of fuel cell.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

To acquire the basics involved in the production of Hydrogen and its storage.
To understand the working principle of fuel cell.
To gather knowledge about the thermodynamics, and electrochemical engineering perspectives of
fuel cell technology.
To acquire fundamental knowledge in the development of fuel cell technology.
Gathered the fundamental knowledge about the heat and mass transfer in fuel cell.
Basic chemistry.
Thermodynamics
UNIT I HYDROGEN ENERGY 9
Hydrogen: Its merit as a fuel; Applications, Hydrogen production methods - Production of hydrogen from fossil
fuels, electrolysis, thermal decomposition, photochemical and photo-catalytic methods. Hydrogen storage
methods - Metal hydrides, metallic alloy hydrides, carbon nano-tubes, sea as source of deuterium.
UNIT II FUEL CELL BASICS 7

Fuel cell definition, Difference between batteries and fuel cells, fuel cell history, components of fuel cells,
principle of working of fuel cells
UNIT III FUEL CELL THERMODYNAMICS 10

Second law analysis of fuel cells, efficiency of fuel cells, fuel cell electrochemistry - Nernst equation,
Electrochemical kinetics, Butler-Volmer equation, Fuel cell types - Classification by operating
temperature/electrolyte type, Fuel Cell Performance, Activation, Ohmic and Concentration over potential
163
UNIT IV FUEL CELL DESIGN AND COMPONENTS 9
Cell components, stack components, system components, Overview of intermediate/high temperature fuel
cells - Solid oxide fuel cells (SOFC), Molten carbonate fuel cells (MCFC), Phosphoric acid fuel cells (PAFC),
Polymer Electrolyte fuel cells (PEFC)
UNIT V HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER IN FUEL CELLS 10

Heat and mass transfer in polymer electrolyte fuel cells, water management in PEFCs, Current issues in
PEFCs Direct methanol fuel cells (DMFC) - Electrochemical kinetics methanol oxidation, Current issues in
DMFCs, Fuel crossover in DMFCs, Water management in DMFCs, high methanol concentration operation,
limiting current density
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. J. Larminie and A. Dicks, Fuel Cell Systems Explained, SAE International and John Wiley &
Sons,2nd Edition, 2003.
2. Xianguo Li, Principles of Fuel Cells, Taylor and Francis, New York, 2005.
3. S. Srinivasan, Fuel Cells: From Fundamentals to Applications, Springer US, CBS Publishers: New
Delhi, 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ryan O'Hayre, Suk-Won Cha, Whitney Colella and Fritz B. Prinz, Fuel Cell Fundamentals, Wiley,
2nd Edition, 2008.
2. Allen J. Bard and Larry R. Faulkner, Electrochemical Methods: Fundamentals and Applications,
John Wiley & Sons, 2nd Edition, 2001.
3. Amir Faghriand Yuwen Zhang, Transport Phenomena in Multiphase Systems, Academic Press; 1st
Edition, 2006.
15MEA09 BIO-MECHANICS AND HUMAN BODY VIBRATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To know the functions of various muscular skeletal system and anthrometry.
To correlate the human body vibration and muscular skeletal system.
To know about various bio mechanical models and acquire knowledge on work capacity.
To know about the various types of vibration and its relevant criteria.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students would
Analyse the various types of vibration and its relation to the bio mechanical models.
Acquire knowledge on Anthrometric data and Bio mechanical studies in the industries.
Acquire the knowledge on evaluation of work capacity vibration measurement.
Basic knowledge on biology.
Fundamentals of Engineering Mechanics.
UNIT I VIBRATION 9
Introduction, vibration exciters, control systems, Performance specification, motion sensors and transducers
UNIT II MUSCULARSKELETAL SYSTEM AND ANTHROPOMETRY IN 9

BIOMECHANICS
Introduction, structure and function of musculoskeletal system - Connective Tissue, Skeletal Muscle, Joints
Measurement of body segment, physical properties, Anthropometric data for biomechanical studies in
industry
UNIT III MECHANICAL WORK CAPACITY EVALUATION AND 9

BIOINSTRUMENTATION
164
Joint motion, human motion analysis system, applied electromyography, intradiscal pressure measurement,
intrabdominal measurement, force platform system, whole body vibration measurement.
UNIT IV BIOMECHANICAL MODELS 9

Planar static biomechanical models, static 3D modelling, dynamic biomechanical models, special purpose
biomechanical models.
UNIT V WHOLE BODY AND SEGMENTAL VIBRATION 9

Vibration on human body, whole body vibration, Hand-Transmitted Vibration, segmental vibration, vibration
exposure criteria.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
1. Vibration and Shock Handbook, Clarence W. De Silva, Taylor and Francis Group, 2005.
REFERENCE BOOK:
1.Occupational Biomechanics, Don B. Chaffin and Gunnar B.J.Andersson, John Wiley and sons, Inc.
15MEA10 FUNDAMENTALS OF THERMAL SCIENCE L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The interaction between different concepts of thermodynamics and heat transfer.

The application of thermodynamics and heat transfer to various industries.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Understand the basic concepts of thermodynamics.

Acquire knowledge about the power plants.
Know the applications of psychrometry.
Understand the basic concepts of Refrigeration.
Understand the basic concepts of Air conditioning.
Engineering Thermodynamics
Power plant technology
Thermal Engineering
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO THERMODYNAMICS 12
Basic Concepts: System, Control Volume, Surrounding, Boundaries, Universe, Types of Systems,
Thermodynamic Equilibrium, Property, Process, Cycle Reversibility Quasi-static Process, Irreversible
Process, Types, Work and Heat, Point and Path function, Concept of quality of Temperature, Principles of
Thermometry, Steady Flow Energy Equation, Limitations of First Law of Thermodynamics, Second law of
Thermodynamics, entropy (Elementary treatment only).
UNIT II POWER PLANTS 7

Introduction to thermodynamic cycles, Steam, Hydel, Diesel, Tidal, Geothermal, Wind, Solar power plants-
schematic and working.
UNIT III PSYCHROMETRY 7

Properties of air-water vapour mixtures: Dry Bulb Temperature, Wet Bulb Temperature, Relative Humidity, dew
point temperature, degree of saturation, thermodynamic wet bulb temperature, enthalpy of moist air, sensible
165
heating and cooling, Adiabatic humidification and dehumidification, By-pass factor, Cooling load calculations
using psychrometric table and chart.
UNIT IV REFRIGERATION 12
Vapour compression refrigeration cycle- super heat, sub cooling Performance calculations - working principle
of vapour absorption system, Ammonia Water, Lithium bromide water systems (Description only) - Alternate
refrigerants Comparison between vapour compression and absorption systems
UNIT V AIR CONDITIONING 7

Air conditioning system: Types, Working Principles Cooling Load calculations Concept of Room Sensible
Heat Factor, Grand Sensible Heat Factor, Effective Sensible Heat Factor.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Note: Use of standard thermodynamic tables, Mollier diagram, Psychrometric chart and refrigerant
propertytables are permitted in the examination
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Sarkar, B.K, Thermal Engineering, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishers, 2007.
2. Kothandaraman.C.P, Domkundwar.S, Domkundwar. A.V., A course in thermal engineering, Dhanpat
Rai & sons, 5th Edition, 2012.
3. Nag.P.K, Engineering Thermodynamics, Tata McGraw-Hill, 4th Edition, New Delhi, 2008.
4. Nag P. K, Power Plant Engineering, Tata McGraw- Hill, 3rdEdition, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Rajput. R. K., Thermal Engineering S.Chand Publishers , 2010

2. Cengel, Thermodynamics An Engineering Approach TataMcGraw Hill, New Delhi, 5th Edition,
2006.
3. EI-Wakil M.M, Power Plant Technology, Tata McGraw-Hill 2001.
15MEA11 FUNDAMENTALS OF LITHOGRAPHY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Lithography is a study of printing micron to nano scale features on silicon wafer. Complete understanding of
the course makes the student technically strong in nano fabrication.
To impart sound knowledge about the fundamentals of clean room and nano fabrication by optical
projection lithography.
To emphasize about the importance of mask and maskless lithography.
To motivate the pattern transfer technique with high energetic electron beam concepts.
This course provides information about printing the pattern with ion beam sources.
To enable the knowledge about printing with soft lithographic concepts and etching the
unwantedportions.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After studying this course students will be able to:
It emphasize about the fabrication of integrated circuits on microchip using optical principles.
Understand about the extreme UV light and zone plates as maskless techniques.
Applying scanning electron beam techniques in nano fabrication.
Imparts knowledge about the use of Ion beam/focused ion beam as tools for developing nano objects.
Provides impression about soft lithography techniques and various modes of etching.
Fundamentals of Nanoscience and Technology.
166
Microelectro mechanical systems and Nano electro mechanical systems.
Fundamentals of Micro fabrication.
Fundamental principles of optical lithography.
UNIT I PHOTOLITHOGRAPHY AND PATTERNING OF THIN FILMS 10
Introduction to lithography lithography processes; mask making, wafer pre-treatment, resist spinning pre-
bake, exposure, development and rinsing, post-bake, resist stripping, positive and negative photoresists lift
off profile - introduction to semiconductor processing - necessity for a clean room - different types of clean
rooms - maintenance of a clean room micro fabrication process flow diagram chip cleaning, coating of
photoresists, patterning, etching, inspection process integration - etching techniques - reactive Ion etching -
magnetically enhanced RIE- Ion beam etching - other etching techniques.
UNIT II PHOTOLITHOGRAPHY AND PATTERNING OF THIN FILMS 9

Lithography - optical lithography - different modes - optical projection lithography - multistage scanners
resolution and limits of photolithography resolution enhancement techniques - photo mask- binary mask -
phase shifting mask - attenuated phase shift masks - alternating phase shift masks - off axis illumination -
optical proximity correction - sub resolution assist feature enhancement - optical immersion lithography.
UNIT III DIRECT WRITING METHODS - MASKLESS OPTICAL LITHOGRAPHY 7

Maskless optical projection lithography types, advantages and limitations required components - zone
plate array lithography - extreme ultraviolet lithography light sources - optics and materials issues.
UNIT IV ELECTRON BEAM LITHOGRAPHY, ION BEAM & X-RAY 10

LITHOGRAPHY
Scanning electron - beam lithography - electron sources and electron optics system maskless EBL- electron
beam projection lithography - scattering with angular limitation projection e-beam lithography - projection
reduction exposure with variable axis immersion lenses - Ion beam lithography - focusing ion beam lithography
- ion projection lithography X-ray lithography X-ray masks, resists, merits and demerits - atom lithography.
UNIT V NANOIMPRINT LITHOGRAPHY AND SOFT LITHOGRAPHY 9

Nano imprint lithography - hot embossing - soft Lithography- moulding/replica moulding: PDMS stamps -
printing with soft stamps - edge lithography - dip-pen lithography - set up and working principle self-
assembly LB films.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Chris Mack, Fundamental principles of optical lithography: The science of micro fabrication, Wiley,
2008.
2. M. Madou, Fundamentals of micro fabrication, 2nd Edition, CRC Press, 2002.
3. Stepanova, Maria, Nano fabrication techniques and principles, Dew, Steven (Eds.) Springer, 2012.
4. John A. Rogers & Hong H. Lee, Unconventional nano patterning techniques and applications, A
John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2009.
5. Sergey Edward Lyshevski, MEMS and NEMS: Systems, devices and structures, CRC Press LLC,
2002.
6. Zheng Cui, Nano fabrication Principles, capabilities and limits, Springer Science, 2008.
7. Mark J. Jackson, Micro fabrication and nano manufacturing, CRC Press Taylor & Francis Group,
2006.
15MEA12 FUNDAMENTALS OF FIRE SAFETY ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
167
To provide an in depth knowledge about the fundamentals of fire and explosion.
To understand the causes and effects of fire and explosion.
To know the various fire and explosion prevention systems and protective equipment.
To understand the protection of building from fire.
To understand the various fire prevention techniques to be followed in a building.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
To make familiar about basic concepts of fire and explosion science.

To k n o w t h e d i f f e r e n t causes and effects of fire and explosion.
To understand the operation of various types of fire fighting equipment.
To understand the prevention of explosion.
To equip the students to effectively employ fire protection techniques in building.
Fundamentals of Thermodynamics.
Various modes of heat transfer.
Fluid mechanics, Engineering Chemistry, Engineering Physics.
Building materials used for construction.
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF FIRE 9
Combustion process & concepts, combustion in solids, liquid, gases- smouldering fires- Spontaneous
combustion - rapid fire progress phenomena- Properties influencing fire hazard properties of solid, liquid
and gaseous fuels - classification of fires.
UNIT II FIRE CONTROL 9

Fire extinguishers Location and operation of extinguishers - Extinguishing methods- extinguishing agents:
water, foam, chemical powder, CO2, sand, steam, saw dust Fire detectors Fire tender - Automatic fire
extinguishing system - Fixed fire fighting installations - Risk analysis: risk assessment, consequence analysis,
risk reduction Fire drill Emergency procedures.
UNIT III PRODUCTS AND EFFECTS OF COMBUSTION 9

Heat: Conduction, convection, radiation- effects of heat- effects of flames different fire gases and their
effects effects of smoke on humans Smoke movement control and venting - Effects of explosion Negative
pressure wave Fragmentation case studies.
UNIT IV BUILDING FIRE SAFETY 9

Objectives of fire safe building design, Fire load, fire resistant material and fire testing concept of egress
design - exits width calculations - fire safety requirements for high rise buildings Behavior of materials &
structures in fire Concrete and steel. Flame spread in high rise building Statutory requirements.
UNIT V FUNDAMENTALS OF EXPLOSION 9

Introduction Explosion fundamentals Types Physical, BLEVE, Chemical explosion Vapour cloud
explosion Dust explosion Explosion prevention Explosion mitigation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Purandare D.D., Abhay D. Purandare, Hand Book on Industrial Fire Safety, 1st Edition, P & A
Publications.
2. Derek, James, Fire Prevention Hand Book, Butter Worths and Company, London, 1986.
3. Jain V.K., Fire Safety in Building, New Age International (P) Ltd. Publishers, 2001.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Gupta, R.S., Hand Book of Fire Technology Orient Longman, Bombay, 2010.
2. Accident Prevention manual for industrial operations N.S.C., Chicago, 1982.
3. Dinko Tuhtar, Fire and explosion protection A system approach, Ellis Horwood Ltd, 1989.
168
4. Fire fighters hazardous materials Reference Book Fire Prevention in Factories, Nostrand Rein
Hold, New York, 1991.
5. Lees F.P., Fire Prevention and firefighting, Loss prevention Association, India.
15MEA13 HIGH ENERGETIC MATERIAL - PROPELLANTS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To study about the process of conversion of the high energy released by materials due to
decomposition into useful work.
This course deals with the study of the application of the released energy into different categories like
explosives, propellant and pyrotechnics.
To understand the background aspects of the different products of explosives, pyro techniques and
propellant by any engineering student.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Understand the classification of high energy materials according to the process.
Apply the release of energy into useful work in different categories.
Understand the basic characteristics and ingredients of Propellant.
Know about the basic process of pyro techniques.
Understand the various processing techniques of explosives in an ethical manner.
Materials: Inorganic materials, Ferrous and Non-ferrous materials.
Organic materials, Polymers.
Fundamentals of Combustion.
Chemistry of burning.
Hazardous materials.
UNIT I EXPLOSIVE MATTER 9
High energetic material Definition Classifications Explosives Reactive explosive materials Primary
explosives Secondary explosives Military explosives Industrial explosives Nitro explosives Liquid
oxidizers and explosives.
UNIT II GUN PROPELLANT 9

Low explosives - Gun propellant Features - Deflagration Ballistic property Homogeneous propellant -
Single base propellant Nitrocellulose Stabilizer Characteristics - Double base propellant Nitrocellulose
and nitroglycerin Additives - Extruded Double-Base Propellants - Cast Double-Base Propellants Liquid
propellant.
UNIT III ROCKET PROPELLANT 9

Rocket Propellant - Composite propellant Features - Ingredients - Fuels, oxidizers, binders Additives
Cross linking agents Plasticizers Stabilizers Burn rate modifier Characteristics - Inhibition Neutral and
Progressive burning Inhibition techniques.
UNIT IV PYROTECHNICS 9
Pyrotechnics General features - Ingredients of Pyrotechnic Formulations Fuel, Oxidizers, Binders,
Coolants, Retardants, Dyes, Color Intensifiers, Moderators Characteristics- Pyrotechnic formulations -
Illuminating formulations - Delay formulations - Smoke formulations - Incendiary formulations.
UNIT V PROCESSING TECHNIQUES FOR EXPLOSIVES 9

Extrusion - Casting types Normal, Melt, Vibration, Squeeze casting, Pressing Unidirectional, Double Action,
Incremental, Hydrostatic, Iso-static pressing Stability of explosives Vacuum stability test Heat test
169
Impact sensitivity test.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
1. High Energy Materials Propellants, Explosives and Pyrotechnics Jai Prakash Agarwal, WILEY-
VCH Verlag GmbH & Co. KGaA, Weinheim, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. "High Energy Oxidisers for Advanced Solid Propellants and Explosives - Advances in Solid Propellant
Technology, First International HEMSI Workshop, Ranchi, India, 2002, 87-106.
2. The Chemistry of Powder and Explosives, Davis, Tenney L. Open source downloadable.
15MEA14 DIRECT DIGITAL MANUFACTURING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Direct Digital Manufacturing technology and the associated Aerospace, Architecture, Art, Medical and
industrial applications.
Different types of Image capturing and Image processing techniques and its applications in various
fields.
Study of production of x-rays and its application to different medical Imaging techniques and different
types of Radio diagnostic techniques.
Study of digitization and special imaging techniques used for visualizing the cross sections of the body.
Understanding of various geometric modeling and meshing techniques.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Learn about the principle of Direct Digital Manufacturing (DDM) techniques, and along with their
potential applications to customized manufacturing.
Understand the basic concepts of reverse engineering and various image processing techniques.
Effectively employ the free form fabrication technique in launching a new product in market within a
short span of time.
Trained to find innovative solutions to fabricate highly intricate complex shapes by suitable digital
manufacturing technique.
Get exposure to various diagnostic applications of the medical imaging integrated with 3D Printing and
SDM technique.
Digitization Techniques.
Geometric modeling techniques.
Processing CAD Data (Selection of Orientation, Supports generation, Slicing, Toolpath generation).
Data Exchange Formats.
Reverse Engineering Techniques.
Medical Image sources, Medical Image Representation.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND CAD MODELING 11
Introduction of DDM - Need - Development of DDM systems DDM process chain - Impact of DDM on Product
Development in various fields Digital & Virtual prototyping -Benefits- Applications. Digitization techniques
geometric modeling techniques: Wire frame, surface and solid modeling Part orientation and support
generation, direct and adaptive slicing, Tool path generation.
UNIT II REVERSE ENGINEERING AND MEDICAL IMAGING SYSTEM 9

Basics of Medical Image Sources: Radiology - Computed Tomography- Magnetic Resonance Tomography
Medical Image Representation: Pixels and voxels - Image file formats- DICOM- Other formats- Medical image
170
analysis: Image segmentation - Image representation and analysis - Feature extraction and representation.
UNIT III POWDER BASED DDM SYSTEMS 9

Selective Laser Sintering(SLS): Principle, process, Indirect and direct SLS- Powder structures, modeling of SLS,
materials, post processing, post curing, surface deviation and accuracy, Applications. Laser Engineered Net
Shaping (LENS): Processes, materials, products, advantages, limitations and applications Case Studies.
UNIT IV LIQUID BASED AND SOLID BASED DDM SYSTEMS 9

Stereo Lithography (SLA): Apparatus: Principle, per-build process, part-building, post-build processes, photo
polymerization of SL resins, part quality and process planning, recoating issues, materials, advantages,
limitations and applications. Solid Ground Curing (SGC): working principle, process, strengths, weaknesses and
applications. Fused Deposition Modeling (FDM): Principle, details of processes, process variables, types,
products, materials and applications. Laminated Object Manufacturing (LOM): Working Principles, details of
processes, products, materials, advantages, limitations and applications - Case studies.
UNIT V 3D PRINTING AND SHAPE DEPOSITION MANUFACTURING 7

TECHNIQUES
Three dimensional Printing (3DP): Principle, basic process, Physics of 3DP, types of printing, process
capabilities, material system. Solid based, Liquid based and powder based 3DP systems, strength and
weakness, Applications and case studies. Shape Deposition Manufacturing (SDM): Introduction, basic process,
shape decomposition, Mould SDM and applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Chua C.K., Leong K.F., and Lim C.S., Rapid prototyping: Principles and applications, World Scientific
Publishers, 3rd Edition, 2010.
2. Andreas Gebhardt, Rapid prototyping, Hanser Gardener Publications, 1st Edition, 2003.
3. Steve Webb, The Physics of Medical Imaging, Medical Science Series, Institute of Physics Publishing,
Bristol, 1992.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. LiouW.Liou, Frank W.Liou,Rapid Prototyping and Engineering applications: A tool box for prototype
development, CRC Press, 2007.
2. Ali K. Kamrani, EmadAbouel Nasr, Rapid Prototyping: Theory and practice, Springer, 2006.
3. Peter D.Hilton Hilton/Jacobs, Paul F.Jacobs, Rapid Tooling: Technologies and Industrial Applications,
CRC press, 2000.
4. Wolfgang Birkfellner, Applied Medical Image Processing A Basic course, CRC Press, 2nd Edition,
2014.
5. R.C.Gonzalez and R.E.Woods, Digital Image Processing, Pearson-Prentice-Hall, 2nd Edition, 2009.
15MEA15 INSTRUMENTAL ANALYSIS OF MATERIALS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To know about the basic principles of spectroscopy.

To understand about the molecular spectroscopy.
To acquire knowledge about NMR and mass spectroscopy.
171
To inculcate about the separation techniques.
To measure and evaluate about the surface properties.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Obtaining fundamental knowledge about optical spectroscopy.

Gaining knowledge about molecular and atomic spectroscopy.
Gathering enough knowledge in the field of nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy.
Studying about the separation of various constituents present in a mixture by chromatographic
techniques.
Acquiring knowledge about electrochemical analysis.
Material science, physics and chemistry.

Basic information on scattering processes involving X-rays,visible light, electrons.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION OF SPECTROMETRY 9
Properties of electromagnetic radiation- wave properties components of optical instruments Sources of

radiation wavelength selectors sample containers radiation transducers Signal process and read outs
signal to noise ratio - sources of noise Enhancement of signal to noise - types of optical instruments Principle
of Fourier Transform optical Measurements.
UNIT II MOLECULAR SPECTROSCOPY 9
Molecular absorption spectrometry Measurement of Transmittance and Absorbance Beers law

Instrumentation - Applications -Theory of fluorescence and Phosphorescence Instrumentation Applications
Theory of Infrared absorption spectrometry IR instrumentation - Applications Theory of Raman spectroscopy
Instrumentation applications.
UNIT III MAGNETIC RESONANCE SPECTROSCOPY AND 9

MASSSPECTROMETRY
Theory of NMR environmental effects on NMR spectra chemical shift-NMR spectrometers applications of 1H
NMR- Molecular mass spectra ion sources Mass spectrometer. Applications of molecular mass Electron
paramagnetic resonance- g values instrumentation.
UNIT IV SEPARATION METHODS 9
General description of chromatography Band broadening and optimization of column performance- Liquid
chromatography Partition chromatography - Adsorption chromatography Ion exchange chromatography -
principles of GC and applications HPLC- Capillary electrophoresis Applications.
UNIT V ELECTRO ANALYSIS AND SURFACE MICROSCOPY 9
Electrochemical cells- Electrode potential - EMF potentiometry-reference electrode ion selective and
molecular selective electrodes Voltammetry Cyclic and pulse voltammetry- Applications of voltammetry -
Study of surfaces Scanning probe microscopes AFM and STM.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. D.A. Skoog, F. James Holler, Stanky, R.Crouch, Instrumental Methods of Analysis, Cengage Learning,
2007.
2. G. Aruldhas, Molecular Structure and Spectroscopy. PHI Learning Pvt Ltd, 2007.
3. Elsa Lundanes, Leon Reubsaet, TygeGreibrokk. Chromatography: Basic Principles, Sample
Preparations and Related Methods, John Wiley & Sons, 2013.
172
4. Fritz Scholz, Electroanalytical Methods: Guide to Experiments and Applications, Springer Science &
Business Media, 2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. James Keeler, Understanding NMR spectroscopy, John Wiley & Sons, 2011.
2. Jack Cazes, Encyclopedia of Chromatography, Volume 2, CRC Press, 2005.
3. Challa S.S.R. Kumar,Surface Science Tools for Nanomaterials Characterization, Springer, 2015.
15MEA16 BASICS OF AIRCRAFT AND SPACE TECHNOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To provide in depth knowledge in the evolution of aircrafts.

To give understanding of concept of aerospace engineering.
To get exposed to the various aircraft materials and aircraft structures.
To develop knowledge in satellites and satellite launching vehicles.
To analyse the current trends in the field of Manned Mission.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
This course would make familiar of basic concepts of aviation.

Course would be helpful to understand the basic principle behind the aircraft structures.
Students would be trained in the current engineering materials and structures of an aircraft.
One would be able to make use of knowledge for the design of rocket, satellites, and space shuttles in
the field of inter-discipline.
This Course would equip the students to effectively enhance the concepts of aircrafts and spacecrafts.
Basics of Earth science, solar science.

Keen interest in Aerospace.
Basics of Material science.
Polymers, Ceramics.
Fuels-Liquids, solids and gases.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO AVIATION 9
Astronomy: overview of astronomy know the sky coordinate system telescopes flux, magnitudes stars,
formation solar system.
Atmospheric Science: Earths atmosphere, structure, classification, constituents standard atmosphere-
Introduction to space environment-Historical perspective of aviation.
UNIT II AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 9
173
Aerodynamic forces lift generation aerofoils and wings drag anatomy of an aircraft mechanism of thrust
production propeller jet engines and their operation helicopters aircraft performance aircraft
instruments-fatigue failure in aircrafts Airplane Disasters.
UNIT III AIRCRAFT MATERIALS & STRUCTURES 9
Light-weight materials- FRP: GFRP, CFRP- Applications of FRP in principal parts of aircrafts.
Radome-fuselage-wings-landing gears-black box-Research Issues: smart skins in aircraft-structural health
monitoring (SHM) of aircrafts.
UNIT IV ROCKETS & SATELLITES 9
Introduction to rockets rocket propulsion engines types of rockets- nozzles propellants rocket engines
elements of liquid propulsion systems solid rocket motors rocket testing launch preparation.
Types of satellites- present-day satellites- satellite structures- satellite operations-application of shape memory
alloy (SMA) in satellites.
UNIT V LAUNCH VEHICLES FOR MANNED MISSION 9
Overview of Re-entry vehicles and Manned missions-Shuttle components -Orbiter Vehicle (OV), a pair of
recoverable solid rocket boosters (SRBs)-expendable external tank (ET) Space shuttle disasters: A case study.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Megson, T. H. G., Aircraft Structures for Engineering Students, 4th Edition, Butterworth-Hein-emann,
2007.
rd
2. Turner, M. J. L., Rocket and Spacecraft Propulsion: Principles, Practice and New Developments, 3
Edition, Springer, 2009.
3. Anderson, D. F. and Eberhardt, S., Understanding Flight, 2nd Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Wiesel, W. E., Spaceflight Dynamics, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill, 1997.

2. Kaplan, M. H., Modern Spacecraft Dynamics and Control, John Wiley and Sons, London, 1976.
3. Thompson, W. T., Introduction to Space Dynamics, Dover Publications, New York, 1986.
4. Cornelisse, J. W., Rocket Propulsion and Spaceflight Dynamics, Pitman, London, 1979.
5. Anderson, J. D., Introduction to Flight, 7th Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2011.
Szebehely, V. G. and Mark, H., Adventures in Celestial Mechanics, 2nd Edition, Wiley, 1998.
174
15MEA17 INTRODUCTION TO MATLAB WITH ENGINEERING APPLICATIONS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Basic concept of Matlab.

Matlab codes and programming.
Exploit of the plotting.
Writing program for solving linear system, curve fitting, numerical integration & one dimensional
equation, which are needed for engineering disciplines.
Concept of Simulink, for solving engineering problem.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Extrapolate the basic of Matlab commands.

Write codes for simple applications.
Programming for solving linear system, Gaussian elimination, finite difference method, finite element
method.
Plot the graphs using code.
Familiar with the concepts of Simulink for engineering applications.
Basic programming concepts.
Analytical skills.
Matrix manipulations.
Linear algebra.
Plots.
Basics of modelling and simulations.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MATLAB 9
Basic of Matlab- Matlab window, Input-Output, File Types, Platform dependence Matrices and Vectors: Input,
Indexing, Matrix Manipulation, creating vectors- Matrix and Array Operations: Arithmetic, Relational, Logical,
Elementary math function, Matric function, character string.
UNIT II PROGRAMMING IN MATLAB (SCRIPTS AND FUNCTIONS) 9

Script Files- Function Files: Executing a function, More on functions Language, Sub-functions, Compiled
function (P code) Language Specic Features: variables, Loops, branches, control-flow, Interactive input,
Recursion, Input/output - Advanced Data Objects: Multidimensional matrices, Structures, Cells programming
for simple problem like conversion of temperature.
UNIT III GRAPHICS-PLOTTING 9

Basic2-D Plots: Style options, Labels, title, legend, and other text objects, Axis control, zoom-in, and zoom-out,
Modifying plots with Plot Editor, Overlay plots-3-D Plots: View, Rotate view, Mesh and surface plots, Vector field
and volumetric plots, Interpolated surface plots - Saving and Printing Graphs.
UNIT IV APPLICATIONS 9
Computer implementation - development of codes- Linear Algebra: Solving a linear system, Gaussian
elimination, Finding eigenvalues & eigenvectors - Curve Fitting and Interpolation: Polynomial curve tting, Least
squares curve tting - Interpolation - Numerical Integration (Quadrature): Double integration - Ordinary
Dierential Equations (ODE): rst-order linear ODE, second-order nonlinear ODE.
UNIT V INTRODUCTION TO SIMULINK AND ITS APPLICATIONS 9

Simulink and its Relation to MATLAB- library: sink, source, maths operation, logic & bit operations, discrete -
Modeling the Solution of Three Equations with Three Unknowns - Modeling a FourthOrder Differential Equation
175
- Modeling an Electric Circuit - Applications: Moving Ladder, Conical Water Reservoir, Heat Flow, Cantilever
Beam Deflection, Feedback Control Systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Rudra Pratap "Getting Started with MATLAB", Oxford University Press, 2002.

2. Steven T.Karris, "Introduction to Simulink with Engineering Applications", Orchard Publications, 2nd
Edition, 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Moore Holly, "Matlab for Engineers" Prentice Hall, 2009.
2. William J. Palm, "Introduction to MATLAB for Engineers, 3rd Edition, 2010.
3. Amos Gilat, "MATLAB: An Introduction with Applications", 3rd edition, 2008.
4. Ferreira Ajm, "Matlab Codes for Finite Element Analysis - Solids and Structures", Springer, 2014.
15MEA18 MICRO AND NANO FABRICATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Able to define the concepts involved in IC chip manufacturing.

Gain knowledge on various Nano deposition technologies.
To learn the etching technologies used in semiconductor industry.
Emphasize on the importance of doping and surface modification.
To define the concept of self-assembled monolayers for Nano device fabrication.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Gain knowledge on the wafer preparation techniques in IC industry.

Able to fabricate thin films for the fabrication of micro and nanodevices.
Able to apply the etching techniques in any prepared substrates for nanofabrication.
Learn the wafer technology applications and surface modification techniques.
Can design the self-assembled monolayers for nanofabrication.
Knowledge in electronics, physics, chemistry, materials science with mathematical background.

UNIT I CRYSTAL GROWTH, WAFER PREPARATION AND EPITAXY 9
Basic steps in IC fabrication - Electronic grade silicon crystal plane and orientation Defects in the lattice
Czochralski crystal growing Silicon shaping Processing consideration Vapour phase epitaxy Liquid phase
epitaxy - selective epitaxy - Molecular beam epitaxy - Epitaxial Evaluation.
UNIT II DEPOSITION TECHNOLOGIES 9

Deposition processes- Thermal, Plasma and Arc physical vapour deposition, Chemical vapour deposition
process- Atomic layer deposition process-Liquid phase deposition by spin coating, Spray coating, Dip coating,
Sol-gel Technology, Electrochemical and Chemical reaction deposition.
UNIT III ETCHING TECHNOLOGIES 9
Etching Technology basics, Wet chemical etching process, etching of single crystal silicon, etching of
insulators, semiconductors and conductors Dry etching physical etching, Chemical dry etching, Physical-
Chemical process, Chemical etching powder blasting, gas cluster ion beam etching (GCIB) technology.
176
UNIT IV DOPING AND SURFACE MODIFICATION 9
Importance of doping and surface modification-Introduction into doping-Doping by diffusion-Doping by

implantation-Doping applications-MEMS applications, Wafer Technology applications- Thermal oxidation of
silicon- oxidation mechanisms, oxidation equipments and process.
UNIT V NANOFABRICATION BY SELF-ASSEMBLY 9

Self-Assembly process- Introduction to self-assembly, Chemical, Physical and Colloidal Self-Assembly, Static
and dynamic Self-assembly, Directed self-assembly-Basics, Mechanisms-Surface topography and surface
wetting, Role of defects in self-assembly. Self-assembled monolayers (SAMs).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Hans H. Gatzen, Volker Saile, JurgLeuthold, Micro and Nano Fabrication: Tools and Processes,
Springer, 2015.
2. Sami Franssila, Introduction to Microfabrication, Wiley Publications, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Mark J. Jackson, Microfabrication and Nano manufacturing, Taylor andFrancis Group, 2006.
2. Bo Cui, Recent advances in Nanofabrication Techniques and Applications,InTech Publisher, 2011.
3. Milton Ohring, Materials Science of Thin Films: Deposition and Structure, Academic Press, 2002.
4. Rointan F. Bunshah, Handbook of Deposition Technologies for Films andcoatings, science, Technology
and applications, Noyes Publications, 1994.
15MEA19 FUNDAMENTALS OF NATURE INSPIRED ALGORITHMS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The intention of this course is to
Give an overview of the fundamentals of a special category of algorithms developed from the
inspiration of natural things.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Understand the fundamentals of heuristic search algorithms.
Apply the concept of the natural behavior of agents in the optimization.
Understand different types of search algorithms.
Apply the behavior of ant in solving large sized computational problems.
Understand the basics of population base algorithms.
Calculus, Functions.
Linear and Non-linear Function.
Discrete and Continuous variables.
Maximum and minimum values of continuous function.
Discrete function.
UNIT I HEURISTIC SEARCH ALGORITHMS 9
Introduction to Heuristic Algorithm Robustness of traditional optimization and search methods Goal of
optimization Combinatorial optimization Problem complexity Classification of Search algorithms Nature
inspired algorithms Single point search algorithms Population based algorithms.
UNIT II SINGLE POINT SEARCH ALGORITHMS 9

Memory less single point search Local search Neighborhood search Variable neighborhood search
177
Iterated local search Simulated Annealing Memory based search algorithms Tabu search Hybrid
algorithms.
UNIT III EVOLUTIONARY ALGORITHMS 9

Search algorithm Genetic algorithm Coding methods Phenotype and phenotype representation of
solution and mathematical foundation of Genetic Algorithm. Mapping of objective function Fitness function
Computer implementation of Genetic Algorithm Data structure Roulette Wheel selection Genetic
operators Cross over operators various types Mutation operators.
UNIT IV ANT COLONY OPTIMIZATION 9

Advanced Population based search algorithms Introduction to Ant Colony Optimization Ant System
Pheromone trail Desirability factor Variants in ant colony optimization Simple applications.
UNIT V PARTICLE SWARM OPTIMIZATION 9

Swarm intelligence Particles and swarm Objective and fitness function Velocity of particle Cognition
component Social component gbest and pbest concept Evolution of PSO Simple applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. David Goldberg, "Genetic Algorithm in search, Optimization and Machine learning", Addison
Weseley Publishers.
2. David Corne, et al. "New Ideas in Optimization" McGraw Hill Publishers. 1999.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. James Kennedy, Russell C. Eberhart, with Yuhui Shi, Swarm Intelligence, Morgan Kaufmann, 2001.
2. AndriesEngelbrecht, Computational Intelligence an Introduction, John Wiley and sons Ltd., 2007.
3. Eric Bonabeau, Marco Dorigo, and Guy Theraulaz, Swarm Intelligence: FromNatural to Artificial
Systems, Oxford University Press, 1999.
15MEA20 ENERGY EFFICIENT BUILDINGS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Design, construction and operation of energy efficient buildings.
Utilization of energy efficient technologies.
Energy efficient building codes.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course students will be able to understand and apply
The concepts and techniques of energy efficient buildings.
The concepts and techniques of different energy efficient technologies and energy conservation
measures in different equipment's used in buildings.
The concepts and techniques of indoor environmental quality.
The energy transfer in different buildings.
The policies, rules and regulation for energy efficient building thereby facilitating towards sustainable
development.
Basic knowledge in Refrigeration and Air-conditioning.
Sun, Earth movement.
Climate change.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
178
The sun-earth relationship and the energy balance on the earth's surface, climate, wind, solar radiation, and
solar temperature, sun shading and solar radiation on surfaces, energy impact on the shape and orientation of
buildings, thermal properties of building materials. Technology Roadmap on Energy-efficient Buildings.
UNIT II ENERGY EFFICIENT TECHNOLOGIES 9

Passive cooling and day lighting, active solar and photovoltaic, building energy analysis methods, building
energy efficiency standards, different lighting technologies. Refrigeration and air conditioning systems, energy
conservation in pumps, fans and blowers, refrigerating machines, heat rejection equipment, energy efficient
motors, and insulation. Energy Efficiency Trends in Residential and Commercial Buildings, Energy Efficiency
in traditional buildings.
UNIT III INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY 9

Psychrometry, comfort conditions, thermal comfort, ventilation and air quality, air conditioning requirement,
visual perception, auditory requirement, illumination requirement, choice of lighting, lighting standards, control
of lighting, lighting economics and aesthetics, energy saving, impacts of lighting efficiency, electronic ballast.
Ventilation Requirements Minimum standards for ventilation Ventilation Design Energy conservation in
ventilating systems.
UNIT IV ENERGY TRANSFER IN BUILDINGS 9

Concepts of energy efficient buildings and energy efficient HVAC systems. Calculation of heating and cooling
loads of the building. Heating and Cooling Equipment. Buildings energy balance accounting for solar energy
gain Heat losses - Internal heat sources. Study of climate and its influence in building design for energy
requirement. Low energy and zero energy buildings.
UNIT V GREEN BUILDINGS 9

Ecological sustainable design, working group sustainable construction methods & techniques. Barriers to
green buildings, green building rating tools, material selection, embodied energy, operating energy, faade
systems, transportation, water treatment systems, water efficiency, building economics, LEED and IGBC
codes. Energy efficiency requirements in building codes, energy efficiency policies for new buildings.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
1. John Littler and Randall Thomas, Design with Energy: The Conservation and Use of Energy in
Buildings, Cambridge University Press, 1984.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Edward G Pita, An Energy Approach- Air-conditioning Principles and Systems, Pearson Education,
2003.
2. Colin Porteous, The New Eco-Architecture, Spon Press, 2002.
3. Lever More G J, Building Energy Management Systems, E and F.N Spon, London, 2000.
4. Means R.S., Green building: project planning and cost estimating, Kingston, 2006.
5. Kibert C.J. Sustainable Construction: Green Building Design, Wiley, 2nd Edition, 2007.
6. Eicker U., Low Energy Cooling for Sustainable Buildings, Wiley, 2009.
7. Attmann O., Green Architecture, McGraw-Hill, 2010.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.bee-india.nic.in
2. http://www.iea.org
3. http://www.unep.org
179
15MEA21 WATER TREATMENT TECHNOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the quality of water parameters.

To know about the purification of water by filtration process.
To impart the knowledge about usage of membranes in water purification system.
To know about biological membrane system used in water purification.
To study about the fouling and other problems associated with membranes.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Understanding the quality of water parameters will be achieved.

Acquiring knowledge about different kinds of filtration techniques.
Gathering idea about usage of membranes in water purification system.
Understanding the effect of biological membrane system used in water purification.
Studying about the fouling and other problems associated with membranes.
Knowledge in physics, chemistry, materials science, environmental engineering, and safety engineering.
UNIT I WATER QUALITY CHARACTERISTICS 9
Physical, Chemical and Biological Characteristics of Water. Standard methods of determination of important
physical and chemical parameters of water qualities- PH, turbidity, electrical conductivity, total Solids, alkalinity,
hardness, Dissolved oxygen, BOD and COD - Units of measurements and expression of results- Estimation of
hardness (EDTA method only)- Bacteriological Indicators.
UNIT II WATER PURIFICATION BY FILTRATION 9

Solid Liquid separation systems-Filtration systems- Theory of Membrane separation mass Transport
Characteristics Cross Flow filtration-Membrane Filtration- Types and choice of membranes, porous, non-porous,
symmetric and asymmetric Plate and Frame, spiral wound and hollow fibre membranes Liquid Membranes.
UNIT III MEMBRANE PROCESSES AND SYSTEMS 9
Microfiltration Ultrafiltration- Nano Filtration Reverse Osmosis Electro dialysis- Evaporation -Membrane
manufactures Membrane Module/Element designs Membrane System components Design of Membrane
systems - pump types and Pump selection Plant operations Economics of Membrane systems
UNIT IV MEMBRANE BIOREACTORS 9

Introduction and Historical Perspective of MBRs, Bio-treatment Fundamentals, Biomass Separation MBR
Principles, Fouling and Fouling Control, MBR Design Principles, Design Assignment, Alternative MBR
Configurations, Commercial Technologies, Case Studies.
UNIT V MEMBRANE FOULING 9
Membrane Fouling Pretreatment methods and strategies monitoring of Pretreatment Langlier Index, Silt
Density Index, Chemical cleaning, Biofoulant control Types of foulants and scalants Natural organic matter
fouling - Impact of membrane material on fouling - Reversible and irreversible fouling- Prevention of fouling and
Fouling control.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Klaus-Viktor Peinemann, Suzana Pereira Nunes, " Membranes for Water Treatment, Volume 4, Wiley
180
publishers, 2010.
2. Peter Hillis Membrane Technology in Water and Wastewater Treatment, RSC (Special Publications)
1st Edition, 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Angelo Basile, Alfredo Cassano, NavinRastogi, Advances in membrane technologies for water
treatment: Materials, process and applications, Woodhead Publishing, 2015.
2. Water Environment Federation (WEF), Membrane Systems for Wastewater Treatment, McGraw-Hill,
USA, 2005.
3. Symon Judd, The MBR Book Principles and application of Membrane Bioreactors in water and
wastewater treatment,Elsevier, 2006.
4. Jorgen Wagner, Membrane Filtration handbook, Practical Tips and Hints, Osmonics Inc.,2nd Edition,
Revision2, 2001.
5. Mulder M, Basic Principle of Membrane Technology, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1996.
6. Noble, R.D. and Stern, S.A., Membrane Separations Technology: Principles and Applications,
Elsevier, 1995.
Offered by IT Department
L T P C
15ITA01 INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER GRAPHICS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To learn the output primitives like line, circle and ellipse using algorithms.
To study the 2-D and 3-D viewing and transformations.
To understand various, color models modeling and animation techniques.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Apply the line, circle and ellipse drawing algorithms
Apply the two dimensional geometric transformations and clipping
Apply the three dimensional geometric transformations
Work with color and illumination models
Apply different methods for Modeling
C Programming
Introduction-Applications-Graphics systems-Output Primitives-representing Image-Straight Line-Line drawing

Algorithms-DDA Algorithm-Bresenhams Line Algorithm-Circle Generating Algorithm- Bresenhams Circle Algorithm-
Midpoint Circle Algorithm-Ellipse Generating Algorithm-Midpoint Ellipse Algorithm.
UNITII TWO DIMENSIONAL TRANSFORMATIONS 9
Introduction-Representation of points-Matrix Algebra and Transformation-Transformation of points- Straightlines-

Midpoint Transformation-Transformation of parallel lines-Intersecting lines- Rotation - Reflection and scaling of
straight lines-Combined Transformations-Translation and Homogeneous Coordinates-Rotation about Arbitrary point-
Reflection about Arbitrary line-Windowing and clipping
UNITIII THREE DIMENSIONAL TRANSFORMATION 9
Introduction-3D Transformation-Rotation about an axis parallel to coordinate Axis-Reflection about an arbitrary axis in
space-Reflection through an arbitrary plane-3D Modeling schemes-Projection-Orthographic-Isometric-oblique-
perspective-3D clipping
UNITIV COLOR AND ILLUMINATION MODELS 9
Introduction colors-Illumination model and light sources-specular Reflection-Intensity Attenuation-Shadow-

Reflectivity and refractivity- Radiosity Model-Texturing-Surface-Bump mapping-Environment Mapping-Shading
181
Methods
UNITV MODELLING CONCEPTS AND TECHNIQUES 9
Introduction - structures and Hierarchical Modeling-Advanced Modeling Techniques-Procedural Models-Fractals-

Grammar based Models-Physical based Modeling-Animation-Devices-Computer assisted-video formats-Frame by
Frame animation-Real Time Animation Techniques
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Amarendra N Sinha, Arun D Udai, Computer Graphics,Tata Mc-Graw Hill ,2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Foley, van Dam, Feiner and Hughes ,Computer Graphics Principles and Practice, Addison Wesley,2004
2. D Hearn and P M Baker ,Computer Graphics, Prentice Hall of India Second Edition,2008
3. F .S. Hill, Computer Graphics using OPENGL, Second edition, Pearson Education 2003
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/6-837-computer-graphics-fall-
2003/
2. http://www.moshplant.com/direct-or/bezier/
3. http://www.cs.mtu.edu/~shene/COURSES/cs3621/NOTES/spline/B-spline/bspline-curve-prop.html
4. http://nptel.ac.in/
L T P C
15ITA02 RICH INTERNET APPLICATION
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To create websites combining HTML/CSS
To develop an understanding in the basics of html like forms, lists, frames etc
To develop a design with CSS
To increase the quality of website design by formatting with styles
To evaluate a web page design and consider the issues
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Design a website in HTML
Apply concepts of element header in HTML
Design a webpage using frames, forms, images etc..
Create styles for the HTML document
Apply presentation techniques for webpage with CSS
NIL
UNITI INTRODUCTION : MARKUP WITH HTML 9
HTML & XHTML markup instructions & Language Rules of XHTML - HTML Values and Units Tag
Attributes- Text and Comments Uniform Resource Indicators - Document Structure Head & Body Styles
Definition Block Elements Inline Elements Organisational Elements Link Images - Comments
UNITII ELEMENT HEADER 9
Head Document Title Script & Style sections Document background color and image Text Structuring
Character Formatting Lists Ordered Unordered Definition Lists Links to a web page Tables Borders
and Rules Rows and Cells Formatting with Tables
UNITIII FRAMES, FORMS AND MULTIMEDIA 9
Framesets frame links to frames nested framesets Forms GET and POST Form attributes Textbox
checkbox radiobutton listbox Buttons Hidden fields Images - Insert a Image sizing image maps
multimedia animated images & videos embedding media
182
UNIT IV PRESENTATION WITH CSS 9
Styles and HTML defining styles cascading styles style definitions understanding selectors
understanding style inheritance pseudo-class pseudo-elements CSS value and units inheritance and
cascade
UNIT V FORMATTING WITH CSS 9
CSS Inheritance and cascade Font properties Text Formatting CSS lists Padding, margin and borders
CSS layouts CSS positioning Pseudo-elements and generated content Dynamic HTML with CSS
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Steven M.Schafer, HTML, XHTML and CSS, Wiley Publishing, Inc., Fifth edition 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Chuck Musciano Bill Kennedy, HTML & XHTML: The Definitive Guide, OReilly, 6th Edition, October
24, 2006
2. Thomas A. Powell, Web Design: The Complete Reference, McGraw Hill, June 2000
3. Jeffrey C.Jackson, "Web Technologies--A Computer Science Perspective", Pearson Education, 2006
4. Thomas Powell,HTML & CSS: The Complete Reference, McGraw Hill, Fifth Edition, Mar 2010
5. Jon Duckett ,Beginning Web Programming with HTML, XHTML, and CSS, Wrox Publications, 2008
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.codecademy.com
2. http://www.w3schools.com/html/
3. http://www.w3schools.com/css/
4. https://www.khanacademy.org/computing/computer-programming/html-css
5. http://tutorialehtml.com/en/
6. http://www.alternetwebdesign.com/htmltutorial/lesson1.htm
7. http://www.htmlhelp.com/reference/css/
L T P C
15ITA03 INTRODUCTION TO JAVA
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Understand fundamentals of programming such as variables, conditional and iterative execution, methods,
etc.
Understand fundamentals of object-oriented programming in Java, including defining classes, invoking
methods, using class libraries, etc
Have the ability to write a computer program to solve specified problems
Be able to use the Java SDK environment to create, debug and run simple Java programs
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Write basic programs using fundamental structures.
Create basic programs using object oriented concepts.
Create classes that can handle exception and various errors handling mechanism.
Create Simple applications with GUI
Develop applications using applet and graphics.
COURSE PREREQUISTE:
Object Oriented Programming using C++
183
UNITI JAVA FUNDAMENTALS 9
Overview of JDK framework Identifiers variables Assignment statements and Expressions Constants -
Numeric data types, operations and conversions String Type Scanner class if switch statements while do
while for loop nested loop- Defining a method- Calling a method Passing parameters by values Overloading
methods.
UNITII OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING CONCEPTS 9
Class Fundamentals-Using predefined classes--Constructors-Access control-Modifiers -Methods-Dealing with Static

Members and Methods-Method Overloading-Interfaces-Importing Packages-Understanding Class Path-Implementing
Packages-Java Doc Comments-Inheritance-Polymorphism.
UNITIII EXCEPTION / ERROR HANDLING 9
Garbage Collection-Finalize () Method-Exceptions & Errors-Types of Exception-Control Flow In Exceptions-Use of try

-catch-finally-throw-throws in Exception Handling -In-built and User Defined Exceptions-Checked and Un Checked
Exceptions
UNIT IV APPLICATION PROGRAMMING WITH GUI 9
Event-Driven Programming- Event and Event Sources Listeners, Registration and handling events Mouse events
Key events -Introduction to Swings-Frame-Components-Text Input-Choice Components-Menus-Dialog Box-Layout
Management
UNIT V APPLETS AND GRAPHICS 9
Applet class JApplet class Enabling applets to run as application Passing string to applets Html file and applet
tag- Graphics class paint component method Drawing graphics on panels Drawing strings , lines, Rectangles,
and Ovals, Polygons , Polylines, FontMetrics class.
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOK
1. th
Y.Daniel Liang Introduction to Java Programming 7 Edition, Pearson Education,2013
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. P.J.Deitel & H.M.Deitel, Java: How to Program Java 2, Prentice Hall, Seventh Edition, 2011.
2. Herbert Schildt, Java The Complete Reference,Tata McgrawHill, Eight Edition, 2011.
3. E.BalaGurusamy, Programming with java A Primer, Tata McGraw, Hill Education, Fourth Edition, 2009
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://mark.random-article.com/weber/java/schedule.html
2. http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/java/index.html
3. http://docs.oracle.com/javase/tutorial/ -
4. http://horstmann.com/corejava
5. www.deitel.com
6. http://www.kodejava.org/
7. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/java
184
L T P C
15ITA04 PERL
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To teach how to do programs in Perl
To study the basics of Perl syntax and constructs
To introduce list, arrays and hashes implementation in Perl
To read and write subroutines and data files
To parse and manipulate text with Perl regular expressions
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Devise Perl programs using scalar data and control structures
Develop simple programs in Perl using lists, arrays and hashing
Implement Perl Input Output programming
Apply and match regular expressions using Perl
Validate data using regular expressions
COURSE PREREQUISTE:
C Programming
UNITI SCALAR DATA 9
Perl programming introduction Simple Perl program Scalar data: Numbers Strings Variables Operators
Output with print Getting user input - The undefined value Defined functions control structure - if elseif - while
unless until for control loop control conditional operator logical operator
UNITII LIST, ARRAYS AND HASHES 9
Array elements indices List literals Assignment Interpolating arrays into strings For each control structure
Scalar and list context Hash Hash Element Access Hash Assignment Hash Functions Use of Hash - %Env
Hash
UNITIII SUB ROUTINES AND IO 9
Sub routines definition invoking sub routines return variables arguments private variables variable length
parameter list lexical variables non-scalar return values persistent private variables Standard input output
formatted output opening and using file handle
UNITIV REGULAR EXPRESSION 9
Regular expression definition using simple patterns character classes matching with regular expression
anchors match variables - precedence
UNITV PROCESSING REGULAR EXPRESSION 9
Substitution split operator join operator - list context powerful regular expression Perl Modules finding
modules installing modules using modules strings and sorting
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Tom Christiansen, Randal L. Schwartz, Larry Wall, Learning Perl, O'Reilly Media, Sixth Edition, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Tom Christiansen, brian d foy, Larry Wall, Jon Orwant Learning Perl, O'Reilly Media, Fourth Edition, 2012.
2. Harvey M. Deitel, Paul J. Deitel, Tem R. Nieto, D. C. McPhie, Perl How to Program, Prentice Hall, First
edition, 2001.
WEB REFERENCES:
185
1. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/perl/
2. https://www.perl.org
3. http://www.cs.cf.ac.uk/Dave/PERL/
L T P C
15ITA05 FUZZY SYSTEMS
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the role of fuzzy logic for decision making problems
To choose various fuzzy inference systems and approximate reasoning for decision making
To understand the impact of fuzzy system for group decision making
To understand how to evaluate the criteria in structured situations
To learn to hybrid fuzzy with decision making methods
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Identify the decision making problems in fuzzy environments
Identify the suitable FIS for decision making
Implement fuzzy concepts for multi-person decision making
Solve complex problems using multi-criteria decision making
Integrate fuzzy with decision making methods for ranking
NIL
Introduction The Logic of Decisions, Behavioral Decision Theory and Decision Technology Optimization
Outranking Evaluation Basics of Fuzzy Set Theory Individual Decision Making in Fuzzy Environments
UNITII DECISION SUPPORT SYSTEMS 9
Knowledge Based Vs Data based Systems Linguistic Variables Fuzzy logic Approximate Reasoning An
Interactive Decision Support System Fuzzy and Semi Fuzzy Multi Objective Problems Expert Systems and Fuzzy
Sets
UNITIII MULTI-PERSON DECISION MAKING IN FUZZY ENVIRONMENTS 9
Basic Models Fuzzy Games Fuzzy Team Theory Fuzzy Group Decision Making Fuzzy Mathematical
Programming - Fuzzy Linear and Non Linear Programming Fuzzy Multi Stage Programming
UNITIV MULTI CRITERIA DECISION MAKING IN STRUCTURED SITUATIONS 9
Fuzzy Multi Criteria Programming Multi Attribute Decision Making Fuzzy Outranking Operators and
Membership functions in Decision Models
UNITV DECISION MAKING WITH FUZZY INFORMATION 9
Fuzzy Synthetic Evaluation Fuzzy Ordering Non Transitive Ranking Preference and Consensus Multiobjective
Decision Making Fuzzy Bayesian Decision Method Decision Making under Fuzzy States and Fuzzy Actions
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Hans J.Zimmermann, Fuzzy Sets, Decision Making and Expert Systems, International Series in
Management Science/Operations Research, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1987
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Timothy J.Ross , Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications, Third Edition , Wiley Publication, 2012
2. S. N. Sivanandam & S. N. Deepa, Principles of Soft Computing, Wiley - India, 2007.
3. S. Rajasekaran & G.A. Vijayalakshmi Pai, Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic Algorithm: Synthesis and
186
Applications Prentice Hall of India ,2003
WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://www.uic.edu/classes/idsc/ids422/lect2.ppt
2. www.clei.org/cleiej/papers/v13i3p4.pdf
3. www.math.ucdenver.edu/~wlodwick/m4-5779/lecture3fuzzylogic.ppt
L T P C
15ITA06 GRAPHICS PROGRAMMING
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To explore the basic Primitives and attributes in OpenGL

To study the geometric objects and transformations
To Understand the various lighting and shading effects
To gain a proficiency with OpenGL by applying Modeling techniques, curves and surfaces
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Apply basic Primitives and Attributes for 2D transformations

Work with 3D transformations using OpenGL
Implement Lighting and shading effects
Apply various Modeling Techniques
Apply various Curves and Surfaces for different objects
COURSE PREREQUISTE:
C Programming
UNITI GRAPHICS PROGRAMMING 9
Introduction-Sierpinski Gasket-Programming 2D Applications-OpenGL Application Programming Interface-Primitives

and Attributes-Color-Viewing-Control Functions-Gasket program-Polygons and Recursions-3D Gasket-Adding
Interaction-Menus
UNITII GEOMETRIC OBJECTS AND TRANSFORMATIONS 9
Scalars points and Vectors-3D primitives-Coordinate systems and Frames-Frames in open GL-Modeling a colored
cube-Affine Transformations-Translation - Rotation and scaling-Transformation in homogeneous coordinates-
Transformation matrices in OpenGL-spinning of the cube-Interface to 3D applications- quaternion-classical and
computer viewing-parallel, Perspective Projections with OpenGL-Hidden surface Removal
UNITIII LIGHTING AND SHADING 9
Light and Matter-Light sources-The Phong Reflection Model-computation of vectors-Polygonal Shading-specifying

Light Parameters-Implementing a Lighting Model-Shading of the sphere Model-Per Fragment Lighting-Vertices to
fragments-Clipping-Line Segment Clipping-Polygon Clipping-Clipping in 3D-Rasterization-Bresenhams Algorithm-
Polygon Rasterization-Hidden Surface Removal
UNITIV MODELING AND HIERARCHY 9
Symbols and Instances-Hierarchical Models-A Robot Arm-Trees and Traversal-Animation Graphical objects-Scene
Graphs-Open Scene Graphs-Graphics and Internet-Procedural Methods-Algorithmic Models-Newtonion Particles-
Constraints-A Simple Particle System-Language Based Models-Recursive Methods and fractals-Procedural Noise
UNITV CURVES AND SURFACES 9
187
Representation of curves and surfaces-Design Criteria-Parametric cubic Polynomial Curves-Interpolation-Hermite
curves and surfaces-Bezier curves and surfaces-Cubic B Splines-General B Splines-Rendering curves and surfaces-
Utah teapot-Advanced Rendering-Parallel-volume-Direct Volume-Image Based Rendering
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Edward Angel ,Dave Shreiner ,Interactive Computer Graphics: A Top-Down Approach with Shader-Based
OpenGL ,Sixth Edition,2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Sumanta Guha Computer Graphics Through OpenGL: From Theory to Experiments, CRC Press, Second
Edition, 2014
2. Tom McReynolds, David Blythe ,Advanced Graphics Programming Using OpenGLMorgan
Kauffmann,2005
3. Clayton Walnum,3-D graphics programming with OpenGL, Que, 1995
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://learnopengl.com/
2. http://www.videotutorialsrock.com/
3. http://www.cs.uccs.edu/~ssemwal/indexGLTutorial.html
4. http://www.opengl-tutorial.org/
5. http://courses.cs.vt.edu/~cs4204/lectures/opengl_basics.pdf
L T P C
15ITA07 PHP PROGRAMMING
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To introduce web development with PHP

To work with various operations in PHP
To model the design in a web environment
To develop a webpage with database
To test and work with a PHP application
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Create simple basic PHP programs

Create programs using functions and strings
Explore the usage of arrays and objects
Implement graphics, security and web techniques in designing
Implement database connectivity with PHP
COURSE PREREQUISTE:
NIL
UNITI INTRODUCTION TO PHP 9
PHP History and Evolution Installation Language Basics Lexical Structure Data types Variables
Expression & Operators Flow Control statements embedding PHP in web pages
UNITII FUNCTIONS & STRINGS 9
188
Calling a function Defining a function Variable scope function parameters return values variable functions
Strings Quoting string constants Printing string cleaning strings encoding and escaping comparing strings
manipulating and searching strings -
UNITIII ARRAYS & OBJECTS 9
Indexed versus Associative Arrays Identifying elements of an array Storing data in arrays Multidimensional
arrays Extracting multiple values Conversion between arrays and variables Traversing arrays Sorting
Working with arrays Objects Creation Accessing Properties and methods Declaration of class Introspection
UNIT IV WEB TECHNIQUES, GRAPHICS & SECURITY 9
HTTP basics Server Information Processing Forms Setting Response Headers Maintaining State SSL
Graphics Embed an image Create and draw images Images with text Dynamic buttons Color handling
Security Cross site scripting File uploads and Access
UNIT V DATABASE ACCESS & APPLICATION 9
PHP to access a database Relational databases and SQL MySQL object interface Connectivity Direct file
level manipulation Application techniques code libraries handing output - error reporting and suppression
performance tuning
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kevin Tatroe, Peter MacIntyre & Rasmus Lerdorf, Programming PHP, Creating Dynamic
Web Pages, O'Reilly Media, 3rd Edition, 2013
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Steven Holzner ,PHP: The Complete Reference, McGraw Hill Education,2008

2. Timothy Boronczyk , Martin E. Psinas,PHP and MYSQL: Create - Modify Reuse, Wiley India Private
Limited ,2008
3. Matt Doyle,Beginning PHP 5.3, Wiley Publishing Inc., 2009
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://php.net/
2. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/php/
3. http://www.toves.org/books/php/ch03-first/index.html
4. http://www.codecademy.com/en/tracks/php
5. http://www.w3schools.com/php/
L T P C
15ITA08 ANDROID APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To build your own android application for you mobile devices

To understand how android application works.
To utilize the power of background services, thread and notifications
Secure, tune, package and deploy android applications.
189
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Use Android SDK for simple applications
Create Graphical user interfaces for Android application.
Create Android application for data processing and management
Create location based services using android
Test the Android application
COURSE PREREQUISTE:
Java Programming
UNITI INTRODUCTION TO ANDROID 9
Introduction to Android Architecture: Introduction, History, Features and Android Architecture. Android Application
Environment, SDK, Tools: Application Environment and Tools, Android SDK. Programming paradigms and Application
Components Intents, Content providers, Broadcast receivers, Services
UNITII USER INTERFACE DESIGN 9
User Interface Design Views &View Groups, Views : Button, Text Field, Radio Button, Toggle Button, Checkbox,
Spinner, Image View, Image switcher, Event Handling, Listeners, Layouts : Linear, Relative, List View, Grid View, Table
View, Web View, Adapters. Menus, Action Bars, Notifications : Status, Toasts and Dialogs, Styles and Themes,
Creating Custom Widgets, Focus, Touch Mode, Screen Orientation. Designing for Tablets Working with tablets:
Developing for the Honeycomb and Ice Cream Sandwich platforms, Manipulating objects with drag and drop, Optimizing
applications for high screen resolution, combining fragments into a multilane UI. Resources, Assets, Localization:
Resources and Assets, Creating Resources, Managing application resources and assets, Resource-Switching in
Android. Localization, Localization Strategies, Testing Localized Applications, Publishing Localized Applications
UNITIII DATA STORAGE 9
Content Providers: Contents provider, Uri, CRUD access, Browser, CallLog, Contacts, Media Store, and Setting. Data
Access and Storage: Shared Preferences, Storage External, Network Connection. SQLite - SQLite Databases
UNIT IV NATIVE CAPABILITIES 9
Camera, Audio, Sensors and Bluetooth: Android Media API: Playing audio/video, Media recording. Sensors - how
sensors work, listening to sensor readings. Bluetooth. Maps & Location: Android Communications: GPS, Working with
Location Manager, Working with Google Maps extensions, Maps via intent and Map Activity, Location based Services.
Location Updates, location-based services (LBS), Location Providers, Selecting a Location Provider, Finding Your
Location, Map - Based Activities, Load maps, Map API key.
UNIT V TESTING 9
Testing: Testing and Commercializing Applications - Basics of Testing, Testing from an IDE (Eclipse), Activity testing,
Service testing, Content provider testing, Test Classes, Debugging using DDMS.
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Reto Meier, Professional Android 4 Development, John Wiley and Sons, 2012
2. W. Frank Ableson, RobiSen, Chris King and C. Enrique Ortiz, Android in Action, Third Edition, 2012
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Wei-Meng Lee, Android Application Development Cookbook, John Wiley and Sons, 2013.
2. Grant Allen, Beginning Android 4, Apress, 2011.
190
WEB REFERENCES:
1. W1. https://developer.android.com
2. W2. http://www.androidcentral.com/apps
3. W3. https://www.opensesame.com/c/android-app-development-beginners-training-course
L T P C
15ITA09 PYTHON PROGRAMMING
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Understand fundamentals of programming such as variables, conditional and iterative execution, methods, etc.
Understand fundamentals of object-oriented programming in python, including defining classes, invoking
methods, using class libraries, etc
Have the ability to write a program to solve specified problems
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Develop basic programs using fundamental structures.
Create programs using various collection data types.
Apply appropriate Python control flow structure.
Implement user defined python functions.
Design classes and use them
COURSE PREREQUISTE:
NIL
Python object types Numeric Type Basics Numeric Literals Built in Numeric Tools Python Expression operators
Numbers in action Other numeric types String Literals Strings in action String methods String formatting
expressions String formatting method calls General type categories
UNITII LISTS AND DICTIONARIES 9
Lists in action Basic list operations List Iteration and comprehensions Indexing, Slicing and Matrixes Changing
list in place Dictionaries Dictionaries in action Basic dictionary operations Changing Dictionaries In place
Dictionary methods A language table Dictionary usage notes Other ways to make dictionary Tuples Files
Python Type Hierarchies
UNITIII STATEMENT AND SYNTAX 9
Introducing Python statements- A Tale of Two ifs Assignment statements Expression statements Print operations
if statements Python syntax rules while loops for loops Loop coding techniques Iterators List comprehension -
UNIT IV FUNCTIONS 9
Coding functions- Scope basics scope rules global statement Scopes and nested functions Nonlocal statement
Argument Passing Basics Special Argument Matching modes function design concepts- Recursive functions
function objects Anonymous functions mapping functions
UNIT V CLASSES AND OOP 9
Class coding basics Class Statement Methods Inheritance Attribute tree construction specializing Inherited
methods Class Interface Techniques Abstract super classes -Namespaces simple names Attribute names
191
Namespace dictionaries Operator overloading Designing with classes
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mark Lutz , Learning Python , Fifth Edition, O,Reilly, 2013
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Jason Cannon, Python Programming for Beginners O,Reilly, 2010

2. David Beazley , Brain K Jones Python CookBook Third edition,2013
3. CHUN, WESLEY J Core Python Programming, Pearson Education 2012
4. GUTTAG, JOHN V Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python, PHI Learning Private
Limited, New Delhi, 2014
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/python/
2. http://www.learnpython.org/
3. http://www.codecademy.com/en/tracks/python
4. http://www.pyschools.com/
5. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cpPG0bKHYKc&noredirect=1
6. http://www.python-course.eu/python3_course.php
15ITA10 DECISION MAKING METHODS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the logic of MCDM Methods
To learn how to do pairwise comparison
To learn to do normalization of attributes
To understand the role of fuzzy logic for decision making problems
To understand various MCDM methods to choose the best alternative
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Explore various MCDM methods for decision making

Apply quantification methods for decision making problems
Evaluate using relative weights for the attributes in order of relative importance
Apply fuzzy with MCDM methods for decision making
Evaluate the results of fuzzy with MCDM to choose the best alternative
COURSE PREREQUISTE:
NIL
Multi- Criteria Decision Making A General Overview Classification of MCDM Methods WSM WPM AHP
Revised AHP TOPSIS
UNITII QUANTIFICATION 9
192
Qualitative data for MCDM problems Scales for Quantifying Pair wise Comparisons Evaluating different scales
Simulation Analysis of the Computational Results
UNITIII EVALUATION OF WEIGHTS 9
Deriving Relative Weights Sensitivity Analysis Evaluation of methods Process a decision matrix Ranking
abnormalities
UNITIV FUZZY MULTI- CRITERIA DECISION MAKING 9
Fuzzy Operations Ranking of Fuzzy Numbers - Fuzzy WSM method Fuzzy WPM method Fuzzy AHP method
Fuzzy Revised AHP method Fuzzy TOPSIS method
UNITV FUZZY EVALUATION CRITERIA 9
Testing the methods First Evaluative Criterion Second Evaluative Criterion - Computational Experiments - Analysis
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Evangelos Triantaphyllou, Multi-criteria Decision Making Methods: A Comparative Study, Kluwer Academic
Publishers, Springer 2000.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Witold Pedrycz, Petr Ekel, Roberta Parreiras, Fuzzy Multicriteria Decision-Making: Models, Methods and
Applications , Wiley 2010
2. Hans J.Zimmermann, Fuzzy Sets, Decision Making and Expert Systems, International Series in
Management Science/Operations Research, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1987
3. Timothy J.Ross , Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications, Third Edition , Wiley Publication, 2012
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.ccse.kfupm.edu.sa/.../Multi-Criteria%20Decision%20Making.ppt
2. www.ccse.kfupm.edu.sa/~duffuaa/download/Courses/.../TOPSIS.ppt
3. https://www.uic.edu/classes/idsc/ids422/ahp.ppt
Offered by Bio-Tech Department
15BTA01 BASIC CELL AND MOLECULAR BIOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Understand the basics of cellular structure and function.

Gain knowledge about the genetic basis of life.
Understand the regulation of gene expression at transcript and protein level.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of the course students will be able to

Know the basic structure and function of cell and its organelles and its significance for proper functioning
of the cell.
Be aware of the nature of the genetic materials, mechanism of replication and expression.
Be able to appreciate and analyse the basic differences between the cellular organization and
regulation of genes between eukaryotes and prokaryotes.
193
Basic understanding of Biological Sciences.
UNITI CELL STRUCTURE 9
Structural Organization: Prokaryotic and Eukaryotic cell - Cell wall: Primary and Secondary structure model and
function - Plasma membrane: Channels, pumps and receptors - Plasmodesmata - Cell organelles: structure and
functions - Ultra structure and semi autonomous nature of chloroplast and mitochondria.
UNITII CELLULAR ORGANELLES 9
Structure and function of Organelles: Nucleus, ER, golgi complex, ribosome, lysosome, chromosome-
Lampbrush, polytene - Microscopy light microscope, compound microscope, electron microscope, dark field
microscope, phase contrast microscope - Cell cycle and cell division.
UNITIII GENETIC MATERIAL 9
Identification of DNA as genetic material Watson and Crick model of DNA - Structure of DNA and RNA - DNA
replication: Semi conservative Nature of replication - DNA polymerases in prokaryotes- the processes of DNA
replication- Replication in eukaryotes - Mitochondrial DNA replication.
UNITIV GENE EXPRESSION 9
Transcription RNA polymerase, sigma factors - Difference between prokaryotic and eukaryotic transcription -
Regulation of gene expression - Operon concept.
UNITV THE GENETIC CODE AND PROTEIN SYNTHESIS 9
Genetic code - Codons - Anticodons - Wobble hypothesis - Protein synthesis- the stages of protein synthesis -
the process of translation in prokaryotes, factors involved in translation - the triplet nature of genetic code - an
overview of comparisons with eukaryotic translation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. De Robertis, E.D.P. and Robertis, E.M.C., Cell and Molecular Biology. Lippincott William & Wilkins, NY,
8thEdition, 2010.
2. Freifelder, D. Molecular Biology. Narosa Publishing House, 2nd Edition, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Benjamin L., Gene VII Oxford University Press: 2000.

2. Watson J. D., Hopkins N. H., Roberts J. W., Steitz J. A., Weiner A. M., Molecular biology of the Gene, The
Benjamin/Cumming Publishing Company Inc., 4th Edition 1992.
3. Snyder L & Wendy W., Molecular Genetics of Bacteria, ASM press, Washington DC, 2nd Edition, 2003.
15BTA02 BASIC MICROBIOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
History of microbiology and techniques used in microbiology.

Characteristic features of prokaryotes, eukaryotes and viruses.
194
Impact of microbes on environment, health and disease.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Understand the diversity of microbes.
Have knowledge of culturing and controlling the microbes.
Become familiarized with the significance of microbes in daily life.
Basic understanding of Biological sciences
UNITI INTRODUCTION TO MICROBIOLOGY 9
History & Development of microbiology - Microscopy: Simple, Compound Microscopy - Staining: Principle and
technique of simple & differential staining, (Gram, Acid-fast & Endospore staining).
UNITII STRUCTURE OF MICROORGANISMS 9
Prokaryotes and Eukaryotes - Virus; Bacteria: Bacterial morphology & subcellular structures (General
morphology of bacteria, shapes & sizes) - Slime layer & capsule, Cell wall structure of gram positive and gram
negative cells - General account of Ribosome, Flagella & Fimbriae - Chromatin materials, plasmids and
episomes - Endospore: Detailed study of endospore structure & its formation - Basis of resistance.
UNITIII BACTERIAL GROWTH AND NUTRITION 9
Cultivation of microbes: Growth rate and generation time - Nutritional types of microbes - Culturing bacteria
Media, Sterilization Physical and chemical sterilizing agents Principle, Mode of action and application -
culturing techniques.
UNITIV ENVIRONMENTAL MICROBIOLOGY 9
Role of microorganisms in biogeochemical cycles (N, P and C cycles) Biodegradation of xenobiotics

(pesticides) Microbes in waste treatment: solid and liquid wastes sewage treatment (Primary, secondary &
tertiary treatments) COD & BOD pollution indicating microbes Biofertilizers.
UNITV MICROBES IN HEALTH AND DISEASE 9
Human Normal Microflora: Skin, stomach, Small Intestine, Large Intestine, Genitourinary tract - Relationship
between normal microbiota and the host - Principles of Infectious Diseases: Epidemiology, Infectious Disease
cycle - Pathogen transmission - control of epidemics Case study, disease caused by viruses, bacteria, fungi
and protists, food borne and water borne diseases - an overview.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Pelczar M.J., Chan E.C.S., Krein N.R., Microbiology, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 5th Edition, 2008.
2. Prescott L.M., Harley J.P., Klein D.A., Microbiology, Wm. C. Brown Publishers, 9th Edition, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Black, J.G., Black, L.J. Microbiology-Principles and Explorations, Wiley 9th Edition, 2014.
th
2. Murray R., Manual of Clinical Microbiology: Illustrations, American Society for Microbiology, 9 Edition,
2007.
195
15BTA03 BASIC BIOCHEMISTRY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart basic knowledge of chemistry of biomolecules.

To understand the structure, function and metabolism of carbohydrates, proteins and lipids.
To learn the biochemistry of the genetic material.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Understand the chemical nature of biologically significant molecules.
Correlate the function and significance of the biomolecules with their chemical structure.
Appreciate the chemical nature of biological processes.
Basic understanding of Biological sciences.
UNITI INTRODUCTION TO BIOMOLECULES 9
Water and Life pH and Buffers - Law of Thermodynamics: Entropy and enthalpy - Chemical bonds in
biochemistry-molecular structures, Biomolecules and their functional groups - Biochemical evolution.
UNITII CARBOHYDRATES 9
Structure of monosaccharides, sterioisomerism and optical isomerism of sugars - Reactions of aldehydes and
ketone groups - Ring structure and anomeric forms mutarotation - Structure, occurrence and biological
importance oligosaccharides and polysaccharides - Carbohydrate metabolism: glycolysis, gluconeogenesis -
TCA cycle.
UNITIII PROTEINS 9
Structure and Function - Primary, Secondary, Tertiary and Quaternary structures - Enzymes and their
classifications - General properties of enzymes (pH, Temperature, Substrate concentrations) - 3-D structure of
proteins - amino acid sequencing - Metabolism of amino acids - Metabolism of aromatic amino acids Inborn
errors of metabolism.
UNITIV LIPIDS 9
Definition and classification - Fatty acids: Introduction, classification, nomenclature, structure and properties of
saturated and unsaturated fatty acids - Essential fatty acids - Triacylglycerols: nomenclature, physical properties,
chemical properties and characterization of fats - hydrolysis, saponification - rancidity of fats - Biological
significance of fats.
UNITV NUCLEIC ACIDS 9
Chemical nature of nucleic acids - Double helical structure - Nucleic acid denaturation - Classes of nucleic acids-
Metabolism of nucleic acids - Synthesis of purines and pyrimidines.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Nelson, D.L., M.M. Cox, Lehningers Principles of Biochemistry, W.H.Freeman & Co., 6th Edition, 2012.
196
2. Stryer L., Biochemistry, W.H.Freeman & Co., 7th Edition, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Voet D., Prat W.C., Voet J., Principles of Biochemistry, John Wiley and Sons, 4th Edition 2012.
2. Wilson K., Walker J., Principles and Techniques of Biochemistry and Molecular Biology, Cambridge
University Press, 7th Edition, 2010.
15BTA04 BASIC IMMUNOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge about the organization of immune system.

To familiarize students with basic components in innate immunity.
To introduce students to the critical role of adaptive immune system and vaccination concepts.
To familiarize students with immune system disorders.
To make students understand the importance of transplantation and immunotherapy.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Able to understand the various types of cells and organs involved in immune system.
Able to illustrate the various barriers of innate immunity and importance of complement system.
Able to understand the various concepts and molecules of adaptive immunity and methods involved in
vaccine designing.
Able to analyze the reason behind the various autoimmune disorders.
Able to apply the concepts of immunology immunotherapy of infectious diseases and transplantation.
Basic knowledge in microbiology, genetics, and cell biology.
UNITI ORGANIZATION OF IMMUNE SYSTEM 9
History - Hematopoiesis - Primary & Secondary lymphoid organs - Myeloid cells, Lymphoid cells, Dendritic cells
and Natural killer cells.
UNITII INNATE IMMUNITY 9
Innate immunity: Anatomical, Physiological, Phagocytic and Inflammatory barriers - The complement system:
Overview - Induced innate responses to infections.
UNITIII THE ADAPTIVE IMMUNE AND INFECTION 9
Cell-Mediated Immune response: T cell mediated response, Humoral Immune Response - Antibodies:Structure
of Immunoglobulins, Immunoglobulin subtype - T cell receptor - Cytokines: functions, Infectious agents and how
they cause disease: Bacterial (Tuberculosis), viral (Influenza) and parasitic infection (helminthes) - vaccines:
history, principle of vaccination - Conventional and recombinant vaccines.
UNITIV IMMUNE DISORDERS 9
Inherited immunodeficiency diseases: SCID, DiGeorges syndrome, X-linked agammaglobulinemia - Acquired

Immune Deficiency Syndrome: AIDS - Hypersensitivities: Type I, II, III and IV - Autoimmune responses: Graves
disease, Rheumatoid Arthritis, Diabetes Mellitus Type I, II - Myesthenia gravis.
UNITV TRANSPLANTATION AND IMMUNOTHERAPY 9
197
Tissue typing and matching transplantation: Heart, Liver, Kidney Immunosuppression - Transplant rejection -
Immunotherapy: Infections, Cancer.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Kuby J., Immunology, WH Freeman & Co., 6th Edition, 2000.

2. Roitt I., Brostoff M., Immunology, Mosby Publication, 8th Edition, 2012.
3. Immunobiology by Janeway , Travers, Walport, Sclomchik, Garland Science; 7th edition, 2007.
4. Abbas, K.A., Litchman, A.H., Pober, J.S., Cellular and Molecular Immunology, W.B. Saunders Co.,
th
Pennsylvania, 7 Edition, 2011.
5. William E.P., Fundamental Immunology, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 7th Edition, 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ashim K.C., Immunology and Immunotechnology, Oxford University Press, 1st Edition, 2006.
2. Christine D., Clinical Immunology and Serology: A laboratory Perspective; F.A. Davis Co., 3rd revised
Edition, 2009.
15BTA05 CHEMICALS IN ENVIRONMENT AND PUBLIC HEALTH L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Define the major sources and types of environmental agents and discuss the transport and fate of these
agents in the environment.
Identify the carriers or vectors that promote the transfer of these agents from the environment to the
human.
To understand the procedures and requirement for hazardous waste management and gain the
knowledge on the policies, legislations.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Understand the relationship between environment and human health.
Able to understand the impact of hazardous waste on environment and human health.
Acquire the knowledge about the Environmental Management Policies and Practices.
Environmental Science, Physics, Chemistry.
UNITI ENVIRONMENT AND HEALTH 9
Human impact on the environment - Environment-human interaction - Environmental impact on humans - Indoor
and outdoor air - Water & Soil pollution - Exposure, dose and Response - Food and water-borne disease.
UNITII IMPACT OF INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTS AND HAZARDOUS WASTE 9
Non Hazardous wastes - Hazardous wastes: Metals, chemical, drugs, leather, pulp, electroplating, dye, rubber -
Hazardous wastes on environment and human heath: case studies (chemical accumulation in plants - Cadmium
in rice, Hexachlorobenzene in seed grains : Cancer, neurological disorder, acute lung diseases, behavioural and
mental effects - Carbamate pesticide in watermelons: Gastrointestinal, skeletal, muscle, autonomic and central
198
nervous system effects, , Lead in paint) - Food adulterants and their impact on human health.
UNITIII IMPACT OF BIOMEDICAL WASTES 9
Characteristics & sources BMW: Segregation, collection, transportation, disposal - Liquid BMW - Radioactive
waste - Metals / Chemicals / Drug waste - Modern technology for handling BMW Monitoring & controlling of cross
infection - Health and Environmental effect: case studies.
UNITIV IMPACT OF NUCLEAR WASTES 9
Sources - Types of Nuclear waste - Nuclear power plants and fuel production Waste generation from nuclear
power plants - Disposal options, Defining risk and environmental risk - Methods of risk assessment - Measures
and health effects: case studies.
UNITV ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT POLICIES AND PRACTICES 9
Environment and pollution - definition as per Environmental law - General powers of Central and state
Government under EPA - Important Notification in EPA 1986 - Constitution of Pollution Control Boards - Powers,
functions, Accounts, Audit etc. - Equitable remedies for pollution control - Solid waste management Hazardous
Wastes (Handling and Management) Rules 1998, Biomedical Wastes (Handling and Management) Rules 1998.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Rodricks J.V., Calculated Risks- The Toxicity and Human Health Risks of Chemicals in Our Environment,
Cambridge University press, 2nd Edition, 2007.
2. Lippmann M., Environmental toxicants: Human exposures and their health effects, New York: Van
Nostrand Reinhold, 1992.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Philp, R. B., Environmental hazards and human health, Boca Raton: Lewis Publishers, 1995
2. Eckenfelder Jr. W .W., Industrial Water Pollution Control, McGraw-Hill Book Company, New Delhi, 2000.
3. Michel, Mckinney, Robert, Logan, Environmental Science Systems & Solutions, Jones & Barlett
Publishers, Canada, 2007.
15BTA06 BIOLOGICAL WASTE MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Hazardous wastes and its effects.
Disposal of biological wastes.
Safe handling and management of biological wastes.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

To understand about hazardous wastes, its origin and effects on public health.
To impart knowledge about sources of biohazardous wastes, risks associated and regulatory aspects of
health care wastes.
To understand the methods of treatment, disposal and management of biological wastes.
199
Environmental Science, Physics, Chemistry.
UNITI INTRODUCTION TO HAZARDOUS WASTE 9
Hazardous waste - Classifications of hazardous waste and its sources - Effects on public health and
environment.
UNITII BIO HAZARDOUS WASTE 9
Biological, Biomedical and Healthcare wastes Sources - Bio hazardous wastes classification - Risks associated
with bio hazardous waste - Need for control.
UNITIII LEGISLATIVE, REGULATORY AND POLICY ASPECTS OF HEALTH- 9

CARE WASTE
National policies and its five guiding principles - Available guidance World health organization (WHO), The
International Solid Waste Association (ISWA) and its policy document.
UNITIV BIOLOGICAL WASTE TREATMENT AND DISPOSAL 9
Segregation, storage and transport of healthcare and biological wastes - Treatment and disposal method
healthcare waste - Disposal of biological and sharp wastes - Health and safety practices for health-care
personnel and waste workers.
UNITV MANAGEMENT OF BIO HAZARDOUS WASTES 9
Healthcare waste - Management planning - Infectious waste management plans - Healthcare waste minimization,
reuse and recycling.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Blackman W. C., Basic Hazardous Waste Management, CRC Press, 3rd Edition, 2001.
2. Henry J. G., Heinke G. W., Environmental Science and Engineering, Pretice Hall of India, 2nd Edition,
2004.
3. Cheremisinoff, N. P., Cheremisinoff P. N., Hazardous Materials and Waste Management: A Guide For The
Professional Hazards Manager, Noyes Publications, 1995.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Panda H., The Complete Book on Biological Waste Treatment and their Utilization, NIIR Project
Consultancy Services, 2013.
EXTENSIVE READING:
1. Safe Management of Wastes from Health-Care Activities, 2nd Edition, WHO, 2014.
2. Biomedical waste (Management and Handling) Rules, Ministry of Environment & Forests, 1998.
15BTA07 NANOBIOTECHNOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To provide the knowledge in basics of Nanobiotechnology.

Understand the application of nanomaterials in biotechnology and acquire the knowledge about the
200
DNA, proteins, amino acids, drug delivery, biomedicine etc.,
To make the students understand about the functional principles of bionanotechnology.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Able to understand physicochemical properties of nanomaterials and the unique changes that happen at
nanoscale.
Able to understand nanoscale view of the natural biomolecular processes, synthesis, modification, and
characterization of nanomaterials.
Able to understand the application of nanomaterials to biological problems including nanomedicine.
UNITI NANOSCALE AND NANOBIOTECHNOLOGY 9
Introduction to Nanoscience and Nanotechnology - Milestones in Nanotechnology - Overview of

Nanobiotechnology and Nanoscale processes - Physicochemical properties of materials in Nanoscales - Lessons
from Nature on making nanodevices.
UNITII NANOMATERIALS 9
Types and synthesis of Nanomaterials: Quantum dots, Nanoparticles, Nanocrystals, Dendrimers, Buckyballs,
Nanotubes - Gas, liquid, and solid phase synthesis of Nanomaterials - Lithography techniques (Photolithography,
Dip-pen and Electron beam lithography) - Thin film deposition Electrospinning - Bio-synthesis of nanomaterials.
UNITIII PROPERTIES AND MEASUREMENT OF NANOMATERIALS 9
Optical Properties: Absorption, Fluorescence, and Resonance - Methods for the measurement of Nanomaterials -
Microscopy measurements: SEM, TEM, AFM and STM - Confocal and TIRF imaging.
UNITIV PROTEIN AND DNA BASED NANOSTRUCTURES 9
Protein based nanostructures: building blocks and templates Proteins as transducers and amplifiers of
biomolecular recognition events Nanobioelectronic devices and polymer nanocontainers Microbial production
of inorganic nanoparticles Magnetosomes .DNA based nanostructures Topographic and Electrostatic
properties of DNA and proteins Hybrid conjugates of gold nanoparticles DNA oligomers Use of DNA
molecules in nanomechanics and Computing.
UNITV APPLICATIONS 9
Nanoparticles as carrier for genetic material Nanotechnology in agriculture Nanomedicine - Drug delivery -
DNA computing - Molecular design using biological selection - Harnessing molecular motors - Artificial life -
Hybrid materials Biosensors - Future of Bionanotechnology - Health and environmental impacts of
nanotechnology.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Christof M. Niemeyer and Chad A. Mirkin, Nanobiotechnology: Concepts, Applications and Perspectives,
Wiley VCH, 1st Edition, 2004.
2. Oded Shoseyov and Ilan Levy NanoBiotechnology: BioInspired Devices and Materials of the Future,
Humana Press; 1st Edition 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
201
1. Sandra J Rosenthal and David W. Wright, NanoBiotechnology Protocols (Methods in Molecular Biology),
Humana Press; 1st Edition, 2005.
st
2. Clarke. A.R. and Eberhardt C. N. (Editors), Microscopy Techniques for Material Science, CRC Press. 1
Edition, 2002.
15BTA08 HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The basic architecture of human body.
Organization of human organ systems.
Physiological significance of the human organ system.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Understand basic human anatomy.

Know the functions of different organs and their significance.
Implement the knowledge for up-keeping good health.
UNITI GENERAL ANATOMY OF THE BODY 9
Introduction to basic concepts of: Body planes, Tissues (Types, origin & function) organs.
UNITII BLOOD 9
Composition of blood Haemopoesis - Structure and function of hemoglobin - Haemostasis (all types of clotting
mechanisms) - Blood groups and introduction to basic concepts of transfusion.
UNITIII NERVE PHYSIOLOGY 9
Origin of resting membrane potential and action potential - Electrophysiology of ion channels - Structure and
function of neuron - Conduction of nerve impulse in a neuron - Synapse, its types and synaptic transmission -
Neurotransmitters, types and functions.
UNITIV MUSCULAR SYSTEM AND ENDOCRINOLOGY 9
Types of muscles - Functional anatomy of muscular system - Concepts of degeneration and regeneration of
muscle - Neuromuscular transmission - Muscle excitation and contraction - Types of contraction and its
properties - General mechanism of hormone action - Glands and their hormone, structure, function, regulation.
UNITV CARDIOVASCULAR SYSTEM 9
Structure and function of heart - Cardiac cycle - Basic concepts of electrocardiogram (ECG) - Circulatory system
and hemodynamic - Lymph and lymphatic circulation - Blood pressure (causes and factors affecting it).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
202
TEXTBOOKS:
th
1. Stuart I. F H., Human Physiology McGraw- Hill, 13 Edition, 2012.
2. Guyton and Hall, Text book of Medical Physiology, W B Saunders and Company, 13th Edition, 2015.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Gerad J. T., Sandra R. G., Principles of Anatomy and Physiology - Control systems of human body, Vol-3,
Wiley and Sons, 10th Edition, 2006.
2. Barett K.E., Barman S.M., Boitans S., Brook H., Ganongs Review of Medical physiology, Tata McGraw
Hill, 23rd Edition (Lange basic science), 2009.
Offered by MBA Department
15BAA01 ESSENTIALS OF FINANCE L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To develop an understanding of business related finance.

To have an understanding of finance in order to contribute to the organizations success.
To improve the financial skills in order to make critical business decisions involving budgets, cost savings
and growth strategies.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course the student will be able to:
understand financial terms

interpret financial statements
make decision on budgeting and investment
communicate with financial experts
UNITI Introduction to Finance 9
Role for Finance for Individual and Organization Goals and Functions of Finance - Time Value of Money
Significance
UNITII Financial Planning and Decisions 9
Financial Planning Decisions Investment Decision Financing Decision - Dividend Decision - Evaluation of
Investment Projects and Financing Working Capital
UNITIII Funds Management 9
Funds Mobilization Sources Internal and external
UNITIV Financial Statements 9
Financial Statements - Balance Sheet PL account - Cash/Fund Flow - Analysis
UNITV Overview of Indian Financial Markets 9
Financial System Bank and Financial Institutions Capital Market - Money Market
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
203
TEXTBOOKS:
th
1. I. M. Pandey, Financial Management, (10 ed.), Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
th
1. Prasanna Chandra, Financial Management, (7 ed.), Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.
th
2. Khan M Y and Jain P K, Financial Management, (6 ed.), McGraw Hill, 2013.
L T P C
15BAA02 ESSENTIALS OF MARKETING
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basics of Marketing Management as a functional area of an organisation.

To understand the basic elements that makes up the marketing function.
To understanding the functions of a marketing department.
To understand the importance of marketing to an organisation.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course students will be able to:
Describe a Marketing Department and the functions of a marketing department.
Choose and understand the needs of the customers.
Combine the four Ps of marketing to design a marketing model
Have a basic ideas on how a market segmented and customers are targeted.
Have a basic understanding on the elements of the marketing mix
UNITI Understanding Marketing Management an overview 9
Introduction, Marketing department functions, Selling vs Marketing, Marketing concepts (Marketers and
Prospects, Needs, Wants, and Demands, Value and Satisfaction), Basics of Market segmentation, Target
markets and Positioning.
UNITII The Marketing mix element Product 9
Introduction, Characteristics of the product life cycle and their marketing implications, Facets of the PLC, New
product development, The market diffusion process, Organizing for new product development
UNITIII The Marketing mix element Price 9
Introduction, Price and the marketing mix, Pricing objectives, Factors affecting pricing decisions, Setting a price,
Pricing industrial goods, Pricing and information technology
UNITIV The Marketing mix element Promotion 9
Communications contact techniques (Promotion mix) - Advertising, Direct marketing, Sales promotion, Personal
selling, Sponsorship, Publicity
UNITV The Marketing mix element Place: channels of distribution 9
Introduction, Intermediaries in channels of distribution - Sales agents, Distributors, Wholesalers, Retailers, Franchising,
Internet marketing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Marilyn A. Stone, John Desmond, Fundamentals of Marketing (Special Indian Edition), Routledge, Taylor
& Francis Group, 2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
204
th
1. William J. Stanton, Michael J. Etzel, Bruce J. Walter, Fundamentals of Marketing, (10 ed.), TMH, 1994.
th
2. Philip Kotler, Marketing Management: A South Asian Perspective, (14 ed.), Pearson India, 2012.
L T P C
15BAA03 ESSENTIALS OF HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To make the participant understand the role of HR Department in an organization

To know the various functional areas of HRM
To understand the recent developments in HR
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students will understand the basic concepts in HRM
Students will be aware of human resource requirement for an organization
Students will be aware of the ways for developing the skills and knowledge of the employees
Students will be able to understand the motivation model in an organization
Students will be aware of present development in HR
UNITI Introduction 9
Introduction to HRM Meaning, Importance and Objectives, History of Managing Human Resources,
Environment of HR. Functions and Roles of HR Manager
UNITII Procurement of Human Resources 9

Job Analysis Meaning, Process and Methods, Human Resource Planning Importance, Process, HR Demand
and Supply Forecasting Techniques. Recruitment Importance, Recruitment Sources, Selection Process
Socialization / Induction Importance and Types
UNITIII Development / Training 9
Training Purpose, Process Need Identification, On-the-Job Methods and Off-the-Job Methods. Executive
Development Programmes Difference from training. Performance Appraisal Process, Techniques MBO and
360 Degree Feedback. Job Changes - Promotion, Demotion and Transfer
UNITIV Compensation and Motivation 9
Job Evaluation Meaning, Process, Compensation Plan Deciding factors & Framing Process. Human Needs
Motivation Theories Maslows Need theory and Herzbergs two factor theory, Applications Rewards and
Reinforcement. Grievances Causes and Redressal methods. Disciplinary Action Nature and Types
UNITV Maintenance and Separation 9
The Factories Act, 1948 Health, Safety and Welfare Provisions. The Industrial Employment (Standing Orders)
Act, 1946 Framing Standing Order. Separation Retirement, Layoff, Out-placement & Discharge. Latest trends
in HRM - HRIS Meaning and Implementation Process. E-HRM.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
st
1. Arun Monappa, Managing Human Resources, (1 ed.), Trinity Press Publications, 2014.
th
2. Dessler, Human Resource Management, (12 ed.), Pearson Education Limited, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
th
1. Aswathappa K., Human Resource Management, (7 ed.), 2013, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
th
2. Decenzo and Robbins, Human Resource Management, (10 ed.), Wiley, 2010.
3. Mamoria C.B & Mamoria S., Personnel Management, Himalaya Publishing Co., 2010.
nd
4. Eugence Mckenna & Nic Beach, Human Resource Mgmt, (2 ed.), Pearson Education Ltd, 2008.
th
5. Wayne Cascio, Managing Human Resource, (9 ed.), Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.
205
th
6. Ivancevich, Human Resource Management, (12 ed.), Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2012.
206

Ece

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Ece

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

MEPCO SCHLENK ENGINEERING COLLEGE, SIVAKASI (AUTONOMOUS)

AFFILIATED TO ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI 600 025

Department Vision Department Mission

UG Programme Educational Objectives (PEOs)

UG Programme Outcomes (POs)

SL. NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

SEMESTER II Electronics and Communication Engineering

SL. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

Total No. of Credits : 190 (Regular)

Total No. of Credits : 137 (LES)

Curriculum for Core Electives

Core Elective I(V Semester)

Core Elective II(VI Semester)

Core Elective IV(VII Semester)

Core Elective V(VII Semester)

Core Elective VI(VIII Semester)

Offered by Civil Department

Offered by EEE Department

Offered by CSE Department

Offered by Mechanical Department

Offered by Bio-Tech Department

Offered by MBA Department

Course Objectives are to:

enable the students of Engineering and Technology build up vocabulary

1. Kalam, Abdul. The Wings of Fire, Universities Press, Hyderabad. 1999.

Course Objectives are to:

At the end of the course, the students are able to

UNIT 0 (Not for Examination) 5+ 0

Basic concepts on limits, continuity, derivative & integrals of a single variable

UNIT-I MATRICES 9+3

UNIT-II FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 9+3

UNIT-III INFINITE SERIES 9+3

UNIT-IV IMPROPER INTEGRALS 9+3

UNIT-V MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 9+3

UNITII ACOUSTICS AND ULTRASONICS 9

UNITIII THERMAL PHYSICS 9

UNITIV APPLIED OPTICS 9

UNITV SOLID STATE PHYSICS 9

T1. Marikani A, Engineering Physics, PHI, New Delhi, 2013.

15BS103 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY LT PC

The student should be familiar with

The treatment of water for potable and industrial purposes.

Different types of fuels and combustion.

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Have a sound knowledge on different types of fuels.

UNITIII CORROSION AND ITS CONTROL 9

UNITIV ENGINEERING MATERIALS 9

UNITV FUELS AND COMBUSTION 9

15GE101 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING LTPC

To gain knowledge on problem solving techniques

Solve problems using sound techniques

UNIT II BASIC CONSTRUCTS IN C 9

UNIT III ARRAYS AND STRINGS IN C 8

UNIT V STRUCTURES, UNIONS AND FILE HANDLING IN C 9

1. Brian.W.Kernighan and Dennis.M.Ritchie, The C Programming language, Second Edition, Pearson

UNITIV SECTION OF SOLIDS AND DEVELOPMENT OF LATERAL 14

To have a study on determination of Rigidity modulus and Youngs modulus

Find the moment of inertia of disc and Rigidity modulus of wire

2. Non-uniform pending- Youngs modulus determination

3. Air-wedge- Determination of thickness of a thin sheet of paper

4. Spectrometer- Determination of wavelength of Hg spectrum using grating

5. Lees disc-Determination of thermal conductivity of bad conductor

6. Determination of ultrasonic velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid Ultrasonic interferometer.

2. Programs using decision making statements